Home

2 Select an image.

1. O Shooting 4 Red Page Live View shooting Enable Disable 203 AF mode Live mode X Live mode Quick mode 207 Grid display Off 3x3 6x4 3x3 diag 203 Aspect ratio 3 2 4 3 16 9 1 1 204 Exposure simulation Enable During amp Disable 205 Silent LV shooting Mode 1 Mode 2 Disable 206 Metering timer 4 sec 16 sec 30 sec 1 min 10 min 206 30 min In the lt gt mode these menu options are displayed under 2 AF AF1 Purple Case 1 Versatile multi purpose setting 86 Case 2 Continue to track subjects ignoring possible 86 obstacles Case 3 Instantly focus on subjects suddenly entering 87 AF points Gace For subjects that accelerate or decelerate 87 quickly For erratic subjects moving quickly in any gasea direction disabled in Single point AF mode ee For subjects that change speed and move Cases erratically disabled in Single point AF mode 89 AF AF2 Purple Al Servo 1st image ot dats shy priority Release priority Equal priority Focus priority 94 Al Servo 2nd image Shooting speed priority Equal priority Focus 95 priority priority 350 Menu Settings a SS Se i AF AF3 Purple Page Enable after One Shot AF Disable after One USM lens electronic MP ot AF Disable in AF mode 95 AF assist beam firing Enable Disable IR AF assist beam only 97 onesh
2. EOS Software Instruction Manuals Disk The Software Instruction Manuals are included on the CD ROM as PDF files See page 393 for instructions on using the EOS Software Instruction Manuals disk Conventions Used in this Manual mas Icons in this Manual lt gt Indicates the Main Dial lt gt Indicates the Quick Control Dial lt i gt Indicates the Multi controller lt gt Indicates the Setting button 64 66 610 16 Indicates that the corresponding function remains active for 4 sec 6 sec 10 sec or 16 sec respectively after you let go of the button In this manual the icons and markings indicating the camera s buttons dials and settings correspond to the icons and markings on the camera and on the LCD monitor MM Indicates a function that can be changed by pressing the lt MENU gt button and changing the setting x When shown at the upper right of a page it indicates that the function is available only when the Mode Dial is setto P Tv Av M or B The respective function cannot be used in the lt gt Scene Intelligent Auto mode p Reference page numbers for more information Warning to prevent shooting problems Supplemental information Tips or advice for better shooting s i S Problem solving advice Basic Assumptions e All operations explained in this manual assume that the power switch has been set to lt ON gt and the lt
3. Group A Autofocusing with 61 points is possible All of the AF area selection modes are selectable W Dual cross type AF point Subject tracking is superior and the focusing precision is higher than with other AF points E Cross type AF point Subject tracking is superior and high precision focusing is achieved O AF points sensitive to horizontal lines EF 200mm f 1 8L USM EF 24mm 1 4L USM EF 50mm 1 8 II Extender EF 1 4x EF 24mm f 1 4L Il USM EF 85mm f 1 2L USM EF 200mm f 2L IS USM EF 200mm f 2L IS USM EF 28mm f 1 8 USM EF 85mm 1 2L II USM Extender EF 1 4x EF 35mm 1 4L USM EF 85mm f 1 8 USM EF 200mm f 2 8L USM EF 35mm f 2 EF 100mm f 2 USM EF 200mm 2 8L II USM EF 50mm f 1 0L USM EF 135mm f 2L USM EF 300mm f 2 8L USM as EF 135mm f 2L USM EF 50mm 1 2L USM Extender EF 1 4x EF 300mm f 2 8L IS USM EF 50mm f 1 4 USM EF 135mm f 2 8 Softfocus EF 300mm 2 8L IS II USM EF 50mm 1 8 EF 200mm f 1 8L USM EF 400mm f 2 8L USM 79 Lenses and Usable AF Points EF 400mm f 2 8L II USM EF 16 35mm f 2 8L USM EF 70 200mm 2 8L USM EF 400mm f 2 8L IS USM EF 16 35mm f 2 8L Il USM EF 70 200mm 2 8L IS USM EF 400mm f 2 8L IS II USM EF 17 35mm 2 8L USM EF 70 200mm f 2 8L IS II USM TS E 45mm 2 8 EF 20 35mm f 2 8L EF 80 200mm 2 8L TS E 90mm 2 8
4. Q The HDR mode cannot be set if you use any of the following AEB white balance bracketing multiple exposures bulb exposure or movie shooting Flash will not fire during HDR shooting 173 HDR HDR High Dynamic Range Shooting ce SS UUU l About Effects e Natural For images preserving a wide tonal range where the highlight and shadow detail would otherwise be lost Art standard While the highlight and shadow detail will be better preserved than with Natural the contrast will be lower and the gradation flatter to have the picture look like a painting The subject outlines will have bright or dark edges Art vivid The colors are more saturated than with Art standard and the low contrast and flat gradation create a graphic art effect Art bold The colors are the most saturated making the subject pop out and the picture look like an oil painting Art embossed The color saturation brightness contrast and gradation are decreased to make the picture look flat The picture looks faded and old The subject outlines will have bright or dark edges Art standard Art vivid Art bold Art embossed Saturation Standard High Higher Low Bold outline Standard Weak Strong Stronger Brightness Standard Standard Standard Dark Tone Flat Flat Flat Flatter Fl Each effect will be applied while based on the characteristics of the Picture Style currently set 174 HDR HDR High
5. 13 Highlight alert AF point disp Playback grid Histogram display Movie play count Magnificatn approx 1 File numbering Auto rotate Eye Fi settings 2 Auto power off LCD brightness VF grid display 3 Sensor cleaning Auto cleaning button display options button function 4 1 Exposure level increments ISO speed setting increments Bracketing auto cancel Bracketing sequence Number of bracketed shots Safety shift 4 2 LV shooting area display Dial direction during Tv Av Multi function lock Custom Controls 9 3 Add cropping information Default Erase option Q My Menu settings will not be registered When the Mode Dial is set to lt M gt lt gt or lt gt you cannot select 4 Clear all camera settings and 4 4 Clear all Custom Func C Fn Fil e Even when the Mode Dial is set to lt gt lt gt or lt gt you can still change shooting function settings and menu settings e By pressing the lt INFO gt button you can check which shooting mode is registered under lt W gt lt gt and lt gt p 336 337 334 Reference This chapter provides reference information for camera features system accessories etc INFO Button Functions mx When you press the lt INFO gt button while the camera is ready to shoot you can display Displays camera settings Electronic level p 60 and Displays shooting functions p 337 ta b
6. lt K7 gt Mirror lockup p 184 lt HDR gt HDR shooting p 173 L lt h gt Multiple exposure shooting p 177 The display will show only the settings currently applied 21 Nomenclature lt p gt CF card selection icon ISO speed p 124 4 lt ISO gt ISO speed p 124 lt D gt Highlight tone 4 priority p 146 one ye 1 68 01 Exposure level indicator Exposure compensation amount p 169 AEB range p 170 Flash exposure compensation amount p 188 Image recording quality p 119 L Large M Medium SI Small 1 S2 Small 2 Fine 3 Small 3 Fine RAW M Medium RAW S Small RAW 22 lt gt SD card selection icon sonaann IE AA a680 1H mama e gt SEDMA GA zza lt B gt SD card indicator lt gt AEB p 170 m Metering mode p 167 Evaluative metering Partial metering CJ Spot metering CJ Center weighted ae average metering Battery check p 35 lt 4 gt Flash exposure compensation p 188 Nomenclature Viewfinder Information Spot metering circle p 168 Area AF frame p 73 Focusing screen lt C gt Single AF point lt 2 gt Spot AF single point p 75 E Grid p 59 e gt Sp single point p 75 aam H Tae
7. EF 28 70mm f 2 8L USM Manual focus without tilt shift Group B Autofocusing with 61 points is possible All of the AF area selection modes are selectable W Dual cross type AF point Subject tracking is superior and the focusing precision is higher than with other AF points E Cross type AF point Subject tracking is superior and high precision focusing is achieved O AF points sensitive to horizontal lines EF 14mm f 2 8L USM EF 15mm f 2 8 Fisheye EF 24mm 2 8 EF 14mm 2 8L II USM EF 20mm f 2 8 USM EF 24 70mm 2 8L USM Group C Autofocusing with 61 points is possible All of the AF area selection modes are selectable B Cross type AF point Subject tracking is superior and high precision focusing is achieved 80 lines O AF points sensitive to horizontal Lenses and Usable AF Points EF 50mm f 2 5 Compact Macro TS E 24mm f 3 5L EF 200mm f 1 8L USM Extender EF 2x EF 100mm f 2 8 Macro TS E 24mm f 3 5L II EF 200mm f 2L IS USM Extender EF 2x EF 100mm f 2 8L Macro IS USM EF 200mm f 2 8L USM Extender EF 1 4x EF 8 15mm f 4L Fisheye USM EF 200mm f 2 8L II USM EF 300mm f 4L USM Ai E oe EF 17 40mm f 4L USM EF 300mm f 4L IS USM Eom ea EF 24 105mm f 4L IS USM EF 400mm f
8. Create folder Folder name Highest file number About Folders As with 100EOS5D for example the folder name starts with three digits the folder number followed by five alphanumeric characters A folder can contain up to 9999 images file number 0001 9999 When a folder becomes full a new folder with the folder number increased by one is created automatically Also if manual reset p 155 is executed a new folder will be created automatically Folders numbered from 100 to 999 can be created Creating Folders with a Personal Computer With the card open on the screen create a new folder named DCIM Open the DCIM folder and create as many folders as necessary to save and organize your images The folder name must follow the format 100ABC_D The first three digits are the folder number from 100 to 999 The final five characters can be any combination of upper and lower case letters from A to Z numerals and the underscore _ The space cannot be used Also note that two folder names cannot share the same three digit folder number for example 100ABC_D and 100W_XYZ even if the other five characters in each name are different 151 M40 Changing the File Name mx The file name has four alphanumeric characters followed by a four digit image number p 154 and extension The first four re BEBO AES alphanumeric characters are set upon factory shipment and unique to the camera However y
9. To quit shooting multiple exposures select Disable e On Func Ctrl Function and control priority Convenient when you want to shoot multiple exposures while checking the result as you proceed During continuous shooting the continuous shooting speed will decrease greatly On ContShtng Continuous shooting priority Geared for continuous multiple exposure shooting of a moving subject Continuous shooting is possible but the following operations are disabled during shooting menu viewing Live View display image review after image capture image playback and undo last image p 182 Also only the multiple exposure image will be saved The single exposures merged in the multiple exposure image will not be saved Q f you set white balance bracketing the HDR mode or if you shoot a movie multiple exposure shooting cannot be set e f you perform Live View shooting while On ContShtng is set the Live View function will stop automatically after the first shot is taken From the second shot onward shoot while looking through the viewfinder 177 Multiple Exposures Multiple exposure Set Multi expos ctrl Select the desired multiple exposure Multi expos ctrl Additive Average control method then press lt gt Bright PELLS e Additive The exposure of each single exposure is added cumulatively Based on the No of exposures set a negative exposure compensation Refer to the basic guide below to se
10. then press 3 White balance Awe Custom White Balance WB Shift Bkt 0 0 0 Color space 2 Set the white balance correction Use lt lt gt to move the mark to the desired position e Bis for blue A is amber M is Dit era eX d magenta and G is green The color in the respective direction will be corrected On the upper right Shift indicates the direction and correction amount PEA e Pressing the lt f gt button will cancel i ae all the WB Shift Bkt settings Shift GB Clear all e Press lt gt to exit the setting and O Brecht as a OK return to the menu Fl During the white balance correction lt 8 gt will be displayed on the LCD panel e lt gt can be displayed in the viewfinder when white balance correction is set p 318 One level of the blue amber correction is equivalent to 5 mireds of a color temperature conversion filter Mired Measuring unit indicating the density of a color temperature conversion filter 140 WB White Balance Correction White Balance Auto Bracketing With just one shot three images having a different color balance can be recorded simultaneously Based on the color temperature of the current white balance setting the image will be bracketed with a blue amber bias or magenta green bias This is called white balance bracketing WB BKT White balance bracketing is possible up to 3 levels in single level increments Set t
11. A Exit the setting When you press lt amp gt to exit the setting the screen in step 2 will reappear e Press the lt MENU gt button to exit F With the screen in step 2 displayed you can press the lt fj gt button to cancel the Custom Control settings Note that the 2 Custom Controls settings will not be canceled even if you select 4 4 Clear all Custom Func C Fn 321 4 2 Custom Controls Assignable Functions to Camera Controls Function Page AF ON yf Metering and AF start 324 Ori Om AF OFF AF stop O O AFe Switch to registered AF function 325 ese ONE SHOT Al SERVO oJ dV ut Switch to registered AF point 326 AF point direct selection Metering start O AE lock O O 326 AE lock while button pressed O X AE lock hold O O FEL FE lock O O S0 Set ISO speed hold button turn p eiunsodxy SOf Set ISO speed during metering 327 Tv Shutter speed setting in M mode Av Aperture setting in M mode raw One touch image quality setting Raw One touch image quality hold 328 ew Image quality S22 Picture Style Depth of field preview Wy IS start 329 Qy VF electronic level MENU Menu display DB Image playback uonesado 330 Q Magnify Reduce press SET turn a OFF No function disa
12. AE lock setting is retained until you press lt E gt e You can set exposure compensation by setting the lt LOCK gt switch to the left and turning the lt gt dial except in the lt G gt mode e Pressing the shutter button halfway displays the ISO speed and shutter speed at the screen bottom This is the exposure setting for taking a still photo p 225 The exposure setting for movie shooting is not displayed Note that the exposure setting for movie shooting may differ from that for still photo shooting Using an EX series Speedlite Sold Separately Equipped with an LED Light During movie shooting in the G P Tv Av or B mode this camera supports the function that turns the Speedlite s LED light automatically in low light conditions For details refer to the Speedlite s instruction manual 222 Shooting Movies Manual Exposure Shooting You can manually set the shutter speed aperture and ISO speed for movie shooting Using manual exposure to shoot movies is for advanced users x Bo 3 1000 1250 000 5000 a Ih 160 200 600 800 2500 3200 wooo 12800 Aperture 1 2 5 Set the Mode Dial to lt M gt Set the Live View shooting Movie shooting switch to lt gt Set the ISO speed Press the lt ISO 4 gt button gt The ISO speed setting screen will appear on the LCD monitor Turn the lt gt dial to s
13. About RAW A RAW image is raw data output by the image sensor converted to digital data It is recorded to the card as is and you can select the quality as follows EWM M G0 or S QW A image can be processed with gt 1 RAW image processing p 282 and saved as a JPEG image M M and S images cannot be processed with the camera While the RAW image itself does not change you can process the RAW image according to different conditions to create any number of JPEG images from it With all RAW images you can use Digital Photo Professional provided software p 390 to make various adjustments and then generate a JPEG TIFF etc image incorporating those adjustments F Commercially available software may not be able to display RAW images Using the provided software is recommended 122 MW Setting the Image Recording Quality ii Ml Se Si a U R One touch Image Quality Setting With Custom Controls you can assign the image recording quality to the lt M Fn gt button or depth of field preview button so you can switch to it momentarily If you assign One touch image quality setting to the lt M Fn gt button or depth of field preview button you can quickly switch to the desired image recording quality and shoot For details see Custom Controls p 321 Q If 1 Record func card folder sel is set to Rec separately you cannot switch to the One touch image quality setting Maximum Burst During Continuous Shooting
14. Both Prints both the standard and index prints On aera n Date OF On imprints the recorded date on the print f On ne File number Of On imprints the file number on the print A Exit the setting e Press the lt MENU gt button gt The print order screen will reappear Next select Sel Image By fig or All image to order the images to be printed Q e Even if Date and File No are set to On the date or file number may not be imprinted depending on the print type setting and printer model With Index prints both the Date and File No cannot be set to On at the same time When printing with DPOF you must use the card whose print order specifications have been set It will not work if you just extract images from the card and try to print them Certain DPOF compatible printers and photofinishers may not be able to print the images as you specified If this happens with your printer refer to the printer s instruction manual Or check with your photofinisher about compatibility when ordering prints Do not insert into the camera a card whose print order was set by a different camera and then try to specify a print order The print order may not work or may be overwritten Also depending on the image type the print order may not be possible F RAW images and movies cannot be print ordered You can print RAW images with PictBridge p 296 306 i Digital Print Order Form
15. Distortion correction and Chromatic aberration correction Resize Possible e Direct Printing Compatible printers PictBridge compatible printers Printable images JPEG and RAW images Print ordering DPOF Version 1 1 compatible e Image Transfer Transferrable images Still photos JPEG RAW RAW JPEG images Movies e Custom Functions Custom Functions 13 My Menu registration Possible Custom shooting modes Register under Mode Dial s C1 C2 C3 Copyright information Entry and inclusion enabled Interface Audio video OUT Digital terminal Analog video Compatible with NTSC PAL stereo audio output Personal computer communication Direct printing Hi Speed USB or equivalent Wireless File Transmitter WFT E7 GPS Receiver GP E2 connection HDMI mini OUT terminal Type C Auto switching of resolution CEC compatible External microphone IN terminal 3 5 mm stereo mini jack Headphone terminal 3 5 mm stereo mini jack Remote control terminal Compatible with N3 type remote controller 378 Specifications Wireless remote control Remote Controller RC 6 Eye Fi card Compatible e Power Battery Battery Pack LP E6 Quantity 1 AC power can be supplied via AC Adapter Kit ACK E6 With Battery Grip BG E11 attached size AA LR6 batteries can be used Battery information Remaining capacity Shutter count Recharge performance and Battery registration possible Battery life With viewfinder shooting Based on C
16. Expo comp AEB 3 2 1 1 2 3 Under the 2 tab select White ISO speed settings lt gt Auto Lighting Optimizer E balance then press i White balance Awe White balance 2 Set the color temperature Color temp e Turn the lt gt dial to select K8 Turn the lt gt dial to set the color temperature then press lt gt Bene DOnaES The color temperature can be set am 0K from approx 2500K to 10000K in 100K increments Q When setting the color temperature for an artificial light source set white balance correction magenta or green as necessary If you set lt 8 gt to the reading taken with a commercially available color temperature meter take test shots and adjust the setting to compensate for the difference between the color temperature meter s reading and the camera s color temperature reading 139 WB White Balance Correction mu You can correct the white balance that has been set This adjustment will have the same effect as using a commercially available color temperature conversion filter or color compensating filter Each color can be corrected to one of nine levels This function is for advanced users who are familiar with using color temperature conversion or color compensating filters White Balance Correction q Select WB Shift BKt Expo comp AEB 3 2 1 9 1 2 3 Under the 2 tab select WB ISO speed settings A lt gt Auto Lighting Optimizer fh Shift Bkt
17. INFO LaTe EB Default set frame AF1 AF co v Q 3 Select the desired item AF1 AF config tool Case 1 Turn the lt gt dial to select a Versatile multi purpose parameter then press lt gt setting 2 le ie ee x When Tracking sensitivity is selected Accel decel tracking amp a a the setting screen will appear D Help a MME Q x 4 Make the adjustment E ar e Turn the lt gt dial to adjust as k Versatile multi purpose desired then press lt gt a setting i j g gt The adjustment is saved Accel decel tracking a amp The default setting is indicated by the Tmhe light gray 9 mark 5 Exit the setting To return to the screen in step 1 press the lt RATE gt button F e In step 2 pressing the lt gt button will reset the respective case s three parameters to their default settings e You can also register the 1 2 and 3 parameter settings to My Menu p 331 Doing so will change the selected case s settings When shooting with a case whose parameters you adjusted select the adjusted case and then take the picture 93 11 Customizing AF Functions ma ob QA x With the AF 2 to AF 5 menu tabs you AF2 Al Servo AlServo Tst Image priority aa can set the AF functions to suit your Al Servo 2nd image priority 2 shooting style or subject AF2 Al Servo Al Servo 1st image priority You can set the AF operation characteristics and shutter
18. Image Recording Quality As set in t 81 Image quality When the movie recording size is 1920x1080 or 1280x720 the aspect ratio will be 16 9 When the size is 640x480 the aspect ratio will be 4 3 ISO Speed e lt M gt See ISO speed during manual exposure shooting on lt 63 P Tv Av B gt 100 12800 page 224 lt P B gt Automatically set shutter speed and aperture Exposure e lt Tv gt Manually set shutter speed and automatically set aperture Setting e lt Av gt Manually set aperture and automatically set shutter speed lt M gt Manually set shutter speed and aperture If highlight tone priority is set the ISO speed range will start from ISO 200 228 Shooting Movies AEB cannot be used Even if an external Speedlite is used it will not fire Continuous still photo shooting is possible during movie shooting However the captured images will not be displayed on the screen Depending on the still photo s image recording quality number of shots during continuous shooting card performance etc movie shooting may stop automatically If 6 5 Movie shoot btn is set to 8 you cannot take still photos If you want to shoot still photos continuously during movie shooting using a high speed card is recommended Setting a smaller image recording quality for still photos and shooting fewer continuous still photos are also recommended You can shoot
19. Working humidity Dimensions W x H x D Weight Battery Pack LP E6 Approx 1 m 3 3 ft Approx 2 hours 30 min 100 240 V AC 50 60 Hz 8 4 V DC 1 2A 5 C 40 C 41 F 104 F 85 or less Approx 69 0 x 33 0 x 93 0 mm 2 7 x 1 3 x 3 7 in Approx 125 g 4 4 oz excluding power cord EF 24 105mm f 4L IS USM Angle of view Lens construction Minimum aperture Closest focusing distance Max magnification Field of view Image Stabilizer Filter size Lens cap Max diameter x length Weight Hood Case 380 Diagonal extent 84 23 20 Horizontal extent 74 19 20 Vertical extent 53 13 18 elements in 13 groups f 22 0 45 m 1 48 ft from image sensor plane 0 23x at 105 mm 535 x 345 158 x 106 mm 21 1 x 13 6 6 2 x 4 2 in at 0 45 m Lens shift type 77 mm E 77U 83 5 x 107 mm 3 3 x 4 2 in Approx 670 g 23 6 oz EW 83H LP1219 Specifications a a Se SS e All the data above is based on Canon s testing standards and CIPA Camera amp Imaging Products Association testing standards and guidelines Dimensions maximum diameter length and weight listed above are based on CIPA Guidelines except weight for camera body only e Product specifications and the exterior are subject to change without notice f a problem occurs with a non Canon lens attached to the camera consult the respective lens maker Trademarks e Adobe is a trademar
20. in the EOS 1D Mark III IV EOS 1Ds Mark III and EOS 7D 90 MM Selecting Al Servo AF Characteristics For a Subject ee SE eS Se ss See EI e Accel decel tracking a MM y A x This sets the tracking sensitivity for C moving subjects whose speed can Versatile multi purpose suddenly change dramatically by starting setting ji or stopping suddenly etc Y Accel decel tracking amp a a ov INFO afe 0 Suited for subjects that move at a fixed speed 2 1 Effective for subjects having sudden movements sudden acceleration deceleration or sudden stops Even if the moving subject s speed suddenly changes dramatically the camera continues to focus the target subject For example for an approaching subject the camera becomes less prone to focus behind it which would result in a blurred subject For a subject stopping suddenly the camera becomes less prone to focus in front of it Setting 2 can track dramatic changes in the moving subject s speed better than with 1 However since the camera will be sensitive to even slight movements of the subject the focusing may be unstable momentarily 91 CEM Selecting Al Servo AF Characteristics For a Subject eS Se SS U Ml U U e AF pt auto switching o W o a R s AF1 AF config tool Case 1 Versatile multi purpose setting cf AF pt auto switching S a a INFO LAGS 0 This sets the switching sensitivity of the AF points
21. lt ISO gt ISO speed p 124 lt gt Warning symbol p 318 lt drasa gt Battery check a4 ms Sain light p 35 p 64 lt gt AE lock p 171 AEB in progress p 170 lt x gt AF status indicator p 64 Max burst p 123 Number of remaining multiple exposures p 179 __ ISO speed p 124 lt 4 gt Flash ready p 188 Improper FE lock warning lt 4 gt FE lock p 188 FEB in progress p 195 t lt D gt Highlight tone priority p 146 lt y gt High speed sync p 194 __ Exposure level indicator Exposure compensation amount p 169 lt gt Flash exposure AEB range p 170 compensation p 188 Flash exposure compensation amount p 188 Shutter speed p 162 AF point selection FE lock FEL 77 AF SEL SEL AF Busy buSY AF point registration Multi function lock warning L C 1 HP SEL SEL HP Card warning Card 1 2 1 2 Aperture p 164 The display will show only the settings currently applied 23 Nomenclature Mode Dial Turn the Mode Dial while holding down the Mode Dial center Mode Dial lock release button B Bulb p 172 M Manual exposure p 166 Av Aperture priority AE p 164 Tv Shutter priority AE p 162 P_ Program AE p 160 GF Scene Intelligent Auto p 64 Custom shooting modes You can register the shooting mode P Tv Av M B AF mode menu settings etc to Mode Dial setting
22. E E9 04 02 EI 255 Side show oo ee ee Image transfer aoe to be transferred to a personal 309 E gt Playback 3 Blue Highlight alert Disable Enable 247 AF point display Disable Enable 247 Playback grid Off 3x3 6x4 3x3 diag 245 Histogram display Brightness RGB 248 Movie play count Rec time Time code 238 1x no magnification 2x magnify from center 4x magnify from center 8x magnify Magnification Approx from center 10x magnify from center 252 Actual size from selected point Same as last magnification from center Control over HDMI Disable Enable 269 The setting is linked to the Time code s Movie play count under the 65 Movie tab 352 Menu Settings ee SS si Y Set up 1 Yellow Page Record func Standard Auto switch card 116 Record functiontoard Record separately Record to folder selection mouliple Record play Playback 4 118 Folder Creating and selecting a folder 150 File numbering Continuous Auto reset Manual reset 154 File name Preset code User setting 1 User setting 2 152 Auto rotate Ong amp On Off 280 Format card Initialize and erase data on the card 53 i Displayed when a commercially available Eye Eye Fi settings Fi card is inserted aa Y Set up 2 Yellow 1 min 2 min 4 min 8 min 15 min Auto power off 30 min Disable 3P Auto Adjustable to one of three brigh
23. For advanced users You can adjust the sound recording level to one of 64 levels Select Rec level and look at the level meter while turning the lt gt dial to adjust the sound recording level While looking at the peak hold indicator 3 sec adjust so that the level meter sometimes lights up the 12 12 dB mark on the right for the loudest sounds If it exceeds 0 the sound will be distorted Disable Sound will not be recorded Wind Filter When set to Enable it reduces wind noise when there is wind outdoors This works only with the built in microphone Note that Enable will also reduce low bass sounds so set it to Disable when there is no wind It will make sound more natural than with Enable 234 MW Setting the Sound Recording ee es il e Using the microphone The built in microphone records monaural sound Stereo sound recording is possible by connecting an external stereo microphone commercially available equipped with a miniature stereo plug 3 5 mm to the camera s external microphone IN terminal p 19 When an external microphone is connected sound recording will switch automatically to the external microphone e Using headphones By connecting stereo headphones commercially available equipped with a 3 5 mm mini plug to the camera s headphone terminal p 19 you can listen to the sound during movie shooting If you are using an external stereo microphone you can listen to the so
24. J gt lt P gt or lt B gt autoexposure control will take effect to suit the scene s current brightness Exposure control will be the same for the three shooting modes Set the Mode Dial to lt G gt lt P gt or lt B gt Set the Live View shooting Movie shooting switch to lt gt gt The reflex mirror will make a sound then the image will appear on the LCD monitor 2 Focus the subject Before shooting focus with AF or manual focus p 207 214 When you press the shutter button halfway the camera will focus with the current AF mode Shoot the movie Press the lt W gt button to start shooting a movie gt While the movie is being shot the mark will be displayed on the upper right of the screen e To stop shooting the movie press the lt W gt button again Microphone 218 Shooting Movies Shutter priority AE When the shooting mode is lt Tv gt you can manually set the shutter speed for movie shooting The ISO speed and aperture will be set automatically to suit the brightness and obtain a standard exposure DAA 1 Set the Mode Dial to lt Tv gt XF laa 2 Set the Live View shooting Movie shooting switch to lt gt Set the desired shutter speed While looking at the LCD monitor turn the lt s7 gt dial The settable shutter speeds depend on the frame rate lt a gt Bo as m 1 4000
25. This is called shutter priority AE A faster shutter speed can freeze the action or a moving subject A slower shutter speed can create a blurred effect giving the impression of motion lt Tv gt stands for Time value Blurred motion Frozen action Slow shutter speed 1 30 sec Fast shutter speed 1 2000 sec vi 1 Set the Mode Dial to lt Tv gt 2 Set the desired shutter speed While looking at the LCD panel turn the lt sA gt dial Focus the subject Press the shutter button halfway gt The aperture is set automatically 4 Check the viewfinder display and shoot As long as the aperture is not blinking a standard exposure will be obtained rrr Built 23 rir a TH getreu 5e 162 Tv Shutter Priority AE Q NN 0 ir Ifthe maximum aperture blinks it indicates underexposure Zp Turn the lt gt dial to set a slower shutter speed until the aperture stops blinking or set a higher ISO speed me Ifthe minimum aperture blinks it indicates overexposure vali Turn the lt gt dial to set a faster shutter speed until the aperture stops blinking or set a lower ISO speed F Shutter Speed Display The shutter speeds from 8000 to 4 indicate the denominator of the fractional shutter speed For example 125 indicates 1 125 sec Also 0 5 indicates 0 5 sec and 15 is 15 sec 163 Av Aperture Priority AE memm In this mode you set t
26. To rate another image or movie repeat steps 2 and 3 Press the lt MENU gt button to return to the menu F The total number of images with a given rating can be displayed up to 999 If there are more than 999 images with a given rating will be displayed for that rating Taking advantage of ratings e With 2 Image jump w 23 you can display only rated images and movies e With gt 2 Slide show you can play back only rated images and movies With Digital Photo Professional provided software p 390 you can select only rated images and movies With Windows Vista and Windows 7 you can see each file s rating as part of the file information display or in the provided image viewer 256 Q Quick Control During Playback ma During playback you can press the lt Q gt button to set the following e Protect images Rotate image xX Rating RWw1 RAW image processing RAW images only Exi Resize JPEG image only 4 Highlight alert AF point display Image jump w For movies only the functions in bold above can be set 1 Press the lt Q gt button During image playback press the lt Q gt button gt The Quick Control screen will appear 5 Protect images Disable 2 Select a function and set it Tilt lt gt up or down to select a function e a gt The setting of the selected function is k O cs displayed at the bottom oe Tu
27. a M I i FEL FE lock During flash photography pressing the button assigned to this function will fire a preflash and record the required flash output FE lock s0 Set ISO speed hold button turn 4 You can set the ISO speed by holding down lt gt and turning the lt gt dial If Auto ISO is set manual ISO speed setting will take effect Auto ISO cannot be set If you use this function in the lt M gt mode you can adjust the exposure with the ISO speed while maintaining the current shutter speed and aperture S0t Set ISO speed amp during metering During metering you can set the ISO speed by turning the lt gt dial If Auto ISO is set manual ISO speed setting will take effect Auto ISO cannot be set If you use this function in the lt M gt mode you can adjust the exposure with the ISO speed while maintaining the current shutter speed and aperture Tv Shutter speed setting in M mode In manual exposure lt M gt you can set the shutter speed with the lt gt or lt gt dial Av Aperture setting in M mode In manual exposure lt M gt you can set the aperture with the lt gt or lt gt dial 327 4 2 Custom Controls raw One touch image quality setting When you press the button assigned to this function you can switch to the image recording quality set here While the camera switches the image recording quality the image recording quality will blink on the LCD panel After the
28. adjustment The adjustable range is 20 steps e Setting it toward will shift the point of focus in front of the standard point of focus Setting it toward Aa will shift the point of focus to the rear of the standard point of focus AF Microadjustment a e After making the adjustment press Adjust focus for all lenses by lt gt Whos Jo SELL Ce Turn the lt gt dial to select All by Disable same amount then press lt gt All by same amount 5 The menu will reappear Adjust by lens W 0 T 0 INFO KANEA 6 Clear all 5 Check the result of the adjustment e Take a picture and play back the image p 244 to check the adjustment result When the resulting picture is focused in front of the targeted point adjust toward the Au side When the resulting picture is focused behind the targeted point adjust toward the side f necessary do the adjustment again Q If All by same amount is selected AF adjustment will not be possible for the wide angle and telephoto ends of zoom lenses 105 MM Fine Adjustment of AF s Point of Focus Adjust by Lens You can make the adjustment for each lens and register the adjustment in the camera You can register the adjustment for up to 40 lenses When you autofocus with a lens whose adjustment has been registered the point of focus will always be shifted by the adjustment amount Set the adjustment manually by adju
29. compensation amount Flash exposure compensation amount Menu functions 231 Image quality Image review Beep Release shutter without card Lens aberration correction Peripheral illumination correction Chromatic aberration correction External Speedlite control Mirror lockup 432 Exposure compensation AEB ISO speed settings Auto Lighting Optimizer White balance Custom White Balance White balance Shift Bracketing Color space 283 Picture Style Long exp noise reduction High ISO speed NR Highlight tone priority Multiple exposure settings HDR Mode settings 64 Live View shooting Live View shooting AF mode Grid display Aspect ratio Exposure simulation Silent LV shooting Metering timer 64 Movie AF mode Grid display Movie recording size Sound recording Silent LV shooting Metering timer 65 Movie Movie recording count Movie play count Silent Control Movie shooting button AF 1 Case 1 Case 2 Case 3 Case 4 Case 5 Case 6 AF 2 Al Servo 1st image priority Al Servo 2nd image priority AF 3 USM lens electronic MF AF assist beam firing One Shot AF release priority AF 4 Lens drive when AF impossible Selectable AF point Select a AF area selec mode AF area selection method Orientation linked AF point AF 5 Manual AF point selection pattern AF point display during focus VF display illumination 333 Register Custom Shooting Modes aa es L12 Slide show Image jump with
30. e A indicates ISO Auto The ISO speed will be set automatically p 125 ISO Speed Guide ISO Speed Shooting Situation No flash Flash Range L 100 400 Sunny outdoors The higher the ISO 400 1600 Overcast skies or evening time speed the farther the 1600 25600 H1 H2 Dark indoors or night flash range will extend Higher ISO speeds will result in grainier images Q e If 3 Highlight tone priority has been set to Enable you cannot select L ISO 50 ISO 100 125 160 H1 ISO 51200 and H2 ISO 102400 p 146 Shooting in high temperatures may result in images that look grainier Long exposures can also cause irregular colors in the image When you shoot at high ISO speeds noise dots of light banding etc may become noticeable When shooting in conditions that produce an extreme amount of noise such as a combination of high ISO speed high temperature and long exposure images may not be recorded properly 124 ISO Setting the ISO Speed Q As H1 equivalent to ISO 51200 and H2 equivalent to 102400 are expanded ISO speed settings noise dots of light banding etc and irregular colors will be more noticeable and the resolution lower than usual e f you use a high ISO speed and flash to shoot a close subject overexposure may result f you shoot a movie when Maximum 25600 is set with ISO speed range and ISO speed is set
31. name then press lt 7 gt Preset code BE3B e Turn the lt gt dial to select the User setaing SDM3 T registered file name then press User setting2 IMG image size VENU ps lt 6 gt e f User setting2 has been registered select the 3 characters registered image size IMG image size__ Settings Al About User setting2 When you select the image size registered with User setting2 and take pictures the image recording quality character will be automatically appended as the file name s fourth character from the left The meaning of the image recording quality characters is as follows sir AL al OD ou AM AM MED S ASI dS1 S mT 2 at Gi 3 When the image is transferred to a personal computer the automatically appended fourth character will be included You can then see the image size without having to open the image RAW or JPEG images can be distinguished with the extension Q The first character cannot be an underscore _ Fil e The extension will be JPG for JPEG images CR2 for RAW images and MOV for movies When you shoot a movie with User setting2 the file name s fourth character will be an underscore _ 153 u File Numbering Methods mx The four digit file number is like the frame number on a roll of film The captured images Ex BE3B0001 JPG are assigned a sequential file number from 0
32. p 34 L R S lt MENU gt Menu button a CIA p 51 2 hs a Terminal cover 7 Teel i Date time battery p 343 Touch pad p 46 lm lt MIC gt External microphone IN terminal p 235 7 lt gt Headphone terminal p 235 4 or lt 4 gt PC terminal p 189 m LCD panel p 21 22 m lt AF ON gt AF start button p 44 70 199 226 lt gt AE lock button p 171 m lt H gt AF point selection button p 72 lt Q gt Quick Control button p 49 lt gt Quick Control Dial p 46 lt gt Setting button p 51 vie lt A V OUT DIGITAL gt Audio video OUT Digital terminal p 271 296 309 19 Nomenclature m lt gt Focal plane mark Dioptric adjustment knob p 43 lt 74 O 2 gt Creative Photo Comparative playback Two image display Direct print button p 129 173 177 253 301 lt RATE gt Rating button lt AR gt Live View shooting Movie shooting switch p 197 217 lt W gt Start Stop button p 198 218 lt gt Multi controller p 47 p 255 273 Strap mount lt Q gt Index p 27 Magnify Reduce button p 249 251 lt gt Playback 9 Card slot button p 244 cover p 31 NI _ 1 lt gt Erase button SS p 277 k SD Battery i compartment Speaker cover releas
33. s PC terminal can be used with flash units having a sync cord The PC terminal is threaded to prevent inadvertent disconnection The camera s PC terminal has no polarity You can connect any sync cord regardless of its polarity Cautions for Live View shooting If you use a non Canon flash unit with Live View shooting set B 4 Silent LV shoot to Disable p 206 The flash will not fire if it is set to Mode 1 or Mode 2 189 4 Flash Photography Q f the camera is used with a flash unit or flash accessory dedicated to another camera brand the camera may not operate properly and malfunction may result e Do not connect to the camera s PC terminal any flash unit requiring 250 V or more Do not attach a high voltage flash unit on the camera s hot shoe It may not fire Fl A flash unit attached to the camera s hot shoe and a flash unit connected to the PC terminal can both be used at the same time 190 mW Setting the Flash memm With an EX series Speedlite having compatible flash function settings you can use the camera s menu screen to set the Speedlite s functions and Custom Functions Attach the Speedlite to the camera and turn on the Speedlite For details on the Speedlite s functions refer to the Speedlite s instruction manual Mere 2 1 Select External Speedlite oo SHOOT Image quality control Te eens e Under the 1 tab select External Release shutter witho
34. when B 5 Silent Control is set to Enable After pressing the lt Q gt button tap the lt gt dial s inner ring at the top bottom left or right 46 Basic Operation 6 Multi controller The lt gt consists of an eight direction key and a button at the center 7 Use it to select the AF point correct the white balance move the AF point or magnifying frame during Live View B shooting scroll around magnified images during playback operate the Quick Control screen etc e You can also use it to select or set menu options except gt 1 Erase images and 1 Format card For menus and the Quick Control screen the Multi controller works only in the vertical and horizontal directions It does not work in diagonal directions LOCK Multi function Lock With 4 2 Multi function lock set p 319 and the lt LOCK gt switch set to the right it prevents the Main Dial Quick Control Dial and Multi controller from moving and changing a setting inadvertently lt LOCKB gt switch set to the left Lock released lt LOCK gt switch set to the right Lock engaged F If the lt LOCK gt switch is set to the right and you try to use one of the locked camera controls lt L gt will be displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel On the shooting settings display p 48 LOCK will be displayed 47 Basic Operation 8 LCD Panel Illumination Turn
35. 0 ness eA 121 287 Memory card Card Menu 51 Setting procedure Settings Metering mode Index SS S M RAW Medium RAW 119 122 Multi function 73 188 323 Microadjustment Microphone cceceeeees Mirror lockup Mode Dial Aperture priority AE Autoexposure shooting Compression method Drop frame Edit Editing out first and last scenes Enjoying External microphone File size Frame rate Grid display Headphones Information display 00 Manual exposure shooting Metering timer ceeeeeeee Microphone ceeee Movie recording size Playback Quick Control Recording time Shutter priority AE Silent control Silent shooting Sound recording Still photo shooting Time code View on TV Wind filter 398 Noise reduction High ISO speed Long exposures Nomenclature ceceeeeeeeeeeeees ONE SHOT One Shot AF 70 One Shot AF ecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 70 Partial metering PC terminal Peripheral illumination correction 147 Personal white balance 139 PictBridge sen oanet iage Picture Style Pixels Playback Possible shots Power Auto power off Battery check Battery info Household power Possible shots 35 121 199 Recharge escceeceee
36. 1 tab select RAW Rotate image i i isan image processing then press Print order lt amp gt JERE a gt images will be displayed RAW image processing 2 Select an image Turn the lt gt dial to select the image you want to process e f you press the lt Q gt button and turn the lt gt dial counterclockwise you can select an image from the index display Picture Style Process the image otsing i Press lt gt and the RAW processing options will appear p 284 286 e Use lt gt to select an option then turn the lt gt dial to set it Ua Reset gt The displayed image will reflect Brightness adjustment White balance and the other setting adjustments e To return to the image settings at the time of shooting press the lt INFO gt button 282 RWI Processing RAW Images with the Camera Displaying the setting screen e Press lt gt to display the setting screen Turn the lt 63 gt or lt gt dial to change the setting To return to the screen in step 3 press lt gt A Save the image e Select 2 Save then press lt gt Select OK to save the image Check the destination folder and image file number then select OK To process another image repeat steps 2 to 4 mo as new file Cancel OK Press the lt MENU gt button to return to the menu About the Magnified View You can magnify the image by pressing t
37. 18 A3 or RAW M 10M larger 19 1 370 10 11 A4 or s EW 5 5M larger 15 1 480 12 15 22M A2 or larger AL 22M A2 or larger ea ca SA0 7 7 RAW hs Less wae larger 49 447 0 270 7 7 JPEG or larger S 5 5M A4 or larger AL 22M A2 or larger 13 1 0 320 7 7 41 2 is suitable for playing the images on a digital photo frame 2 3 is suitable for emailing the image or using it on a Web site e S2 and 3 will be in Fine quality e The file size possible shots and maximum burst during continuous shooting are based on Canon s testing standards 3 2 aspect ratio ISO 100 and Standard Picture Style using an 8 GB CF card These figures will vary depending on the subject card brand aspect ratio ISO speed Picture Style Custom Functions and other settings The maximum burst applies to lt i gt high speed continuous shooting Figures in parentheses apply to an Ultra DMA UDMA mode 7 128 GB card based on Canon s testing standards 121 MW Setting the Image Recording Quality eS ee UMM Fl e f you select both RAW and JPEG the same image will be recorded simultaneously to the card in both RAW and JPEG at the image recording quality that was set The two images will be recorded with the same file numbers file extension JPG for JPEG and CR2 for RAW The image recording quality icons are as follows RAW M Medium RAW S W Small RAW JPEG Fine al Normal L Large M Medium and S Small
38. 268 e Protect gt p 272 e Copying gt p 274 e Erase gt p 277 Image Editing e RAW image processing gt p 282 e Resize gt p 287 Printing and Transferring Images e PictBridge gt p 296 e Print Order DPOF gt p 305 e Image transfer gt p 309 Customization Custom Functions C Fn gt p 314 e Custom Controls gt p 321 My Menu gt p 331 e Custom shooting mode gt p 332 Sensor Cleaning and Dust Reduction e Sensor cleaning gt p 290 e Append Dust Delete Data gt p 291 13 Handling Precautions mE Camera Care This camera is a precision instrument Do not drop it or subject it to physical shock The camera is not waterproof and cannot be used underwater If you accidentally drop the camera into water promptly consult your nearest Canon Service Center Wipe off any water droplets with a dry cloth If the camera has been exposed to salty air wipe it with a well wrung wet cloth e Never leave the camera near anything having a strong magnetic field such as a magnet or electric motor Also avoid using or leaving the camera near anything emitting strong radio waves such as a large antenna Strong magnetic fields can cause camera misoperation or destroy image data Do not leave the camera in excessive heat such as in a car in direct sunlight High temperatures can cause the camera to malfunction The camera contains precision electronic circuitry Never attempt to disassemble the camera yourself Do
39. 33 or 371 An error message is displayed when the card is inserted in another camera Cards with capacities greater than 128 GB are formatted in exFAT This means that if you format a card with a capacity over 128 GB with this camera and then insert it into another camera an error may be displayed and it may not be possible to use the card Troubleshooting Guide SS R The image is out of focus Set the lens focus mode switch to lt AF gt p 39 e To prevent camera shake press the shutter button gently p 43 44 Ifthe lens has an Image Stabilizer set the IS switch to lt ON gt p 42 e In low light the shutter speed may become slow Use a faster shutter speed p 162 set a higher ISO speed p 124 use flash p 188 or use a tripod There are fewer AF points e Depending on the attached lens the number of usable AF points and patterns will differ The lenses are categorized into eight groups from A to H Check which group your lens belongs to Using a lens in Groups F to H will have fewer usable AF points p 79 The AF point is blinking When you press the lt E gt button the blinking AF points are those that are not cross type AF points and are only horizontal line sensitive The AF points that light up are cross type AF points p 74 The AF point at the registered area is blinking p 324 cannot lock the focus and recompose the shot e Set the AF mode to One Shot AF Focus lock is not possibl
40. 60p 50p IPB Approx 205 MB min 1280x720 60p 50p ALL I Approx 610 MB min 640x480 30p 25p IPB Approx 78 MB min Card reading writing speed necessary for movie shooting CF card IPB at least 10 MB per sec ALL I at least 30 MB per sec SD card IPB at least 6 MB per sec ALL I at least 20 MB per sec Same as focusing with Live View shooting Center weighted average and Evaluative metering with the image sensor Automatically set by the focusing mode Specifications Metering range EV 0 20 at 23 C 73 F with EF 50mm f 1 4 USM lens ISO 100 Exposure control 1 Autoexposure 2 Shutter priority AE 3 Aperture priority AE 4 Manual exposure With 1 2 and 3 exposure compensation and AE lock are possible except in Scene Intelligent Auto mode Exposure compensation 3 stops in 1 3 stop increments 5 stops for still photos ISO speed Scene Intelligent Auto and Tv Automatically set within ISO 100 12800 Recommended P Av and B Automatically set within ISO 100 12800 exposure index expandable to H equivalent to ISO 25600 M Auto ISO automatically set within ISO 100 12800 ISO 100 12800 set manually in 1 3 or whole stop increments expandable to H equivalent to ISO 16000 20000 25600 Time code Supported Drop frames Compatible with 60p 30p Sound recording Built in monaural microphone external stereo microphone terminal provided Sound recording level adjustable wind filter provi
41. 80mm f 4 5 6 USM EF 28 80mm 3 5 5 6 EF 28 105mm f 4 5 6 USM EF 35 350mm 3 5 5 6L USM EF 28 80mm 3 5 5 6 USM EF 35 70mm 3 5 4 5 EF 80 200mm 4 5 5 6 II EF 28 80mm 3 5 5 6 II EF 35 70mm 3 5 4 5A EF 80 200mm f 4 5 5 6 USM EF 28 80mm 3 5 5 6 II USM EF 35 80mm 4 5 6 83 Lenses and Usable AF Points Group G Autofocusing with only 33 points is possible Not possible with all 61 AF points All of the AF area selection modes are selectable During automatic AF point selection the outer frame marking the AF area Area AF frame will be different from 61 point automatic selection AF E Cross type AF point Subject tracking is superior and high precision focusing is achieved O AF points sensitive to horizontal lines Disabled AF points not displayed EF 180mm 3 5L Macro USM EF 180mm f 3 5L Macro USM EF 1200mm f 5 6L USM Extender EF 1 4x Group H Autofocusing is possible only with the AF point at the viewfinder center Autofocusing with multiple AF points is not possible Only the following AF area selection modes are selectable Single point AF Manual selection and Single point Spot AF Manual selection E Cross type AF point Subject tracking is superior and high a precision focusing is achieved Disabled AF points not displayed EF 35 105mm 4 5 5 6
42. Author and Copyright information F You can also set or check the copyright information with EOS Utility provided software p 390 157 ma Setting the Color Space mau The range of reproducible colors is called the color space With this camera you can set the color space for captured images to SRGB or Adobe RGB For normal shooting SRGB is recommended The color space is set automatically to SRGB in the lt J gt mode 1 Select Color space e Under the 2 tab select Color space then press lt gt Set the desired color space Select SRGB or Adobe RGB then press lt gt SHOOT2 b SRGB Color space Adobe RGB About Adobe RGB This color space is mainly used for commercial printing and other industrial uses This setting is not recommended if you do not know about image processing Adobe RGB and Design rule for Camera File System 2 0 Exif 2 21 or higher The image will look very subdued in a sRGB personal computer environment and with printers not compatible with Design rule for Camera File System 2 0 Exif 2 21 or higher Post processing of the image with software will therefore be required F e f the captured still photo was shot in the Adobe RGB color space the first character in the file name will be an underscore _ The ICC profile is not appended Refer to explanations about the ICC profile in the PDF Software Instruction Manual p 393 on the CD ROM 158 In the P Tv Av
43. Auto Lighting Optimizer will be set automatically to Disable When the HDR mode or multiple exposure shooting is canceled the Auto Lighting Optimizer will revert to the original setting Fl In step 2 if you press the lt INFO gt button and uncheck lt v gt the Disable during man expo setting the Auto Lighting Optimizer can be set in the lt M gt mode 142 ma Noise Reduction Settings ma High ISO Speed Noise Reduction This function reduces the noise generated in the image Although noise reduction is applied at all ISO speeds it is particularly effective at high ISO speeds At low ISO speeds the noise in the shadow areas is further reduced Jx 1 Select High ISO speed NR rE ees eee e Under the 3 tab select High ISO Long exp noise reduction OFF speed NRJ then press lt 6 gt High ISO speed NR ul i f Highlight tone priority OFF Dust Delete Data Multiple exposure Disable HDR Mode Disable HDR High ISO speed NR 2 Set the desired setting Standard i Turn the lt gt dial to select the mi Ki desired noise reduction setting then High al Disable OFF press lt gt ec ice maga mose ES pecaay gt The setting screen closes and the effective at high ISO speeds 5 menu will reappear 3 Take the picture The image will be recorded with noise reduction applied F If you play back a image with the camera the effect of the high ISO speed noise reduction may look minimal Check the noise re
44. Dynamic Range Shooting a ae as 2 es SS il HDR Mode 5 Set Continuous HDR Select either 1 shot only or Every Continuous HDR _ 91 shot only shot then press lt gt Every shot e With 1 shot only HDR shooting will be canceled automatically after the shooting ends e With Every shot HDR shooting continues until the setting in step 3 is set to Disable HDR HDR Mode 6 Set Auto Image Align For handheld shooting select Enable When using a tripod select Auto Image Align Enable DESDE Disable Then press lt gt E 7 Set the images to be saved e To save all three images and the HDR Mode merged HDR image select All images then press lt gt To save only the HDR image select HDR img only then press lt gt Save source imgs AIl images HOR img only 8 Take the picture HDR shooting is possible with viewfinder shooting and Live View shooting gt lt HDR gt will be displayed on the LCD panel When you press the shutter button completely three consecutive images will be captured and the HDR image will be recorded to the card Q e HDR shooting is not possible with ISO expansion HDR shooting is possible within the range of ISO 100 25600 When shooting HDR images with Auto Image Align set to Enable AF point display information p 247 and Dust Delete data p 291 will not be appended to the image 175 HDR HDR High Dynamic Range Shooting b SSS ee
45. EF 35 105mm 4 5 5 6 USM Q With lenses whose maximum aperture is smaller than f 5 6 AF is not possible during viewfinder shooting Also AF with AMA is not possible during Live View shooting and movie shooting 84 MAW Selecting Al Servo AF Characteristics For a Subject You can easily fine tune Al Servo AF to suit a particular subject or scene just by selecting between case 1 to case 6 This feature is called the AF Configuration Tool he KE INFO alo yY S L AF1 AF config tool Case 1 Versatile multi purpose setting Tracking sensitivity Y Accel decel tracking amp oY AF pt auto switching TRATED ea 1 Select the AF 1 tab Select a case Turn the lt gt dial to select a case icon then press lt gt gt The selected case will be set The selected case is indicated in blue About Case 1 to 6 As explained on pages 90 to 92 case 1 to 6 are six setting combinations of subject tracking sensitivity acceleration deceleration tracking and AF point auto switching Refer to the table below to select the case applicable to the subject or scene Case Icon Description Applicable Subjects Page Case 1 x versatile Muli purposs For any moving subject 86 setting 3 Continue to track the Tennis players butterfly Case 2 kK subject ignoring possible swimmers freestyle skiers 86 obstacles etc ee Instantly focus on subjects Starting line
46. EF 90 300mm f 4 5 5 6 EF 70 200mm f 2 8L IS II USM Extender EF 2x EF 75 300mm f 4 5 6 USM EF 90 300mm f 4 5 5 6 USM EF 70 200mm f 4L USM Extender EF 1 4x EF 75 300mm 4 5 6 II EF 100 200mm f 4 5A EF 70 200mm f 4L IS USM Extender EF 1 4x EF 75 300mm 4 5 6 II USM EF 100 300mm f 4 5 5 6 USM EF 70 210mm 3 5 4 5 USM EF 75 300mm 4 5 6 Ill EF 100 300mm f 5 6 EF 70 300mm 4 5 6 IS USM EF 75 300mm 4 5 6 III USM EF 100 300mm f 5 6L EF 70 300mm 4 5 6L IS USM EF 75 300mm f 4 5 6 IS USM EF 100 400mm f 4 5 5 6L IS USM Group F Autofocusing with only 47 points is possible Not possible with all 61 AF points All of the AF area selection modes are selectable During automatic AF point selection the outer frame marking the AF area Area AF frame will be different from 61 point automatic selection AF E Cross type AF point Subject tracking is superior and high precision focusing is achieved O AF points sensitive to horizontal lines Disabled AF points not displayed EF 800mm f 5 6L IS USM EF 28 80mm f 3 5 5 6 III USM EF 35 80mm 4 5 6 II EF 22 55mm 4 5 6 USM EF 28 80mm 3 5 5 6 IV USM EF 35 80mm f 4 5 6 Ill EF 28 70mm 3 5 4 5 EF 28 80mm 3 5 5 6 V USM EF 35 80mm f 4 5 6 PZ EF 28 70mm 3 5 4 5 II EF 28 105mm 4 5 6 EF 35
47. Feature guide fills two or more screens a scroll bar will appear on the right edge To scroll hold down the lt INFO gt button and turn the lt gt dial e Example AF 1 tab Case 2 GO mmf a x AF1 AF config tool x Case2 od Case 2 INFO Even if subjects briefly k Continue to track subjects move from the AF points ignoring possible obstacles gt POS Tracking sensitivity z Effective when obstacles Accel decel tracking briefly come between the oY AF pt auto switching camera and subject or with INFO LaTe RATE Oe soa T INFO Ea Scroll bar e Example AF3 tab AF assist beam firing AF assist beam firing AF assist beam firing Enable ON INFO Enable Activate the Disable OFF wm external flash AF assist IR AF assist beam only IR gt beam as needed Disable Deactivate the external flash AF assist beam to avoid disturbing Specify AF assist beam opera tion on an external Speedlite INFO Jala e Example 2 tab Multi function lock Multi function lock Multi function lock Main Dial INFO Select controls that are v Quick Control Dial ae deactivated when the julti controller gt multi function lock switch is set to LOCK with v This can help prevent accidentally changing INFO Talal 61 This chapter explains how to use the Mode Dial s lt Gj gt Scene Intelligent Auto mode for easy picture taking In the lt J gt mode all you
48. G gt or lt G4 gt button the setting screen will appear on the LCD monitor and you can turn the lt gt or lt gt dial to set the respective shooting function When AME is set you can press the lt EE gt button to select the AF area selection mode and AF point The procedure is the same as with viewfinder shooting Note that the lt gt metering mode cannot be set Q Quick Control While the Live View image is displayed you can press the lt Q gt button to set the Auto Lighting Optimizer card selection recording function and image recording quality i 1 Press the lt Q gt button p gt The settable functions will be displayed Standard 2 Select a function and set it e Use lt gt to select a function gt The setting of the selected function is displayed at the bottom Turn the lt 63 gt or lt gt dial to set it To set the recording function press lt gt then turn the lt gt or lt gt dial to set it 202 um Menu Function Settings m Oar oy g Function settings particular to Live View Una View shoot Enable shooting are explained here The menu AF mode Live mode options under the 4 tab are Grid display Off ADELER 3 2 explained on pages 203 206 In the Expo simulation Enable lt Gs gt mode it is displayed under 2 SENEL shoot MOE The functions settable on this menu Metering timer 16 sec screen only apply during Live View shooting Thes
49. HDR shooting OLOTO O sRGB e Ojojojojoj O Color space Adobe RGB OLO kOTO O O One Shot AF ololololo fLive AF mode Al Servo AF CEA O FE AF psiu ciak Al Focus AF e ololololo AF area selection mode ololol ol Wi ati exept 1 The icon indicates still photo shooting in the movie shooting mode 2 If used during movie shooting it will switch to AM 346 Function Availability Table According to Shooting Mode SS E __ _ SS SSS Function Gf Photos novis F v Av M B a on AF point selection a gt gt gt With AFD except C amp S AF assist beam e ojoj olol lo AE Manual focusing MF DIOLOG OGIO O AF Configuration Tool O O O 1O O0 AF Microadjustment O O0 0 O Wi am except GI Metering Evaluative metering e ololololo mode Metering mode selection oOlolololo Program shift O AF IOK SAAS hP Tv Av B Exposure Exposure compensation O l1O l O AEB o ojo o Depth of field preview O DONGO Single shooting O lOO OVO O High speed continuous shooting OP E OE O O O O Low speed continuous shooting CTA GONO Oa O O Drive Silent single shooting O O O O O O O Silent continuous shooting O O O O O O O O 10 sec NO rO ROO O Os 182 2 sec o oloj olojo O External FE locks o ojojojo Speedlite Flash exposure compensation w OG G NO O Live View
50. LOCK gt switch has been set to the left Multi function lock released p 34 47 It is assumed that all the menu settings and Custom Functions are set to their defaults The illustrations in this manual show the camera attached with the EF 50mm f 1 4 USM or EF 24 105mm f 4L IS USM lens as an example Chapters mE For first time DSLR users Chapters 1 and 2 explain the camera s basic operations and shooting procedures Introduction d Getting Started 27 Basic Shooting 63 fj Setting the AF and Drive Modes co E Image Settings 115 Advanced Operations 159 fj Flash Photography 187 B Shooting with the LCD Monitor Live View Shooting 17 B Shooting Movies 217 Image Playback 243 E Post Processing Images 281 B Sensor Cleaning 280 fj CIA lSl OlOIN IA Mi Alwin e Printing Images and Transferring Images to a Computer 205 fj aN w Customizing the Camera 33 E A Reference 335 B EN wi Software Start Guide 380 E 5 Contents memm Introduction 2 itemi Check Bista ionis ioo a a E ANS 3 Conventions Used in this Manual 4 GChaptersics sins me ina iA e a E e e r aeea aa 5 Index to Fetu Susini aa ii EE 12 Handlifig Precautions sissien piia ap 14 Quick Stat Guide Janines oea i 16 Nomenclature asipige n a 18 1 Getting Started 27 Charging the Battery nizi nrp ea E A E aA 28 Installin
51. MW Setting the Image Recording Quality ae a SS 2S U K Image recording Quality Setting Examples 4L only Image quality Standard AL 2245760x3840 9997 RAW Ra w RAW BERA JPEG AL dl aM aM ASI aS1 S2 S3 Image quality Standard C 2245760 3840 AL 22M5760x3840 9991 RAW a S RAW ER RAV E RA I JPEG AL dl aM aM ASI aS1 S2 S3 only Image quality Standard C 224 5760x3840 999 RAW a RAW BEL RAV E RA I ze JPEG AL al AM aM 451 aS1 S2 S3 SGM AM Image quality Standard SCA 5 54 2880x1920 AM 9 8N 3840x2560 9991 RAW a Ra E RA v BSS RAW JPEG AL dL 4M aM 4S1 aS1 S2 S3 F e If is set for both RAW and JPEG L will be set The number of possible shots will be displayed up to 1999 on the LCD panel 120 MW Setting the Image Recording Quality E gt E EE E E E gt gt I Guide to Image Recording Quality Settings Approx a Pixels Recorded Printing FileSize Possible Maximum LEO megapixels Size MB Shots Burst AL JM A2 or 7 0 1010 65 16270 dL larger 3 7 1930 1930 30990 am PEN A3 or 3 8 1860 1860 29800 aM f larger 2 0 3430 3430 55000 JPEG asi ae A4 or 25 2810 2810 45140 asi i larger 1 3 5240 5240 83980 P Around S2 2 5M 9x13 cm 1 4 5030 5030 80520 3 2 0 3M 0 3 19520 19520 312420 A2 or 22M larger 27 1 260 13
52. One Shot AF mode if the subject starts moving the camera will detect the movement and change the AF mode automatically to Al Servo AF Fil When focus is achieved in the Al Focus AF mode with the Servo mode active the beeper will sound softly However the focus confirmation light lt gt in the viewfinder will not light up Note that focus will not be locked in this case 71 Selecting the AF Area memm 61 AF points are provided for AF You can select the AF point s suiting the scene or subject Depending on the lens attached to the camera the number of usable AF points and AF point patterns will differ For details see Lenses and Usable AF Points on page 79 AF Area Selection Mode You can select one of six AF area selection modes See the next page for the selection procedure Single point Spot AF Manual selection For pinpoint focusing Single point AF Manual selection Select one AF point to focus AF point expansion Manual selection 2 The manually selected AF point lt gt and four surrounding AF points lt gt above below on the left and on the right are used to focus 72 Selecting the AF Area AF point expansion Manual selection surrounding points The manually selected AF point lt Q gt and the surrounding AF points lt o gt are used to focus Zone AF Manual selection of zone The 61 AF points are divided int
53. Picture Style INFO Detail set F You can also select the Picture Style with 3 Picture Style 129 31 Selecting a Picture Style Picture Style Characteristics Auto The color tone will be adjusted automatically to suit the scene The colors will look vivid especially for blue skies greenery and sunsets in nature outdoor and sunset scenes 2 35 Standard The image looks vivid sharp and crisp This is a general purpose Picture Style suitable for most scenes 3P Portrait For nice skin tones The image looks softer Suited for close up portraits By changing the Color tone p 132 you can adjust the skin tone 22L Landscape For vivid blues and greens and very sharp and crisp images Effective for impressive landscapes Neutral This Picture Style is for users who prefer to process images with their computer For natural colors and subdued images 2 3F Faithful This Picture Style is for users who prefer to process images with their computer When the subject is captured under a daylight color temperature of 5200K the color is adjusted colorimetrically to match the subject s color Images will appear dull and subdued Fl If the desired color tone is not obtained with Auto use another Picture Style 130 Monochrome 22 Selecting a Picture Style Creates black and white images Q Black and white images shot in JPEG cannot be reverted to color If you want to later shoot pictures in color
54. Shooting information display 244 E Image Playback 3 Exit the image playback e Press the lt gt gt button to exit the image playback and return to shooting ready state Grid Display In single image display and two image display p 253 display you can overlay the grid on the image playback Playback grid Off z yack or See With P1 3 Playback grid you can 6x4 Hit select 3x3 6x4 or 3x3 diag 3x3 diag SRK eK This function is convenient for checking the image s tilt and composition F The grid is not displayed during movie playback 245 INFO Shooting Information Display mau Sample Information for Still Photos AF Microadjustment Protect images Exposure compensation amount Rating Flash exposure compensation amount Aperture Folder number File number Card Histogram Shutter speed ETRE Brightness RGB Picture Style Settings Metering mode E Shooting mode A A ISO speed P 4 23 4 400 D Highlight tone priority White balance K FYER vary Image recording SERawE7 MEX 01015 sRGB Color space quality FRA PYA VA POY Shooting date and time Playback number Total images recorded White balance correction Color temperature when lt K gt is set File size Eye Fi transfer When you shoot in RAW JPEG image quality the RAW image file size will be displayed During flash photography without flash exposur
55. Style AME Live mode A Face detection Live mode AMD Quick mode Auto Lighting Optimizer Time code AF point Live mode Shooting mode i Recording movie Drive mode 00 00 00 White balance fil Se 7 Eye Fi card Card for recording Amy ive j transmission playback ee status GPS connection indicator Image recording quality Movie recording size AMAVA M if Magnification Recording level Manual OM pS cps feats Magnifying position AE lock i ia EAE AE Battery check Shooting mode GB Autoexposure Shutter priority AE Aperture priority AE EA Manual exposure Highlight tone priority Frame rate Shutter speed Compression method Aperture Digital compass ISO speed Movie shooting remaining time Possible shots Elapsed ine c Level meter Exposure level Applies to a single movie clip F e You can display the electronic level by pressing the lt INFO gt button p 60 Note that if the AF mode is set to Live mode or the camera is connected to a TV set with an HDMI cable p 268 the electronic level cannot be displayed If there is no card in the camera the movie shooting remaining time will be displayed in red When movie shooting starts the movie shooting remaining time will change to the elapsed time 225 Shooting Movies Notes on Movie Shooting Q The camera cannot autofocus continuously lik
56. The maximum burst is displayed on the bottom right in the viewfinder If the maximum burst for continuous shooting is 99 or higher 99 will be displayed Q The maximum burst is displayed even when a card is not inserted in the camera Make sure that a card is inserted before taking a picture F If the viewfinder displays 99 for the maximum burst it means the maximum burst is 99 or higher If the maximum burst decreases to 98 or lower and the internal buffer memory becomes full buSY will be displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel Shooting will then be disabled temporarily If you stop continuous shooting the maximum burst will increase After all the captured images are written to the card the maximum burst will be as listed on page 121 The maximum burst indicator in the viewfinder will not change even when you use a UDMA CF card However the maximum burst shown in parentheses on page 121 will apply 123 ISO Setting the ISO Speed memmen Set the ISO speed image sensor s sensitivity to light to suit the ambient light level With the lt J gt mode selected the ISO speed will be set automatically p 125 Regarding the ISO speed during movie shooting see pages 221 and 224 1 Press the lt SO amp 4 gt button 46 2 Set the ISO speed While looking at the LCD panel or viewfinder turn the lt gt dial e ISO speed can be set within ISO 100 25600 in 1 3 stop increments
57. Turn the lt 63 gt dial to select OK gt The file No of the selected image will be displayed at the bottom of the screen 3 Take the picture When you select the first image the number of remaining exposures as set with No of exposures will decrease by 1 For example if No of exposures is 3 you can shoot two exposures Q Images shot with highlight tone priority set to Enable cannot be selected as the first single exposure e Auto Lighting Optimizer peripheral illumination correction and chromatic aberration correction will be disabled regardless of the settings of the image selected as the first single exposure e The ISO speed Picture Style high ISO speed noise reduction and color space etc set for the first image will also be set for the subsequent images If the first image s Picture Style is Auto the Standard Picture Style will be set for the subsequent images e You cannot select an image taken with another camera 181 Multiple Exposures Fl e You can also select a multiple exposure image as the first single exposure e Ifyou select Deselect img the selected image will be canceled Checking and Deleting Multiple Exposures During Shooting 7a When On Fune ctrl is set and you have not finished shooting the set number of exposures you can press the lt gt gt button to view the merged a multiple exposure image so far You can gt 8 RB check how it looks and the expos
58. Unit is operating you can press the shutter button halfway to interrupt the cleaning and start shooting immediately c Automatic Sensor Cleaning sm Whenever you set the power switch to lt ON gt or lt OFF gt the Self Cleaning Sensor Unit operates to automatically shake off the dust on the front of the sensor Normally you need not pay attention to this operation However you can choose to perform sensor cleaning at any time or disable it Cleaning the Sensor Now 1 Select Sensor cleaning e Under the 3 tab select Sensor Battery info i lt gt Ere cleaning then press lt gt C button display options btn function Rating Tsensor cleaning 2 Select Clean now cy Disable Select Clean now f then press lt gt Clean manually ome SET UP3 Video system Select OK on the dialog screen then press lt gt gt The screen will indicate that the sensor is being cleaned Although there will be a shutter sound during the cleaning a picture is not taken Fl e For best results perform the sensor cleaning while the camera bottom is placed on a table or other flat surface e Even if you repeat the sensor cleaning the result will not improve much Immediately after the sensor cleaning is finished the Clean now c option will remain disabled temporarily Disabling Automatic Sensor Cleaning In step 2 select Auto cleaning C and set it to Disable gt The
59. Zone eS ee ee il Date Time Zone S A Set the time zone Mmezone 00 00 e Turn the lt gt dial to select Time 28 02 2012 15 30 00 zone dd mm yy Press lt gt so lt gt is displayed ii e Turn the lt gt dial to select the time Cancel zone then press lt gt Date Time Zone 5 Set the daylight saving time Daylight saving time e Setif necessary 28 02 2012 15 30 00 Turn the lt gt dial to select lt 4 dd mm yy Press lt gt so lt gt is displayed Jondon Turn the lt gt dial to select 3 then OK Cancel press lt B gt When the daylight saving time is set to 3 the time set in step 3 will advance by 1 hour If 5 is set the daylight saving time will be canceled and the time will go back by 1 hour neice rl 6 Exit the setting 28 02 2012 Turn the lt gt dial to select OK 28 02 2012 15 30 00 then press lt gt dd mm yy gt The Date Time Zone will be set and 3 London the menu will reappear Cance F The menu setting procedure is explained on pages 51 52 The date time that was set will start from when you press lt gt in step 6 e In step 4 the time displayed on the upper right is the time difference compared with Universal Time If you do not see your time zone set the time zone while referring to the difference with Universal Time 37 M4 Selecting the Interface Language mum Display the menu screen e Press the lt MENU gt button to
60. border on Bordered Ei 9x13 cm and larger prints XxX up Option to print 2 4 8 9 16 or 20 images on one sheet 20 up H Twenty or 35 images will be printed as thumbnails on A4 or Letter size paper 35 up kd 20 up Ea will have the shooting information imprinted Default The page layout will vary depending on the printer model or its settings 4 From the Exif data the camera name lens name shooting mode shutter speed aperture exposure compensation amount ISO speed white balance etc will be imprinted 2 After ordering the prints with Digital Print Order Format DPOF p 305 you should print by following Direct Printing with DPOF p 308 Q If the image s aspect ratio is different from the printing paper s aspect ratio the image may be cropped significantly if you print it as a borderless print If the image is cropped it may look more grainy on the paper due to the fewer number of pixels 299 6 Printing Pe 2 Off Y a Trimming Paper settings Cancel QJ 9x13cm E Photo E Borderless A Set the printing effects Set if necessary If you do not need to set any printing effects go to step 5 What is displayed on the screen differs depending on the printer Select the option then press lt gt Select the desired printing effect then press lt gt If the lt E gt icon is displayed brightly next to lt MA gt you can also adjust the printing effect p 30
61. connecting cables etc Keep the back up battery away from children If a child swallows the battery consult a physician immediately Battery chemicals may harm the stomach and intestines When disposing of a battery pack or back up battery insulate the electrical contacts with tape to prevent contact with other metallic objects or batteries This is to prevent fire or an explosion If excessive heat smoke or fumes are emitted during battery pack recharging immediately unplug the battery charger from the power outlet to stop the recharging and prevent a fire If the battery pack or back up battery leaks changes color deforms or emits smoke or fumes remove it immediately Be careful not to get burned in the process Prevent any battery leakage from contacting your eyes skin and clothing It can cause blindness or skin problems If the battery leakage contacts your eyes skin or clothing flush the affected area with lots of clean water without rubbing it See a physician immediately During the recharging keep the equipment away from the reach of children The cord can accidentally choke the child or give an electrical shock Do not leave any cords near a heat source It can deform the cord or melt the insulation and cause a fire or electrical shock Do not fire the flash at someone driving a car It may cause an accident Do not fire the flash near a person s eyes It may impair the pe
62. copy all the images in the folder or on a card F The file name of the copied image will be the same as the source image s file name f Sel Image is set you cannot copy images in multiple folders at one time Select images in each folder to copy them folder by folder f an image is being copied to a target folder card which has an image with the same file number the following will be displayed Skip image and continue Replace existing image Cancel copy Select the copying method then press lt gt Skip image and continue Any images in the source folder having the same file number as images in the target folder will be skipped and not copied Replace existing image Any images in the target folder having the same file number as the source images including protected images will be overwritten If an image with a print order p 305 is overwritten you will have to set the print order again e The image s print order information and image transfer information will not be retained when the image is copied Shooting is not possible during the copying operation Select Cancel before shooting 276 q Erasing Images ma You can either select and erase images one by one or erase them in one batch Protected images p 272 will not be erased Q Once an image is erased it cannot be recovered Make sure you no longer need the image before erasing it To prevent important images from being erased accident
63. display the menu screen Under the 2 tab select Language 3 Press the lt Q gt button and select the tab Turn the lt gt dial to select the 2 tab e Turn the lt gt dial to select Language the fourth item from the top then press lt gt Di ECD brightness Date Time Zone 28 02 Norsk Rom n Set the desired language e ae e Turn the lt gt dial to select the Nederlands EAAnvikd mining language then press lt 6 gt H gt The interface language will change Suomi e tina i Italiano Magyar AAS Ykpailicbka 38 Attaching and Detaching a Lens sx The camera is compatible with all Canon EF lenses The camera cannot be used with EF S lenses Remove the caps e Remove the rear lens cap and the body cap by turning them as shown by the arrows Attach the lens e Align the red dots on the lens and camera and turn the lens as shown by the arrow until it clicks in place 3 Set the lens focus mode switch to lt AF gt e lt AF gt stands for Autofocus e If itis set to lt MF gt manual focus autofocus will not operate A Remove the front lens cap Q e Do not look at the sun directly through any lens Doing so may cause loss of vision Ifthe front part focusing ring of the lens rotates during autofocusing do not touch the rotating part 39 Attaching and Detaching a Lens Minimizin
64. do is point and shoot and the_ camera sets everything automatically p 346 Also to prevent botched pictures due to mistaken operations major shooting settings cannot be changed F About the Auto Lighting Optimizer In the lt E gt mode the Auto Lighting Optimizer p 142 will adjust the image automatically to obtain the optimum brightness and contrast It is also enabled by default in the P Tv Av B modes ay Fully Automatic Shooting Scene Intelligent Auto mm lt GJ gt is a fully automatic mode The camera analyzes the scene and sets the optimum settings automatically Detecting whether the subject is still or moving it also adjusts focus automatically lt N Set the Mode Dial to lt gt Gt e Turn the Mode Dial while holding A M down the lock release button at the center Area AF frame 2 Aim the Area AF frame over the target subject e All the AF points will be used to focus and generally the closest object will be focused e Aiming the center of the Area AF frame over the subject will make focusing easier 3 Focus the subject Press the shutter button halfway and the lens focusing ring will rotate to focus gt During the autofocus operation lt a gt will be displayed gt The AF point s that achieve s focus will be displayed At the same time the beeper will sound and the focus confirmation light lt gt in the viewfinder will light up gt In low light the AF
65. f size AA LR6 batteries are used in Battery Grip BG E11 a four level indicator will be displayed 4 4 1__ al will not be displayed 35 M4 Setting the Date Time and Zone mam When you turn on the power for the first time or if the date time has been reset the Date Time Zone setting screen will appear Follow steps 3 to 6 to set the current date time and time zone Note that the date time appended to recorded images will be based on this date time setting Be sure to set the correct date time You can also set the time zone of your current address Then if you travel to another time zone you can simply set your destination s time zone so that the correct date time will be recorded 1 Display the menu screen e Press the lt MENU gt button to display the menu screen 2 Under the 2 tab select Date Time Zone Press the lt Q gt button and select the tab Turn the lt gt dial to select the 2 tab Turn the lt gt gt dial to select Date Time Zone then press lt gt Auto power off LCD brightness Date Time Zone 28 02 l Date Time zone 3 Set the date and time Sa Turn the lt gt dial to select the 28 02 2012 15 30 00 number dd mm yy e Press lt gt so lt gt is displayed 3 London Turn the lt gt gt dial to select the ok Cancel desired setting then press lt gt Returns to lt o gt 36 MM Setting the Date Time and
66. for any loss or inconvenience caused Copyrights Copyright laws in your country may prohibit the use of your recorded images of people and certain subjects for anything but private enjoyment Also be aware that certain public performances exhibitions etc may prohibit photography even for private enjoyment Memory Cards In this manual CF card refers to CompactFlash cards and SD card refers to SD SDHC SDXC cards Card refers to all memory cards used to record images or movies The camera does not come with a card for recording images movies Please purchase it separately Item Check List Before starting check that all the following items have been included with your camera If anything is missing contact your dealer o E Eyecup Eg Battery Pack Battery Charger LP E6 LC E6 LC E6E with protective cover Interface Cable Stereo AV Cable Wide Strap IFC 200U AVC DC400ST EW EOS5DMKIll oc 9 EOS Solution Disk EOS Software Instruction Software Manuals Disk 1 Camera Instruction Manual this booklet g 2 Pocket Guide 2 Battery Sona LC E6 or LC E6E is provided The LC E6E comes with a power cord e Attach Eyecup Eg to the viewfinder eyepiece e f you purchased a Lens Kit check that the lens is included Depending on the Lens Kit type a lens instruction manual may also be included e Be careful not to lose any of the above items Camera with body cap
67. gt The Picture Style selection screen will appear Select a Picture Style Turn the lt gt dial to select the desired Picture Style then press lt INFO gt Select a parameter Turn the lt gt dial to select a parameter such as Sharpness then press lt gt 2 Customizing a Picture Style Detail set EP Portrait 5 Set the parameter OSharpness meee Turn the lt gt dial to set the parameter as desired then press lt gt Picture Style e Press the lt MENU gt button to save the Portralt adjusted parameters The Picture 03 00 2060 Style selection screen will reappear gt Any settings different from the default will be displayed in blue INFO Detail set L SET KOLS Parameter Settings and Effects Sharpness 0 Less sharp outline 7 Sharp outline Contrast 4 Low contrast 4 High contrast amp Saturation 4 Low saturation 4 High saturation Color tone 4 Reddish skin tone 4 Yellowish skin tone F e By selecting Default set in step 4 you can revert the respective Picture Style to its default parameter settings To use the adjusted Picture Style first select the adjusted Picture Style then shoot 133 31 Customizing a Picture Style se Monochrome Adjustment For Monochrome you can also set Filter effect and Toning effect in addition to Sharpness and Contrast explained on the preceding page Filter Eff
68. is applied with a soft focus lens A special effects filter is used Q If you use AF with any of the following lenses using Quick mode is recommended If you use the Live mode or Live mode for AF it may take a longer time to achieve focus or the camera may not be able to achieve correct focus EF 24mm f 2 8 EF 35mm f 2 EF 50mm f 2 5 Compact Macro EF 100mm f 2 8 Macro EF 135mm f 2 8 Softfocus EF 28 90mm f 4 5 6 Ill EF 55 200mm f 4 5 5 6 USM EF 90 300mm f 4 5 5 6 EF 90 300mm 4 5 5 6 USM 211 Using AF to Focus See ee Quick Mode Ag The dedicated AF sensor is used to focus in One Shot AF mode p 70 using the same AF method as with viewfinder shooting Although you can focus the target area quickly the Live View image will be interrupted momentarily during the AF operation In AF area selection modes other than 61 point automatic selection AF you can manually select the AF point or zone In the lt gt mode 61 point automatic selection AF is set automatically Area AF frame 1 Display the Live View image Press the lt gt button gt The Live View image will appear on the LCD monitor e Ifthe AF area selection mode is set to 61 point automatic selection AF the Area AF frame will be displayed In other modes the AF point will be displayed as a small frame The larger rectangular frame is the magnifying frame 2 Select the AF area selection mode e Press the lt E
69. make sure the Monochrome setting has been canceled When Monochrome is selected lt B W gt will appear on the LCD panel F lt gt can be displayed in the viewfinder when Monochrome is set p 318 User Def 1 3 You can register a basic style such as Portrait Landscape a Picture Style file etc and adjust it as desired p 135 Any User Defined Picture Style that has not been set will have the same settings as the Standard Picture Style About the Symbols The symbols of the Picture Style selection screen refer to parameters such as Sharpness and Contrast The numerals indicate the parameter settings such as for Sharpness and Contrast for each Picture Style Picture Style Standard 03008000 Picture Style Symbols Sharpness Contrast amp Saturation Color tone Filter effect Monochrome Toning effect Monochrome 131 31 Customizing a Picture Style mam You can customize a Picture Style by adjusting individual parameters such as Sharpness and Contrast To see the resulting effects take test shots To customize Monochrome see page 134 1 Press the lt C1 gt button Picture Style Portrait 02 00 20 60 9 BaS P Detail set OSharpness OContrast amp Saturation Color tone Default set 132 Select 313 Turn the lt gt dial to select 313 then press lt gt
70. may not be imprinted 300 Printing ET 30n 5 Set the date and file number ae EO Both imprinting ia e Set if necessary 9x13em NOUE e Select lt g gt then press lt gt E Photo Cancel e Set as desired then press lt gt E Borderless Print 6 Set the number of copies Set if necessary e Select lt w gt then press lt gt Trimming H9 Set the number of copies then press 4 9x13cm Paper settings E Photo Cancel lt 3 gt E Borderless Print se 2 Both 2 Gin T coni Fo 1 Scopies 7 Start printing e Select Print then press lt gt 1 copies Trimming QJ 9x13cm Paper settings E Photo Cancel E Borderless Print ir e With Easy printing you can print another image using the same settings Just select the image and press the lt 2 gt button With Easy printing the number of copies will always be 1 You cannot set the number of copies Also any trimming p 303 will not be applied The Default setting for printing effects and other options are the printer s own default settings as set by the printer s manufacturer Refer to the printer s instruction manual to find out what the Default settings are e Depending on the image s file size and image recording quality it may a take some time for the printing to start after you select Print e f image tilt correction p 303 is applied it may take longer to print the image e To stop the printing
71. not block the mirror operation with your finger etc Doing so may cause a malfunction e Use a blower to blow away dust on the lens viewfinder reflex mirror and focusing screen Do not use cleaners that contain organic solvents to clean the camera body or lens For stubborn dirt take the camera to the nearest Canon Service Center Do not touch the camera s electrical contacts with your fingers This is to prevent the contacts from corroding Corroded contacts can cause camera misoperation f the camera is suddenly brought in from the cold into a warm room condensation may form on the camera and internal parts To prevent condensation first put the camera in a sealed plastic bag and let it adjust to the warmer temperature before taking it out of the bag If condensation forms on the camera do not use the camera This is to avoid damaging the camera If there is condensation remove the lens card and battery from the camera and wait until the condensation has evaporated before using the camera f the camera will not be used for an extended period remove the battery and store the camera in a cool dry well ventilated location Even while the camera is in storage press the shutter button a few times once in a while to check that the camera is still working e Avoid storing the camera where there are corrosive chemicals such as a darkroom or chemical lab f the camera has not been used for an extended period test all i
72. of a bicycle Case 3 FO suddenly entering AF race alpine downhill skiers 87 points etc Case4 For subjects that accelerate Soccer motor sports 87 or decelerate quickly basketball etc Case 5 Y For erratic subjects MIS Figure skaters etc 88 quickly in any direction Case 6 of For subjects that change Rhythm gymnastics etc 89 speed and move erratically 85 CEM Selecting Al Servo AF Characteristics For a Subject Case 1 Versatile multi purpose setting pee a AF1 AF config tool Case 1 k Versatile multi purpose HE setting Tracking sensitivity f Accel decel tracking oY AF pt auto switching INFO Lafe GMB Detail set Default settings Tracking sensitivity 0 e Accel decel tracking 0 AF pt auto switching 0 Standard setting suited for any moving subject Works with many subjects and scenes Select Case 2 to Case 6 in the following cases when obstacles enter AF points when the subject tends to stray from AF points when you want to focus a subject that suddenly appears or when the subject moves dramatically up down left or right Case 2 Continue to track subject ignoring possible obstacles AF E e 1 AF1 AF config tool Case 2 Continue to track subjects Pd ignoring possible obstacles Tracking sensitivity f Accel decel tracking amp oY AF pt auto switching INFO Lafe RATED so Default settings e Tracking sensit
73. on 6 off the LCD panel illumination by pressing the lt 6 gt button During a bulb exposure pressing the shutter button completely will turn off the LCD panel illumination Displaying Shooting Settings AEDA AWB hom aL O S m 514 48 After you press the lt INFO gt button a number of times the shooting settings will be displayed With the shooting settings displayed you can turn the Mode Dial to see the settings for each shooting mode p 337 Pressing the lt Q gt button enables Quick Control of the shooting settings p 49 Press the lt INFO gt button again to turn off the display Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions m You can directly select and set the shooting functions displayed on the LCD monitor This is called the Quick Control screen gt 1 Press the lt Q gt button gt The Quick Control screen will appear 610 O 2 Set the desired function Use lt gt to select a function gt The setting of the selected function is displayed at the bottom Turn the lt 63 gt or lt 5 gt dial to change the setting e P Tv Av M B modes auto Scene Intelligent Auto gt a Ba Take the picture Press the shutter button completely to take the picture gt The captured image will be displayed F In the lt y gt mode you can only select or set the recording function card image recording quality and drive mode 49 Q
74. point expansion Manual selection surrounding points Zone AF Manual selection 61 point automatic selection AF This setting is not available with the Single point Spot AF Manual selection and Single point AF Manual selection modes Fl If the subject moves erratically up down left or right setting AF pt auto switching to 2 may give better results p 92 88 MM Selecting Al Servo AF Characteristics For a Subject ill Bs Se a I Case 6 For subjects that change speed and move erratically Geared for tracking moving subjects AFI a E EE whose speed can change dramatically x For subjects that change and suddenly Also if the target subject Pid speed and move erratically 5 2a rakse moves dramatically up down left or right Y Accel decel tracking a n and it is difficult to focus the AF point of AR nueuta switching teas switches automatically to track the INFO Jat TRATED k subject Default settings This setting takes effect when the Tracking sensitivity 0 e Accel decel tracking 1 AF pt auto switching 1 following AF area selection modes are L set AF point expansion Manual selection g AF point expansion Manual selection surrounding points Zone AF Manual selection 61 point automatic selection AF This setting is not available with the Single point Spot AF Manual selection and Single point AF Manual selection modes F f the moving su
75. point s will light up briefly in red Focus confirmation light 64 G Fully Automatic Shooting Scene Intelligent Auto a Se 8 eS Take the picture Press the shutter button completely to take the picture gt The captured image will be displayed for 2 sec on the LCD monitor Fl The lt 43 gt mode makes the colors look more impressive in nature outdoor and sunset scenes If you did not obtain the desired color tones change the shooting mode to lt P Tv Av M gt set a Picture Style other than lt EAl gt then shoot again gt FAQ e The focus confirmation light lt gt blinks and focus is not achieved Aim the center of the Area AF frame over a zone with good contrast then press the shutter button halfway p 44 If you are too close to the subject move away and try again If focus cannot be achieved the AF status indicator lt x 4 gt will also blink e Multiple AF points light up simultaneously All those AF points have achieved focus As long as the AF point covering the desired subject lights up you can take the picture The beeper continues to beep softly The focus confirmation light lt gt does not light up It indicates that the camera is focusing continuously on a moving subject The AF status indicator lt x 4 gt is displayed but the focus confirmation light lt gt does not light up You can take sharp pictures of a moving subject Note that focus lock p 6
76. press the lt Q gt button and turn the lt gt dial counterclockwise you can select an image from a three image display To return to the single image display turn the lt gt dial clockwise e To select other images to be copied repeat step 4 5 Press the lt RATE gt button e After selecting all the images to be copied press the lt RATE gt button Target 6 Select OK Check the target card and press Copy to Card2 Select gt gt target folder to copy to MENU a Target folder 7 Select the target folder 100EOSSD Turn the lt gt dial to select the folder Det to copy the images to then press lt gt e To create a new folder select Create folder 275 Copying Images eS aa SS SE ilmage copy 8 Select OK Source fi 100E0S5D Check the copy source and target 3images 13 7 MB EA Target NOTEOSED card s information Freespace 7 72 GB Turn the lt gt dial to select OK Copy images then press lt B gt Cancel OK image copy gt The copying will start and the progress will be displayed When the copying is completed the Images to copy 3 5 Copied images result will be displayed Images not copied Select OK to return to the screen in OK step 2 Finished copying M Copying All Images in a Folder or Card You can copy all the images in a folder or on a card at one time Under L 1 Image copy when you select Sel fil or All image you can
77. printing the card s remaining capacity was low f a problem occurs during printing see page 304 308 Transferring Images to a Personal Computer m You can connect the camera to a personal computer and operate the camera to transfer images on the card to the personal computer This is called direct image transfer The direct image transfer can be performed with the camera while you look at the LCD monitor The images transferred to the personal computer will be saved in the Pictures or My Pictures folder and organized in folders by shooting date Before connecting the camera to the personal computer be sure to install the provided software EOS Solution Disk on CD ROM on the personal computer For the procedure to install the provided software see pages 391 392 Preparation for Image Transfer 1 Set the camera s power switch to lt OFF gt 2 Connect the camera to a personal computer e Use the interface cable provided with the camera Connect the cable to the camera s lt DIGITAL gt terminal with the cable plug s lt lt gt icon facing the front of the camera Connect the cord s plug to the personal computer s USB terminal E 309 in Transferring Images to a Personal Computer Set the camera s power switch to lt ON gt When the personal computer displays a screen to select the program select EOS Utility gt The EOS Utility screen w
78. reading writing speed refer to the card manufacturer s Web site p 217 Ifthe movie shooting time reaches 29 min 59 sec the movie shooting will stop automatically The ISO speed cannot be set for movie shooting If the shooting mode is lt P Tv Av B gt the ISO speed will be set automatically In the lt M gt mode you can freely set the ISO speed p 224 ISO 16000 20000 25600 cannot be set for movie shooting Under 92 ISO speed range if you set the ISO speed range s Maximum setting to 25600 H the maximum ISO speed for manual ISO speed setting will be expanded and then ISO 16000 20000 25600 can be set However since shooting a movie at ISO 16000 20000 256000 may result in much noise it is designated as an expanded ISO speed displayed as H 364 Troubleshooting Guide M T rj The manually set ISO speed changes when switching to movie shooting e If you shoot a movie when Maximum 25600 is set with ISO speed range and ISO speed is set to ISO 16000 20000 25600 the ISO speed will switch to IS012800 during movie shooting with manual exposure Even if you switch back to still photo shooting the ISO speed will not revert to the original setting If you shoot a movie when 1 L 50 or 2 H1 51200 H2 102400 is set the ISO speed setting will switch to 1 ISO 100 or 2 H 25600 respectively during movie shooting with manual exposure Even if you switch back to still photo shooting the ISO
79. release timing for the first shot during continuous shooting with Al Servo AF Al servo 1st image priority o e Equal priority Equal priority Equal priority is given to focusing and pn ee S shutter release isease Focus o Release priority Release timing for the first F A AEA NEG Pressing the shutter button takes the CE3 Help CSET Jee picture immediately even if focus has not been achieved This gives priority to getting the shot rather than achieving correct focus Focus priority Pressing the shutter button does not take the picture until focus has been achieved Effective when you want to achieve focus before capturing the shot 94 EM Customizing AF Functions i eS SE ss 8 Ee il Al Servo 2nd image priority You can set the AF operation characteristics and shutter release timing during continuous shooting after the first shot with Al Servo AF Al servo 2nd image priority Equal priority Equal priority Equal priority is given to focusing and ay imin continuous shooting speed In low light eset Feats or with low contrast subjects shooting Release timing after 1st img in Al servo AF continuous shooting speed may slow down INFO falalo SET eld Ch Shooting speed priority Priority is given to the continuous shooting speed instead of achieving focus The continuous shooting speed does not slow down Convenient when you want to maintain the continuous shooting speed Focus priority Priority is given to
80. sec 1 30 sec le I 1 4000 sec 1 60 sec Focus and shoot the movie The procedure is the same as steps 3 and 4 for Autoexposure Shooting p 218 221 123 Q Changing the shutter speed during movie shooting is not recommended since the changes in the exposure will be recorded When shooting a movie of a moving subject a shutter speed of 1 30 sec to 1 125 sec is recommended The faster the shutter speed the less smooth the subjects movement will look e If you change the shutter speed while shooting under fluorescent or LED lighting image flicker may be recorded 219 Shooting Movies Aperture priority AE When the shooting mode is lt Av gt you can manually set the aperture for movie shooting The ISO speed and shutter speed will be set automatically to suit the brightness and obtain a standard exposure AN DAE XP 1 Set the Mode Dial to lt Av gt 1 2 Set the Live View shooting Movie shooting switch to lt gt 3 Set the desired aperture While looking at the LCD monitor turn the lt s gt dial Focus and shoot the movie The procedure is the same as steps 3 and 4 for Autoexposure Shooting p 218 Q Changing the aperture during movie shooting is not recommended since variations in the exposure due to the drive of the lens aperture will be recorded 220 Shooting Movies ee MlM Ml a ee ISO speed in the G mode e Int
81. selects an AF point in the vertical direction Inthe Zone AF mode turning the lt gt or lt gt dial will change the Zone in a looping sequence AF Point Display Indications Pressing the lt EJ gt button lights up the AF points that are cross type AF points for high precision autofocusing The blinking AF points are horizontal line sensitive For details see page 78 F When you press the lt E gt button the LCD panel displays the following 61 point automatic selection AF and Zone AF manual selection of zone 11 AF e Single point Spot AF and Single point AF SEL Center SEL AF Off center e With AF5 Manual AF pt selec pattern you can set either Stops at AF area edges or Continuous p 102 74 AF Area Selection Modes ma Single point Spot AF Manual selection Although this is the same as single point AF the selected AF point lt 2 gt covers a smaller area to focus Effective for pinpoint focusing of overlapping subjects such as an animal in a cage Since Spot AF covers a very small area focusing may be difficult during hand held shooting or for a moving subject Single point AF Manual selection Select one AF point lt gt to be used for focusing AF point expansion Manual selection 2 The manually selected AF point lt gt and adjacent AF points lt gt above be
82. shooting ends the One touch image quality setting will be canceled and the camera will switch back to the previous image recording quality 5 In step 3 on page 321 if you press the lt INFO gt button you can select the image recording quality for this function to switch to uwy One touch image quality hold When you press the button assigned to this function you can switch to the image recording quality set here While the camera switches the image recording quality the image recording quality will blink on the LCD panel Even after shooting the One touch image quality setting will not be canceled To revert to the previous image recording quality setting press the button assigned to this function again 5 In step 3 on page 321 if you press the lt INFO gt button you can select the image recording quality for this function to switch to Image quality Press lt gt to display the image recording quality setting screen p 119 on the LCD monitor zz Picture Style Press lt gt to display the Picture Style selection setting screen p 129 on the LCD monitor Fl During the switch to the One touch image quality setting lt gt can be displayed in the viewfinder p 318 328 2 2 Custom Controls amp Depth of field preview When you press the depth of field preview button the aperture will stop down and you can check the depth of field p 165 W IS start With the lens IS switch set
83. still photos in all drive modes The self timer can be used before you start shooting a movie If used during movie shooting the self timer will switch to single image shooting 229 Shooting Function Settings sxe AF DRIVE WB ISO E 32 Settings If you press the lt AF DRIVE gt lt WB gt lt ISO 4 gt lt E gt or lt 4 gt button while the image is displayed on the LCD monitor the setting screen will appear on the LCD monitor and you can turn the lt gt or lt gt dial to set the respective function When AFM is set you can press the lt E gt button to select the AF area selection mode and AF point The procedure is the same as with viewfinder shooting During manual exposure shooting p 223 you can press the lt ISO amp 4 gt button to set the ISO speed Note that the following cannot be set lt gt Metering mode lt 4 gt Flash exposure compensation lt HDR gt HDR mode and lt h gt Multiple exposures Q Quick Control While the image is displayed on the LCD monitor you can press the lt Q gt button and set the following Auto Lighting Optimizer card selection recording function image recording quality still photos movie recording size and sound recording level with Sound recording Manual set 1 Press the lt Q gt button gt The settable functions will be displayed 2 Select a function and set it e Use lt gt to select a function gt The set
84. stops 170 ISO speed ISO speed range Auto ISO range me ISO speed settings at P p 9 9 to Minimum shutter speed 128 Auto Lighting Disable Low Standard High i Optimizer Disable during manual exposure A OMB 3 By A 3 ee White balance Approx 2500 10000 137 Custom White Balance Manual setting of white balance 138 5 z White balance correction B A M G bias 9 levels each vanite balance Shi White balance bracketing B A and M G bias 140 bracketing k 141 single level increments 3 levels Color space sRGB Adobe RGB 158 During movie shooting Expo comp AEB will be Exposure comp O Shooting 3 Red 223A Auto E S Standard 6 3P Portrait 129 Picture Style 2 2L Landscape E N Neutral F Faithful to EM Monochrome E ilUser Def 1 2 3 136 Long exposure noise Disable Auto Enable 144 reduction BighhISO speed nelss standard Low High Disable 143 reduction Highlight tone priority Disable Enable 146 Doct Delete Data Obtain data to be used by provided software to 291 delete dust spots Multiple exposure Multiple exposure control Multiple exposure No of exposures Save source images 177 Continue multiple exposure HDR Mode Adjust dynamic range Effect Continuous 173 HDR Auto Image Align Save source images For movie shooting Multiple exposure and HDR Mode cannot be selected grayed out 349 Menu Settings
85. the 4 tab select AF AE mode pve mode mode In the lt E gt mode it is Live mode 3 Quick mode displayed under 82 While the Live View image is displayed you can press the lt AF DRIVE gt button to select the AF mode on the setting screen displayed Live Mode AM The image sensor is used to focus Although AF is possible with the Live View image displayed the AF operation will take longer than with the Quick mode Also achieving focus may be more difficult than with the Quick mode 1 Display the Live View image Press the lt 8 gt button gt The Live View image will appear on the LCD monitor gt The AF point lt gt will appear SE 2 Move the AF point AF point You can use lt gt to move the AF point to where you want to focus It cannot go to the edges of the picture Pressing lt gt straight down will return the AF point to the image center 207 Using AF to Focus 3 Focus the subject e Aim the AF point over the subject and press the shutter button halfway gt When focus is achieved the AF point will turn green and the beeper will sound gt If focus is not achieved the AF point will turn orange 4 Take the picture i Check the focus and exposure then press the shutter button completely to take the picture p 198 X Face detection Live Mode AF With the same AF method as the Live mode human faces are detect
86. the lt gt dial do 630999 To set the aperture turn the lt gt dial f it cannot be set set the lt LOCK gt switch to the left then turn the lt gt or lt gt dial Standard exposure index 3 Focus the subject Press the shutter button halfway gt The exposure setting will be displayed Exposure level mark in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel The exposure level mark lt f gt indicates how far the current exposure level is from the standard exposure level A Set the exposure and take the picture e Check the exposure level and set the desired shutter speed and aperture f the exposure compensation amount exceeds 3 stops the end of the exposure level indicator will display lt 4 gt or lt gt Q If ISO Auto is set the ISO speed setting will change to suit the shutter speed and aperture to obtain a standard exposure Therefore you may not obtain the desired exposure effect 166 Selecting the Metering Mode Se 8 Sil F In 2 Auto Lighting Optimizer if the checkmark lt v gt for Disable during man expo is removed it can be set in the lt M gt mode p 142 When ISO Auto is set you can press the lt gt button to lock the ISO speed e After recomposing the picture you can see the exposure level difference on the exposure level indicator p 22 23 compared to when you pressed the lt gt button Selecting the Metering Mode ummm You can sel
87. the Speedilite s instruction manual External Speedlite control 1 Select Flash C Fn settings Flash firing Enable Select Flash C Fn settings then E TTL II meter Evaluative Flash sync speed in Av mode AUTO press S gt Flash function settings Clear flash settings Flash C Fn settings Clear all Speedlite C Fn s Flash C Fn settings Set the functions Distance indicator cena e Turn the lt gt dial to select the 0 Meters m 1 Feet ft number then press lt gt Turn the lt gt dial to select the menu option then press lt gt Clearing Flash Custom Function Settings Selecting Clear all Speedlite C Fn s will clear all the Speedlite s Custom Function settings except C Fn 00 Distance indicator display Q With an EX series Speedlite if the Flash metering mode Custom Function is set to TTL autoflash the Speedlite will always fire at full output F The Speedlite s Personal Functions P Fn cannot be set or canceled with the camera s External Speedlite control screen Set it with the Speedlite 196 Shooting with the LCD Monitor Live View Shooting You can shoot while viewing the picture on the camera s LCD j monitor This is called Live View shooting Live View shooting is enabled by setting the Live View shooting Movie shooting switch to lt gt Live View shooting is effective for photos of still subjects If you handhold the camera
88. the knob left or right so that the AF points in the viewfinder look sharp e If the knob is difficult to turn remove the eyecup p 185 i F If the camera s dioptric adjustment still cannot provide a sharp viewfinder image using Dioptric Adjustment Lens Eg sold separately is recommended Holding the Camera To obtain sharp images hold the camera still to minimize camera shake Horizontal shooting Vertical shooting 1 Wrap your right hand around the camera grip firmly 2 Hold the lens bottom with your left hand 3 Rest your hand s right index finger lightly on the shutter button 4 Press your arms and elbows lightly against the front of your body 5 To maintain a stable stance place one foot slightly ahead of the other 6 Press the camera against your face and look through the viewfinder F To shoot while looking at the LCD monitor see page 68 43 Basic Operation Shutter Button The shutter button has two steps You can press the shutter button halfway Then you can further press the shutter button completely Pressing halfway This activates autofocusing and the automatic exposure system that sets the shutter speed and aperture The exposure setting shutter speed and aperture is displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel 4 Pressing completely This releases the shutter and takes the picture Preventing Camera Shake Hand held camera movement during t
89. to ISO 16000 20000 25600 the ISO speed will switch to 1S012800 during movie shooting with manual exposure Even if you switch back to still photo shooting the ISO speed will not revert to the original setting f you shoot a movie when 1 L 50 or 2 H1 51200 H2 102400 is set the ISO speed setting will switch to 1 ISO 100 or 2 H 25600 respectively during movie shooting with manual exposure Even if you switch back to still photo shooting the ISO speed will not revert to the original setting F Under 2 ISO speed settings you can use ISO speed range to expand the settable ISO speed range from ISO 50 L to ISO 102400 H2 p 126 e lt gt can be displayed in the viewfinder when you set an expanded ISO speed L H1 or H2 p 318 ISO Auto If the ISO speed is set to A Auto the actual ISO speed to be set will be displayed when you press the shutter button halfway As indicated below the ISO speed will be set automatically to suit the shooting mode Shooting Mode ISO Speed Setting Gt Automatically set within ISO 100 12800 P Tv Av M Automatically set within ISO 100 25600 B Fixed at ISO 400 With flash Fixed at ISO 400 1 2 3 1 The actual ISO speed range depends on the Minimum and Maximum settings set in Auto ISO range 2 If fill flash will result in overexposure ISO 100 or a higher ISO will be set 3 When using bounce flash with an external Speedli
90. to the power outlet If the problem persists contact your dealer or nearest Canon Service Center The charger s lamp does not blink Ifthe internal temperature of the battery pack attached to the charger is high the charger will not charge the battery for safety reasons lamp off During the charging if the battery s temperature becomes high for any reason the charging will stop automatically lamp blinks When the battery temperature goes down the charging will resume automatically The camera does not operate even when the power switch is set to lt ON gt The battery is not properly installed in the camera p 30 Make sure the battery compartment cover is closed p 30 Make sure the card slot cover is closed p 31 Recharge the battery p 28 358 Troubleshooting Guide The access lamp still blinks even when the power switch is set to lt OFF gt e If the power is turned off while an image is being recorded to the card the access lamp will remain on continue to blink for a few seconds When the image recording is completed the power will turn off automatically The battery becomes exhausted quickly e Use a fully charged battery pack p 28 The battery performance may have degraded See 3 Battery info to check the battery s recharge performance level p 338 If the battery performance is poor replace the battery pack with a new one e The number of possible shots will decrease with any
91. type and layout E Photo Cancel Returns to the screen in step 1 Borderless Print Starts the printing Sets the printing effects p 300 Sets the date or file number imprinting to on Da The paper size type and layout you have set are displayed Depending on the printer certain settings such as the date and file number imprinting and trimming may not be selectable 3 Select Paper settings e Select Paper settings then press Hi k 3 1 copies lt gt Trimming A A PENE E gt The paper settings screen will B Photo Cancel appear E Borderless Print 298 A Printing QJ Setting the Paper Size Select the size of the paper loaded in the printer then press lt 6 gt 13x18cm gt The paper type screen will appear 10x14 8cm pap yP RE CreditCard 2 Setting the Paper Type Select the type of the paper loaded in the printer then press lt amp gt Fast pim gt The page layout screen will appear etau H py B Paper size DEB B Paper type E7 Setting the Page Layout Select the page layout then press J 8 Page layout Bordered lt GS gt gt The print settings screen will Bordered Default reappear Bordered The print will have white borders along the edges The print will have no borders If your printer cannot print Borderless borderless prints the print will have borders The shooting information will be imprinted on the
92. video input to select the connected port Yellow A Set the camera s power switch to lt ON gt Press the lt gt gt button gt The image will appear on the TV screen Nothing will be displayed on E the camera s LCD monitor To play back movies see page 261 Q e Do not use any AV cable other than the one provided Images may not be displayed if you use a different cable If the video system format does not match the TV s the images will not be displayed properly Set the proper video system format with 3 Video system 271 gt Protecting Images mum Protecting an image prevents it from being erased accidentally tm Protecting a Single Image 1 Select Protect images Protect images Under the gt 1 tab select Protect Rotate image i gt Baan images then press lt gt Print order Image copy RAW image processing enProtect images 2 Select Select images Select images Select Select images then press All images in folder Unprotect all images in folder S gt All images on card gt The images will be displayed Unprotect all images on card MENU a Image protect icon 3 Protect the image Turn the lt gt dial to select the image to be protected then press lt gt gt The image will be protected and the lt gt icon will appear at the top of the screen To cancel the image protection press l
93. 001 to 9999 and saved in one folder You can change how the file number is assigned o 1 Select File numbering Under the 1 tab select File Ao rosat numbering then press lt gt Manual reset_ Select the file numbering method e Turn the lt gt dial to select the desired setting then press lt gt Continuous Continues the file numbering sequence even after the card is replaced or a new folder is created Even after you replace the card create a folder or switch the target 9999 for the images saved This is convenient when you want to save images numbered anywhere between 0001 to 9999 in multiple cards or folders into one folder in your personal computer If the replacement card or existing folder already contains images recorded previously the file numbering of the new images may continue from the file numbering of the existing images in the card or folder If you want to use continuous file numbering you should use a newly formatted card each time File numbering after File numbering after replacing the card creating a folder Card A 0J Card B A Card A 5 00 ior 0051 0051 0082 NAI Next sequential file number 154 CEM File Numbering Methods i a ee Ss Auto Reset The file numbering restarts from 0001 each time the card is replaced or a new folder is created When you replace the card create a folder or switch the target card for the images saved This is co
94. 00mm 2 8L IS II USM Macro LIFE SIZE Converter Extender EF 2x EF 28 105mm f 3 5 4 5 USM EF 100mm f 2 8 Macro UsM_ EF 400mm f 2 8L USM EF 28 105mm 3 5 4 5 II USM Extender EF 2x EF 400mm f 5 6L USM EF 400mm 12 6 1LUSM EF 28 135mm f 3 5 5 6 IS USM Extender EF 2x EF 500mm f 4 5L USM EF 400mm f 2 8L IS USM Jer 28 200mm 3 5 5 6 Extender EF 2x EF 300mm f 4L USM EF 400mm 2 8L IS Il USM Extender EF 1 4x Extender EF 2x EF 28 200mm 3 5 5 6 USM EF 300mm f 4L IS USM EF 500mm f 4L IS II USM Extender EF 1 4x Extender EF 1 4x EF 28 300mm 3 5 5 6L IS USM EF 400mm f 4DOISUSM EF 600mm f 4L IS II USM Extender EF 1 4x Extender EF 1 4x EF 35 105mm f 3 5 4 5 EF 500mm f 4L IS USM eee EF 20 35mm f 3 5 4 5 USM EF 35 135mm 3 5 4 5 EF 600mm f 4L USM Se eb aes EF 24 85mm f 3 5 4 5 USM _ EF 35 135mm 4 5 6 USM EF 600mm f 4L IS USM FE aotm TH i gt EF 28 90mm f 4 5 6 EF 38 76mm f 4 5 5 6 EF 200mm 1 2 81 USM EF 28 90mm f 4 5 6 USM EF 50 200mm 3 5 4 5 Extender EF 2x EF 200mm f 2 8L II USM LER EF 28 90mm f 4 5 6 Il EF 50 200mm f 3 5 4 5L EFS 00mm 128S Uo EF 28 90mm f 4 5 6 II USM EF 55 200mm f 4 5 5 6 USM Extender EF 2x EF 300mm f 2 8L IS USM JEF 28 90mm f 4 5 6 III EF 55 200mm f 4 5 5 6 II USM Extender EF 2x 82 Lenses and Usable AF Points EF 70 200mm f 2 8L USM Extender EF 2x EF 70 300mm f 4 5 5 6 DO IS USM EF 80 200mm f 4 5 5 6 EF 70 200mm f 2 8L IS USM Extender EF 2x EF 75 300mm 4 5 6
95. 2 copies Print Printing Effect Description The image will be printed according to the printer s standard colors MOn The image s Exif data is used to make automatic corrections Moff No automatic correction will be applied F3VIVID The image will be printed with higher saturation to produce more vivid blues and greens AJNR Image noise is reduced before printing B W B W Prints in black and white with true blacks B W Cool tone Prints in black and white with cool bluish blacks B W Warm tone Prints in black and white with warm yellowish blacks Prints the image in the actual colors and contrast No Natural automatic color adjustments are applied The printing characteristics are the same as the Natural setting However Natural M this setting enables finer printing adjustments than with Natural FalDefault The printing will differ depending on the printer For details refer to the printer s instruction manual When you change the printing effects it is reflected in the image displayed on the upper left Note that the printed image may look slightly different from the displayed image which is only an approximation This also applies to Brightness and Adjust levels on page 302 e shooting information of an image shot at the H1 or speed is O iin hooting infi ti fan i hot at the H1 or H2 ISO di imprinted the correct ISO speed
96. 286 Ci Resize memm You can resize an image to make the pixel count lower and save it as a new image Resizing an image is possible only with JPEG L M S1 S2 images JPEG 3 and RAW images cannot be resized O Ar Mey 1 Select Resize Resize e Under the gt 2 tab select Resize Hating then press lt gt Slide show s Image transfer gt The Images will be displayed Image jump w 2 Select an image e Turn the lt gt dial to select the image you want to resize e If you press the lt Q gt button and turn the lt gt dial counterclockwise you can select an image from the index display 3 Select the desired image size e Press lt gt to display the image sizes gt Turn the lt gt dial to select the 9 8M 3840x2560 desired image size then press lt gt M S1 SZ A Save the image Select OK to save the resized image Check the destination folder and image file number then select OK Save as new file Cancel Ok e To resize another image repeat steps 2 to 4 e Press the lt MENU gt button to return to the menu 287 E5 Resize Resize Options According to Original Image Size Original Image Size Available Resize Settings M si 2 3 L O O O O M O O O S1 O O 2 O About Image Sizes The image size displayed in step 3 on the preceding page such as M waeey has a 3 2 aspect ratio The image size according
97. 4 DO IS USM EF 300mm 2 8LISUSM IEF 28 80mm f 2 8 4L USM EF 500mm f 4L IS USM A e TS USM EF 70 210mm f 4 EF 500mm f 4L IS II USM Sead SS EF 70 200mm f 4L USM EF 600mm f 4L USM pa Laas USM EF 70 200mm f 4L IS USM ercommvaisusn tn 2a USN voz US a eucH nani OEM EF 400mm 2 8L IS II USM EF 70 200mm 7 2 8L IS USM Extender EF 1 4x Extender EF 1 4x TS E 17mm f 4L EF 135mm f 2L USM Extender EF 2x EF 70 200mm f 2 8L IS II USM Extender EF 1 4x Manual focus without tilt shift Group D Autofocusing with 61 points is possible All of the AF area selection modes are selectable EF 28mm 2 8 W Dual cross type AF point Subject tracking is superior and the focusing precision is higher than with other AF points Cross type AF point Subject tracking is superior and high precision focusing is achieved lines AF points sensitive to horizontal 81 Lenses and Usable AF Points Group E Autofocusing with 61 points is possible All of the AF area selection modes are selectable ET E Cross type AF point Subject tracking is superior and high precision focusing is achieved U1 AF points sensitive to horizontal lines EF 50mm 72 5 Compact EF 3
98. 41 MA Correcting the Brightness and Contrast Automatically m If the image comes out dark or the contrast is low the brightness and contrast can be corrected automatically This function is called Auto Lighting Optimizer The default setting is Standard With JPEG images the correction is applied when the image is captured Standard is automatically set in the lt J gt mode wiek 1 Select Auto Lighting Optimizer Expo comp AEB 3 2 1 1 283 e Under the I2 tab select Auto ISO speed settings ae Auto Lighting Optimizer El Lighting Optimizer then press White balance Awe lt B gt Custom White Balance Auto Lighting Optimizer Select the setting Standard Turn the lt gt gt dial to select the A e E E desired setting then press lt gt INFO VY Disable during man expo 3 Take the picture The image will be recorded with the brightness and contrast corrected if necessary Q e If 3 Highlight tone priority is set to Enable the Auto Lighting Optimizer will be set automatically to Disable and the setting cannot be changed Depending on the shooting conditions noise may increase lfasetting other than Disable is set and you use exposure compensation or flash exposure compensation to darken the exposure the image may still come out bright If you want a darker exposure set this to Disable Ifthe HDR mode p 173 or multiple exposure shooting p 177 is set the
99. 7 will not work in this case e Pressing the shutter button halfway does not focus the subject If the focus mode switch on the lens is set to lt MF gt Manual Focus set it to lt AF gt Autofocus 65 Gy Fully Automatic Shooting Scene Intelligent Auto a ee ee eee eS e The shutter speed display is blinking Since it is too dark taking the picture may result in a blurred subject due to camera shake Using a tripod or a Canon EX series Speedlite p 188 sold separately is recommended When flash was used the bottom part of the picture came out unnaturally dark If a hood is attached to the lens it can obstruct the flash coverage If the subject is close detach the hood before taking the picture with flash 66 AF Full Auto Techniques Scene Intelligent Auto Recomposing the Shot Depending on the scene position the subject toward the left or right to create a balanced background and good perspective In the lt J gt mode while you press the shutter button halfway to focus a still subject the focus will be locked You can then recompose the shot and press the shutter button completely to take the picture This is called focus lock Shooting a Moving Subject In the lt J gt mode if the subject moves distance to camera changes while or after you focus Al Servo AF will take effect to focus the subject continuously As long as the Area AF frame covers the subject while you press the shut
100. A White balance fp gt The custom white balance selection Custom White Balance screen will appear WB Shift Bkt 0 0 0 Import the white balance data Turn the lt gt dial to select the image captured in step 1 then press lt gt gt On the dialog screen that appears select OK and the data will be imported When the menu reappears press the lt MENU gt button to exit the menu A Press the lt WB gt button 66 5 Select the custom white balance Look at the LCD panel and turn the lt gt dial to select lt s gt WB Setting the White Balance 8a SS Si Q f the exposure obtained in step 1 differs greatly from the standard exposure a correct white balance may not be obtained e In step 3 the following images cannot be selected images captured while the Picture Style was set to Monochrome multiple exposure images and images taken with another camera F Instead of a white object an 18 gray card commercially available can produce a more accurate white balance The personal white balance registered with the provided software will be registered under lt 4 gt If you execute step 3 the data for the registered personal white balance will be erased E3 Setting the Color Temperature You can set the white balance s color temperature numerically in kelvins This is for advanced users O a o e A 41 Select White balance ones SHOOT2
101. AF characteristics during Al Servo AF 2 In step 3 on page 321 if you press the lt INFO gt Switch to registered AF func button the Switch to registered AF func setting screen will appear Turn the lt gt or lt gt dial to select the parameter to be registered then press lt gt to append a checkmark lt v gt When you AF area selection mode lt v Tracking sensitivity Accel decel tracking AF pt auto switching select a parameter and press lt gt you can set Servo 1st img priority the parameter yo Servo 2nd img priority By pressing the lt 1 gt button you can revert the EB Default set settings to their defaults wr ONE SHOT Al SERVO You can switch the AF mode In One Shot AF mode when you hold down the button to which this function is assigned the camera switches to Al Servo AF mode In the Al Servo AF mode the camera switches to One Shot AF mode only while you hold down the button Convenient when you need to keep switching between One Shot AF and Al Servo AF for a subject that keeps moving and stopping 325 9 2 Custom Controls at Switch to registered AF point During metering when you press the button assigned to this function the camera will switch to the AF point registered on page 324 3 In step 3 on page 321 when you press the lt INFO gt button you can select Switch only when btn is held or Switch each time btn is pressed AF point direct selection D
102. CK gt switch is set to the right the lt gt dial will be locked e Even if the lt gt dial is appended with a lt v gt checkmark you can still use the touch pad lt gt Custom Controls You can assign often used functions to camera buttons or dials according to your preferences For details see page 321 319 CEM Custom Function Settings SS SEE C Fn3 Others Add cropping information If you set cropping information vertical lines for the aspect ratio you have set will appear on the Live View image You can then compose the shot as if you were shooting with a medium or large format camera 6x6 cm 4x5 inch etc When you take a picture the aspect ratio information for cropping the image with the provided software will be appended to the image The image is recorded to the card without being cropped After the image is transferred to a personal computer you can use Digital Photo Professional provided software p 390 to easily crop the image to the aspect ratio that was set OFF Off 6 7 Aspect ratio 6 7 6 6 Aspect ratio 6 6 5 6 Aspect ratio 10 12 3 4 Aspect ratio 3 4 5 7 Aspect ratio 5 7 4 5 Aspect ratio 4 5 Q e If 4 Aspect ratio is not set to 3 2 you cannot add cropping information to the image f cropping information has been added to a image the image cannot be cropped with the camera s RAW image processing Default Erase option During image playback and im
103. Click Easy Installation to start installation Canon EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk Follow the on screen instructions to complete the installation procedure 5 Click Finish when the installation has completed 6 Remove the CD 391 Software Start Guide B I Installing the Software on Macintosh Compatible OS MAC OS X 10 6 10 7 1 Check that the camera is not connected to your computer 2 Insert the EOS Solution Disk CD On your computer s desktop double click and open the CD ROM icon and then double click Canon EOS Digital Installer 3 Select your geographic area country and language 4 Click Easy Installation to start installation Canon EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk Follow the on screen instructions to complete the installation procedure 5 Click Restart when the installation has completed 6 Once the computer has restarted remove the CD 392 Software Start Guide WINDOWS S EOS Software Instruction Manuals Disk Copy the PDF Instruction Manuals contained on the disk to your computer 1 Insert the EOS Software Instruction Manuals Disk CD into the CD ROM drive of your computer 2 Open the disk e Double click My Computer on the desktop and then double click the CD ROM drive into which you have inserted the disk Select your language and operating system The index of the Instruction Manuals is displayed Q Adobe Reader latest version recommended must be installed
104. EJ This function is called rating Set ratings with the lt RATE gt Button Select an image or movie e During image playback turn the lt gt dial to select an image or movie to be rated e You can also select an image or movie on the index display p 249 Rate the image or movie e Each time you press the lt RATE gt button the rating mark will change C E 04 0 1 E None To rate another image or movie repeat steps 1 and 2 ir e If 3 btn function is set to Protect change it to Rating e If you press the lt Q gt button when Rating is selected in Y 3 btn function you can set the rating marks that can be selected when you press the lt RATE gt button Set ratings with the menu 1 Select Rating Resize e Under the gt 2 tab select Rating RES then press lt gt Slide show Image transfer Image jump w s 255 Setting Ratings 2 Select an image or movie Turn the lt gt dial to select the image or movie to be rated If you press the lt Q gt button and turn the lt s7 gt dial counterclockwise you can select an image or movie from a three image display To return to the single image display turn the lt 5 gt dial clockwise 3 Rate the image or movie Pressing lt gt will turn off the Sil icon Turn the lt gt dial to select a rating gt The total number of images and movies rated will be counted for each rating
105. F Under 2 ISO speed settings even if ISO speed range or Min shutter spd is changed from the default setting safety shift will override it if a standard exposure cannot be obtained The minimum and maximum ISO speeds of the safety shift using the ISO speed will be determined by the Auto ISO range setting p 127 However if the manually set ISO speed exceeds the Auto ISO range the safety shift will take effect up to the manually set ISO speed e If Shutter speed Aperture or ISO speed is set safety shift will take effect if necessary even when flash is used 317 CEM Custom Function Settings SS O C Fn2 Display Operation LET iliatersm Mimacniuiite ste When any of the following functions are set the lt gt icon can be displayed on the viewfinder s bottom right p 23 Select the function for which you want the warning icon to appear press lt gt to append a lt V gt then select OK When monochrome 2M is set If the Picture Style is set to Monochrome p 131 the warning icon will appear When WB is corrected If white balance correction p 140 is set the warning icon will appear When one touch image quality is set If you change the image recording quality with the one touch image quality function p 328 the warning icon will appear When ISO expansion is used If the ISO speed is set manually to L 50 H1 51200 or H2 102400 p 125 the warning icon will appear When spot mete
106. For other flash modes refer to the Speedlite s instruction manual 193 MEW Setting the Flash i a SS e Wireless functions Whales Tinclone Wireless multiple flash shooting is possible with radio or optical Wireless Off transmission For details on wireless OFF M a flash refer to the Speedlite s instruction manual e Flash zoom Flash coverage Fisch soon With Speedlites having a zooming flash Aue head you can set the flash coverage AUTO 20 24 28 35 50 Normally set this to AUTO so that the 70 80 105 135 200 camera will automatically set the flash coverage to match the lens focal length e Shutter synchronization Shutter synchronization Normally set this to First curtain synchronization so that the flash fires First curtain synchronization immediately after the exposure starts gt gt E If Second curtain synchronization is set the flash will fire right before the shutter closes When this is combined with a slow shutter speed you can create a trail of light such as from car headlights at night With Second curtain synchronization two flashes will be fired Once when you press the shutter button completely and once immediately before the exposure ends If High speed synchronization is set the flash can be used at all shutter speeds This is especially effective for portraits using fill flash when you want to give priority to the aperture setting 194 MM Setting the Flash i a a es
107. IPA Approx 950 shots at 23 C 73 F approx 850 shots at testing standards 0 C 32 F With Live View shooting Approx 200 shots at 23 C 73 F approx 180 shots at 0 C 32 F Movie shooting time Approx 1 hr 30 min at 23 C 73 F Approx 1 hr 20 min at 0 C 32 F with fully charged Battery Pack LP E6 Date Time battery CR1616 lithium battery Quantity 1 e Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D Approx 152 0 x 116 4 x 76 4 mm 6 0 x 4 6 x 3 0 in Weight Approx 950 g 33 5 oz CIPA Guidelines Approx 860 g 30 3 oz Body only e Operation Environment Working temperature range 0 C 40 C 32 F 104 F Working humidity 85 or less e Battery Pack LP E6 Type Rechargeable lithium ion battery Rated voltage 7 2VDC Battery capacity 1800 mAh Dimensions W x H x D Approx 38 4 x 21 0 x 56 8 mm 1 5 x 0 8 x 2 2 in Weight Approx 80 g 2 8 oz 379 Specifications E f e Battery Charger LC E6 Compatible battery Recharging time Rated input Rated output Working temperature range Working humidity Battery Pack LP E6 Approx 2 hr 30 min 100 240 V AC 50 60 Hz 8 4VDC 1 2A 5 C 40 C 41 F 104 F 85 or less Dimensions W x H x D Approx 69 0 x 33 0 x 93 0 mm 2 7 x 1 3 x 3 7 in Weight Approx 130 g 4 6 oz e Battery Charger LC E6E Compatible battery Power cord length Recharging time Rated input Rated output Working temperature range
108. IPB Compresses multiple frames at a time efficiently for recording Since the file size will be smaller than with ALL I you can shoot longer Alt ALL I l only Compresses one frame at a time for recording Although the file size will be bigger than with IPB the movie will be more suited for editing 231 MM Setting the Movie Recording Size SS se Total Movie Recording Time and File Size Per Minute Movie Recording Total Recording Time approx File Size Size 4GB Card 8 GB Card 16 GB Card approx To Was D PB 16 min 32 min 1hr 4min 235 MB min iio o Was Wag A 5 min 11 min 22 min 685 MB min 60 50 IPB 18 min 37 min 1 hr 14 min 205 MB min o 60 50 ALL 6 min 12 min 25 min 610 MB min 64o 130 I5 IPB 48 min 1 hr 37 min 3 hr 14 min 78 MB min e About Movies Exceeding 4 GB Even if you shoot a movie exceeding 4 GB you can keep shooting without interruption Approx 30 sec before the movie reaches the 4 GB file size the elapsed shooting time or time code displayed in the movie shooting image will start blinking If you keep shooting the movie and the file size exceeds 4 GB a new movie file will be created automatically and the elapsed shooting time or time code will stop blinking When you play back the movie you will have to play the individual movie files Movie files cannot pl
109. M B shooting modes you can select the shutter speed aperture and other camera settings to change the exposure and obtain the desired result e AX icon at the upper right of a page title indicates that the function can be used when the Mode Dial is set to lt P Tv Av M B gt The function cannot be used in the lt 3 gt mode e After you press the shutter button halfway and let go the exposure values will remain displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel for 4 sec 4 e For the functions settable in each shooting mode see page 346 Lock Set the lt LOCK gt switch to the left aD P Program AE m The camera automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture to suit the subject s brightness This is called Program AE lt P gt stands for Program AE stands for autoexposure 1 Set the Mode Dial to lt P gt EP ST Focus the subject Look through the viewfinder and aim the AF point over the subject Then press the shutter button halfway gt When focus is achieved the focus confirmation light lt gt on the viewfinder s bottom right will light up In One Shot AF mode gt The shutter speed and aperture will be set automatically and displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel pantaiso Ele 3 Check the display e A standard exposure will be obtained as long as the shutter speed and aperture display do not blink Take the picture Compose th
110. MaM Fine Adjustment of AF s Point of Focus ma Fine adjustment of the AF s point of focus is possible for viewfinder shooting and Live View shooting in the Quick mode This is called AF Microadjustment Before making the adjustment read Notes for AF Microadjustment on page 109 Normally this adjustment is not required Do this adjustment only if necessary Note that doing this adjustment may prevent correct focusing from being achieved Adjust All by Same Amount Set the adjustment manually by adjusting shooting and checking the result Repeat this until the desired adjustment is made During AF regardless of the lens used the point of focus will always be shifted by the adjustment amount OMFG 9 1 Select AF Microadjustment ia ma Under the AF5 tab select AF Manual AF pt selec pattern AF point display during focus Microadjustment then press lt gt VF display illumination AF Microadjustment AF Microadjustment E 2 Select All by same amount Adjust focus for all lenses by e Turn the lt gt dial to select All by the same adjustment amount same amount Disable All by same amount Adjust by lens INFO KARETA Clear all 3 Press the lt INFO gt button gt The All by same amount screen will appear 104 TET Fine Adjustment of AF s Point of Focus as SS I AF Microadjustment A Make the adjustment All by same amount e Turn the lt gt dial to make the
111. Movies edited with a personal computer cannot be played with the camera When the movie is played camera operation noise can be heard e If you operate the camera s dials or lens during movie shooting the operation noise will also be recorded Use an external microphone commercially available p 235 The movie has still moments e During autoexposure movie shooting if there is a drastic change in the exposure level the recording will stop momentarily until the brightness stabilizes If this happens shoot with lt M gt shooting mode p 223 368 Troubleshooting Guide No image appears on the TV screen e Use the stereo AV cable that came with the camera p 271 e Make sure the stereo AV cable or HDMI cable s plug is inserted all the way in p 268 271 Set the video OUT system NTSC PAL to the same video system as the TV set p 271 There are multiple movie files for a single movie shoot e Ifthe movie file size reaches 4 GB another movie file will be created automatically p 232 My card reader does not recognize the card e If you format a card of 128 GB or higher with this camera it will be formatted in exFAT This means that some card readers and computer operating systems might not recognize the card properly In such a case connect your camera to the computer with the provided interface cable then transfer the images to your computer using EOS Utility provided software p 390 cannot proces
112. Press the lt Q gt button gt The magnified view will appear The magnified area and 15 Q will be displayed on the lower right of the screen The image magnification increases F e as you turn the lt gt dial clockwise You can magnify the image up to 10x The image magnification decreases as you turn the lt s gt dial counterclockwise Turning the dial further will display the index display p 249 C Magnified area position 2 Scroll around the image Use lt lt gt to scroll around the magnified image To exit the magnified view press the lt Q gt button or lt gt gt button and the single image display will return O Bo noj gt F In magnified view you can turn the lt gt dial to view another image at the same magnification The image can be magnified also during the image review immediately after shooting e A movie cannot be magnified 251 Q Magnified View uam Magnification Settings Magnificatn apx Under the gt 3 tab when you select 1x no magnification Magnificatn apx you can set the 2x magnify from center starting magnification and initial position 4x magnify from center AN s for the magnified view 8x magnify from center 10x magnify from center Actual size from selected pt Same as last magnif from ctr 1x no magnification The image will not be magnified The magnified view will start with the single image dis
113. Q gt buttons on the camera back and the lt gt lt 3 gt dials lt MENU gt button Le ot UA GE Di Sarm LCD monitor 2 Z lt gt Main Dial lt Q gt button sag a aa lg Quiek Control lt gt button 4S Mode Menu Screen ao oF Image quality Image review bd SHOOT1 2 sec Beep Enable Release shutter without card Lens aberration correction ON Some menu tabs and menu items are not displayed in the lt E gt mode P Tv Av M B Mode Menu Screen Set up Q Custom Functions XK My Menu Main tabs O Shooting Secondary tabs Menu items SHOOT1 Image quality Image review Beep 2 sec Enable ON Release shutter without card Lens aberration correction External Speedlite control Mirror lockup Menu settings 51 TEM Menu Operations SS SS Menu Setting Procedure E a ME 1 Display the menu screen Image quality e Press the lt MENU gt button to display Image review 2 sec Beep Enable the menu screen Release shutter without card 2 Select a tab Lens aberration correction External Speedlite control e Each time you press the lt Q gt button Mirror lockup the main tab will switch e Turn the lt gt dial to select a secondary tab For example the t 84 tab refers to the screen displayed when the 3 Shooting tab s fourth dot from the left is selected Oar ak 3 Select the desired item ans SHOOTA L
114. Quality on page 215 Playback and TV connection e In autoexposure shooting shutter priority AE or aperture priority AE modes if the brightness changes during movie shooting the movie may freeze temporarily In such cases shoot movies with manual exposure e If you connect the camera to a TV set p 268 271 and shoot a movie the TV will not output any sound during the shooting However the sound will be properly recorded 242 Image Playback This chapter explains how to play back and erase photos and movies how to display them on a TV screen and other playback related functions About images taken with another camera The camera may not be able to properly display images captured with a different camera or edited with a computer or whose file name was changed gt Image Playback mum Single lmage Display Play back the image Press the lt gt gt button gt The last captured image or last image viewed will appear Select an image e To play back images starting with the last image turn the lt gt dial counterclockwise To play back images starting with the first captured image turn the dial clockwise e Each time you press the lt INFO gt button the display format will change 125 80 B 12 100 0003 i 125 80 B 12 4 100 0003 Li ye He po 4 400 D K G1 35 3 0 0 0 RAW IE R 4 sRGB 3 24 28 02 2012 13 30 00 Histogram
115. Quick Control for Shooting Functions Settable Functions on Quick Control Screen Auto Lighting Aperture p 164 Optimizer p 142 Shutter speed p 162 AE lock p 171 Highlight tone priority p 146 Shooting mode p 24 E MM TAPAM aN EM SPLICE ISO speed p 124 Exposure compensation Bey a cue St S Custom Controls p 321 AEB setting p 169 170 gt Ged Picture Style p 129 Image recording quality AF mode p 70 e nn p 119 Recording function Card selection p 116 Flash exposure compensation p 188 Drive mode p 112 White balance p 137 Metering mode p 167 White balance correction p 140 Fl Asterisked functions cannot be set with the Quick Control screen Function Setting Screen Select the desired function and press lt gt The function s setting screen will appear Turn the lt gt or lt gt dial to change the setting There are also functions that are set by pressing the lt INFO gt button e Press lt gt to finalize the setting and return to the Quick Control screen B When you select lt a gt Custom 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 Controls p 321 and press the z lt MENU gt button the shooting settings display will reappear Tv 1 125 E AUTO Flash exposure comp 50 mm Menu Operations mE With menus you can set various functions such as the image recording quality date time etc While looking at the LCD monitor use the lt MENU gt and lt
116. Single and continuous drive modes are provided 1 Press the lt AF DRIVE gt button 6 2 Select the drive mode While looking at the LCD panel turn the lt gt dial O Single shooting When you press the shutter button completely only one shot will be taken CH High speed continuous shooting Max approx 6 shots sec i Low speed continuous shooting Max approx 3 shots sec While you hold down the shutter button completely shots will be taken continuously g Silent single shooting The shooting sound for single shooting is quieter than lt L gt Silent continuous shooting Max approx 3 shots sec The shooting sound for continuous shooting is quieter than lt 81 gt io wn 10 sec self timer Remote control 2 2 sec self timer Remote control For self timer shooting see the next page For remote control shooting see page 186 Ge 112 amp Using the Self timer M ee eee Q e if lt OS gt or lt QiS gt is set the time lag from when you press the shutter button completely until the picture is taken will be longer than normal When the battery level is low the continuous shooting speed may become slightly slower e Syn The maximum continuous shooting speed of approx 6 shots sec is attained under the following conditions At 1 500 sec or faster shutter speed and at the maximum aperture varies depending on the lens The continuous shooting speed may be slower depe
117. The display can be switched with 3 Histogram disp Brightness Display Sample Histograms This histogram is a graph showing the distribution of the image s brightness level The horizontal axis indicates the brightness level eg darker on the left and brighter on the right Dark image while the vertical axis indicates how many pixels exist for each brightness level The more pixels there are toward the left the darker the image And the more pixels there are toward the right the brighter the image If there are too many pixels on the left the shadow detail will be lost And if there are too many pixels on the Bright image right the highlight detail will be lost The gradation in between will be reproduced By checking the image and its brightness histogram you can see the exposure level inclination and the overall gradation RGB Display This histogram is a graph showing the distribution of each primary color s brightness level in the image RGB or red green and blue The horizontal axis indicates the color s brightness level darker on the left and brighter on the right while the vertical axis indicates how many pixels exist for each color brightness level The more pixels there are toward the left the darker and less prominent the color And the more pixels there are toward the right the brighter and denser the color If there are too many pixels on the left the respective color information will be lacking And if
118. Under the 1 tab select Format File numbering Continuous card then press lt gt File name g f O a Fo x 1 Select Format card Auto rotate Ono Format card 2 Select the card e LJ is the CF card and B is the SD card Turn the lt gt dial to select the card then press lt gt Format card i 3 Select OK Format card1 e Select OK then press lt gt Brea WU pe fost gt The card will be formatted 7 76 GB used 7 81 a gt When the formatting is completed the menu will reappear Cancel 7 76 GB used e When B is selected low level Row eve orn formatting is possible p 54 cancel For low level formatting press the lt T gt button to append Low level format with a lt V gt checkmark then select OK 53 Before You Start yy 29 Format the card in the following cases The card is new e The card was formatted by a different camera or a computer e The card is full with images or data e Acard related error is displayed p 371 About Low level Formatting e Do low level formatting if the SD card s recording or reading speed seems slow or if you want to totally erase all data in the card Since low level formatting will erase all recordable sectors in the SD card the formatting will take slightly longer than normal formatting e You can stop the low level formatting by selecting Cancel Even in this case normal formatting will be completed and
119. V func Live View shoot Enable e Turn the lt gt dial to select the item AF mode Live mode then press lt B gt Grid display off LQ x 4 Select the setting Turn the lt gt dial to select the omode vamo desired setting b amp Live mode RER 7 Quick mode The current setting is indicated in blue O42 A x 5 Set the desired setting ass SHOOTA LV func Live View shoot Enable Press lt gt to set it AF mode X Live mode Grid display Off 6 Exit the setting eine TAM Press the lt MENU gt button to exit the Silent LV shoot Mode 1 menu and return to shooting ready Metering timer 16 sec F The explanation of menu functions hereinafter assumes that you have pressed the lt MENU gt button to display the menu screen e You can also use lt lt 3 gt to set menu settings Except gt 1 Erase images and 1 Format card e To cancel press the lt MENU gt button e For details about each menu item see page 348 52 Before You Start memm Formatting the Card If the card is new or was previously formatted by another camera or computer format the card with the camera Q When the card is formatted all images and data in the card will be erased As even protected images will be erased make sure there is nothing you need to keep If necessary transfer the images to a personal computer etc before formatting the card m SET UPI Record func card folder sel
120. WOuUeD S SOS Hew TVANVIN NOILONULSNI Canon EOS 52 Mark Ill v Jayn sna The Software Start Guide is included at the end of this manual Markill ENGLISH INSTRUCTION MANUAL Introduction me The EOS 5D Mark III is a high performance digital single lens reflex camera featuring a fine detail full frame approx 36 x 24 mm CMOS sensor with approx 22 3 effective megapixels DIGIC 5 approx 100 viewfinder coverage high precision and high speed 61 point AF approx 6 fps continuous shooting Live View shooting and Full High Definition Full HD movie shooting The camera is highly responsive to any shooting situation at any time provides many features for demanding shots and expands shooting possibilities with system accessories Refer to This Manual while Using the Camera to Further Familiarize Yourself with the Camera With a digital camera you can immediately view the image you have captured While reading this manual take a few test shots and see how they come out You can then better understand the camera To avoid botched pictures and accidents first read the Safety Warnings p 383 384 and Handling Precautions p 14 15 Testing the Camera Before Use and Liability After shooting play images back and check whether they have been properly recorded If the camera or memory card is faulty and the images cannot be recorded or downloaded to a computer Canon cannot be held liable
121. achieving focus instead of the continuous shooting speed The picture is not taken until focus is achieved Effective when you want to achieve focus before capturing the shot 95 CEM Customizing AF Functions eee a AF3 One Shot USM lens electronic MF For the lenses below which have an electronic focusing ring you can set whether to use the electronic focusing ring EF 50mm f 1 0L USM EF 300mm f 2 8L USM EF 600mm f 4L USM EF 85mm f 1 2L USM EF 400mm f 2 8L USM EF 1200mm f 5 6L USM EF 85mm f 1 2L II USM EF 400mm f 2 8L II USM EF 28 80mm f 2 8 4L USM EF 200mm f 1 8L USM __ EF 500mm f 4 5L USM USM lens electronic MF gt on Enable after One Shot AF Enable after One Shot AF___ m After AF operates if you keep pressing Disable after One Shot AF or Disable In AF mode OFF the shutter button you can focus manually Takes effect with lenses that or Disable after One Shot AF have electronic focus rings i CE Help After AF operates manual focusing is disabled OFF Disable in AF mode When the lens focus mode switch is set to AF manual focusing is disabled 96 EM Customizing AF Functions is eS Ss 8 ee il AF assist beam firing Enables or disables the EOS dedicated Speedlite s AF assist beam AF assist beam firing ON Enable Enable ON The external Speedlite emits the AF Disable OFF ARE Bean IR assist beam when necessary OFF Disable Specify AF assist beam
122. age review after image capture when you press the lt j gt button the erase menu appears p 277 You can set which option Cancel or Erase is to be preselected on this screen If Erase is set you can just press lt 6 gt to quickly erase the image Te Cancel selected T Erase selected Q If Erase is set be careful not to erase an image accidentally 2 2 Custom Controls mx You can assign frequently used functions to camera buttons or dials according to your preferences 1 Select 4 2 Custom Controls C Fn2 Disp Operation a ye e Under the 2 tab select Custom LV shooting area display Controls then press lt gt Dial direction during Tv Av y Multi function lock gt The Custom Controls screen will Custom Controls appear Custom Controls 2 Select a camera button or dial Shutter butt half press Turn the lt gt dial to select a button or dial then press lt gt gt The name of the camera control and the assignable functions will be a o LENS Bi A A GE Default set displayed C N Shutter butt half press 3 Assign a function Select the function to assign Turn the lt gt dial to select the Metering start desired function then press lt gt Sr O x e If the MZ icon appears on the bottom left you can press the lt INFO gt button and set other related options p 324 330 Select the desired option on the screen displayed then press lt gt
123. al brightness exposure of the resulting image If you set exposure compensation the image brightness will change accordingly During E3 Normally the image is displayed at the standard brightness to make the Live View image easy to see The image will be displayed close to the actual brightness exposure of the resulting image only while you hold down the depth of field preview button e Disable EHR The image is displayed at the standard brightness to make the Live View image easy to see Even if you set exposure compensation image is displayed at the standard brightness F e f you set an expanded ISO speed setting as Maximum in ISO speed range Live View shooting will be possible under darker conditions e Even if a low ISO speed is set noise may be noticeable in the displayed Live View image under low light However when you shoot the image recorded will have minimal noise The image quality of the Live View image is different from that of the recorded image 205 EM Menu Function Settings a a a e Silent LV shooting e Mode 1 The shooting operation noise is quieter than with normal shooting Continuous shooting is also possible If lt Glyy gt is set you can shoot at a maximum continuous shooting speed of approx 6 fps Mode 2 When the shutter button is pressed completely only one shot will be taken While you keep holding down the shutter button the camera operation will be suspended Then when you return
124. al number and you can register multiple battery packs to the camera When you use this feature you can check the registered battery pack s remaining capacity and operation history Select Battery info Under the 3 tab select Battery info then press lt gt gt The battery info screen will appear SET UP3 Battery position Battery model or household power source Battery info being used Ca P E6 The battery level icon p 35 is displayed Remaining cap together with the remaining battery capacity Shutter count shown in 1 increments Recharge performance _Shots taken with the current battery The number is reset when the battery is recharged 5 _ Battery s recharge performance level is displayed in one of three levels HBG Green Battery s recharge performance is fine DEO Green Battery s recharge performance is slightly degraded HOO Red Purchasing a new battery is recommended Q The use of a genuine Canon Battery Pack LP E6 is recommended If you use any battery other than the Battery Pack LP E6 the camera s full performance may not be attained or malfunction may result F The shutter count is the number of still photos taken Movies are not counted e The battery information will also be displayed when a LP E6 battery pack is in the Battery Grip BG E11 If you use size AA LR6 batteries only the battery level indicator will be displayed f for some r
125. ally protect them Erasing a RAW JPEG image will erase both the RAW and JPEG images Erasing a Single Image 1 Play back the image to be erased 2 Press the lt j gt button gt The Erase menu will appear at the bottom of the screen Erase the image e Turn the lt gt dial to select Erase then press lt gt The image displayed will be erased Erase F When you set 4 3 Default Erase option to Erase selected you can erase images quicker p 320 Checkmarking lt v gt Images to be Erased in a Batch By appending lt V gt checkmarks to the images to be erased you can erase multiple images at one time O a y o 1 Select Erase images Protect images e Under the L 11 tab select Erase increas images then press lt gt Erase images Print order Image copy 277 h Erasing Images TiErase images i 2 Select Select and erase images Select and erase images Select Select and erase images gt then press lt gt gt The images will be displayed f you press the lt Q gt button and turn the lt gt dial counterclockwise you can select an image from a three image display To return to the single image display turn the lt gt dial clockwise 3 Select the images to be erased a Turn the lt gt dial to select the e ao 3 d image to be erased then press 5 lt gt gt A lt V gt checkmark will be displayed on the upper left To se
126. amera cannot be used with printers compatible only with CP Direct or Bubble Jet Direct e Do not use any interface cable other than the one provided If there is a long beeping sound in step 5 it indicates a problem with the printer Resolve the problem displayed by the error message p 304 e Printing is not possible in the HDR mode F e You can also print RAW images taken with this camera e f you use a battery pack to power the camera make sure it is fully charged With a fully charged battery printing up to approx 4 hours is possible Before disconnecting the cable first turn off the camera and printer Hold the plug not the cord to pull out the cable e For direct printing using AC Adapter Kit ACK E6 sold separately to power the camera is recommended 297 AC Printing m The screen display and setting options will differ depending on the printer Some settings may not be available For details refer to the printer s instruction manual Printer connected icon 1 Select the image to be printed Check that the lt gt icon is displayed on the upper left of the LCD Ee monitor Turn the lt gt dial to select the image to be printed Press lt gt gt The print settings screen will appear Print setting screen wa BaDefault es dl Off or off By 1 copies Sets the quantity to be printed Trimming Sets the trimming cropping p 303 9 9x13cm Paper settings Sets the paper size
127. and shoot while viewing the LCD monitor camera shake can cause blurred images Using a tripod is recommended F About Remote Live View Shooting With EOS Utility provided software p 390 installed in your computer you can connect the camera to the computer and shoot remotely while viewing the computer screen For details refer to the PDF Software Instruction Manual p 393 on the CD ROM C3 Shooting with the LCD Monitor mas Set the Live View shooting Movie shooting switch to lt g gt gt 2 Display the Live View image Press the lt gt button gt The Live View image will appear on the LCD monitor The Live View image will closely reflect the brightness level of the actual image you capture ban 3 Focus the subject When you press the shutter button halfway the camera will focus with the current AF mode p 207 4 Take the picture gt Press the shutter button completely gt The picture will be taken and the captured image is displayed on the LCD monitor gt After the image review ends the camera will return to Live View shooting automatically Press the lt gt button to end the Live View shooting F The image s field of view is approx 100 when the image recording quality is set to JPEG L The metering mode will be fixed to evaluative metering for Live View shooting e Inthe lt P Tv Av M B gt shooting modes you can check the depth of
128. anon office please refer to your warranty card or to www canon europe com Support The product and associated warranty are provided in European countries by Canon Europa N V This Instruction Manual booklet is current as of January 2012 For information on the camera s compatibility with any accessories and lenses introduced after this date contact any Canon Service Center CEL SS5MA210 CANON INC 2012 PRINTED IN THE EU
129. aper has any pattern or design it may be recognized as dust data and affect the accuracy of the dust deletion with the software 292 1 Manual Sensor Cleaning ma Dust that could not be removed by the automatic sensor cleaning can be removed manually with a blower etc Before cleaning the sensor detach the lens from the camera The surface of the image sensor is extremely delicate If the sensor needs to be cleaned directly having it done by a Canon Service Center is recommended O ar Oo x 1 Select Sensor cleaning one SET UP3 Video system PAL e Under the 3 tab select Sensor Battery info H lt gt See eg ao cleaning then press lt gt button display options btn function Rating Sensor cleaning Select Clean manually Disable Select Clean manually then press lt gt Clean manually 3 Select OK e Select OK then press lt gt gt In a moment the reflex mirror will Mirror will lockup After manually cleaning sensor turn power switch lockup and the shutter will open Lest ue e CLn will blink on the LCD panel Cancel OK A Clean the sensor 5 End the cleaning Set the power switch to lt OFF gt Q If you use a battery make sure it is fully charged If the battery grip with size AA LR6 batteries is attached manual sensor cleaning will not be possible F As power source using the AC Adapter Kit ACK E6 sold separately is recommended 293 CEM Ma
130. ard will be played back 7 Only the still photos and movies with the selected rating K Rating will be played back Slide show i 3 Set the play time and repeat ei qt 46 images option an alllimeves e Turn the lt gt dial to select Set up Gan then press lt gt Start e For still photos set the Display time MENU ESI and Repeat options then press the lt MENU gt button Display time Repeat Slide show Slide show Display time b1 sec 2 sec Repeat bEnable 3 sec Disable 5 sec 10 sec 20 sec MENU Ba 266 Slide Show Auto Playback SS a a a E Slide show Start the slide show Gi I a6 images e Turn the lt gt dial to select Start create PA mages then press lt gt ms 3 SA gt After Loading image is displayed Start the slide show will start MENU ps 5 Quit the slide show To quit the slide show and return to the setting screen press the lt MENU gt button F To pause the slide show press lt gt During pause II will be displayed on the upper left of the image Press lt 6i gt again to resume the slide show e During auto playback you can press the lt INFO gt button to change the still photo display format p 244 e During movie playback you can adjust the sound volume by turning the lt gt dial e During auto playback or pause you can turn the lt gt dial to view another image e During auto playback auto power of
131. ards ISO 100 and Standard Picture Style and a 8 GB card Figures in parentheses apply to an UDMA mode 7 128 GB card based on Canon s testing standards EX series Speedlites E TTL Il autoflash 3 stops in 1 3 or 1 2 stop increments Provided Provided Provided Compatible with radio wireless flash photography 375 Specifications e Live View Shooting Aspect ratio settings Focus modes Focusing brightness range Metering modes Metering range Silent shooting Grid display e Movie Shooting Movie recording compression Audio recording format Recording format Recording size and frame rate Compression method File size Focus modes Metering modes 376 3 2 4 3 16 9 1 1 Live mode Face detection Live mode contrast detection Quick mode phase difference detection Manual focusing Approx 5x 10x magnification possible EV 1 18 with contrast detection at 23 C 73 F ISO 100 Evaluative metering with the image sensor EV 0 20 at 23 C 73 F with EF 50mm f 1 4 USM lens ISO 100 Provided Mode 1 and 2 Three types MPEG 4 AVC H 264 Variable average bit rate Linear PCM MOV 1920x1080 Full HD 30p 25p 24p 1280x720 HD 60p 50p 640x480 SD 30p 25p 30p 29 97 fps 25p 25 00 fps 24p 23 976 fps 60p 59 94 fps 50p 50 00 fps ALL I I only IPB 1920x1080 30p 25p 24p IPB Approx 235 MB min 1920x1080 30p 25p 24p ALL I Approx 685 MB min 1280x720
132. as they track the subject moving dramatically up down left or right This setting takes effect in the following AF area selection modes AF point expansion Manual selection a AF point expansion Manual selection surrounding points Zone AF Manual selection 61 point automatic selection AF Standard setting for gradual AF point switching 2 1 Even if the target subject moves dramatically up down left or right and moves away from the AF point the AF point switches to another one to continue focusing the subject The camera switches to the AF point deemed most likely to focus the subject based on the subject s continual movement contrast etc Setting 2 makes the camera more prone to switch the AF point than with 1 However with a wide angle lens having a wide depth of field or if the subject is too small in the frame the camera may focus with the wrong AF point 92 MM Selecting Al Servo AF Characteristics For a Subject Changing Cases Parameter Settings You can adjust each case s three parameters 1 Tracking sensitivity 2 Accel decel tracking and 3 AF pt auto switching as desired Select a case CEA e Turn the lt gt dial to select the icon Versatile multi purpose of the case you want to adjust setting Tracking sensitivity e a 2 Press the lt RATE gt button f Accel decel tracking t a a o AF pt auto switching a a The selected case will have a purple
133. at DPOF SSS ee SS ee as Print Ordering Sel lmage D Print order i Select and order images one by one O Standard 7 prints If you press the lt Q gt button and turn the aah eee lt gt dial counterclockwise you can File No Off select an image from a three image display To return to the single image display turn the lt gt dial clockwise Press the lt MENU gt button to save the print order to the card Standard Both Sel lmage By fa All image Set up MENU ps D 25 u7 Press lt gt and a print order for one Quantity copy of the displayed image will be Total images selected placed By turning the lt gt dial you can set the quantity up to 99 Index 23 RA Press lt gt to include images with a Checkmark checkmark lt gt in the index print Index icon e Byam Select Mark all in folder and select the folder A print order for one copy of all the images in the folder will be placed If you select Clear all in folder and select the folder the print order for that folder will all be canceled All image If you select Mark all on card one copy of all the images on the card will be set for printing If you select Clear all on card the print order will be cleared for all the images on the card Q Note that RAW images and movies will not be included in the print order even if you set By fim or All image When using a PictBridge printer print no more than 400 images f
134. at this warranty does not apply to repairs arising out of the malfunction of non genuine Canon accessories although you may request such repairs on a chargeable basis Q Battery Pack LP E6 is dedicated to Canon products only Using it with an incompatible battery charger or product may result in malfunction or accidents for which Canon cannot be held liable 382 Safety Warnings Follow these safeguards and use the equipment properly to prevent injury death and material damage Preventing Serious Injury or Death To prevent fire excessive heat chemical leakage and explosions follow the safeguards below Do not use any batteries power sources and accessories not specified in this booklet Do not use any home made or modified batteries Do not short circuit disassemble or modify the battery pack or back up battery Do not apply heat or apply solder to the battery pack or back up battery Do not expose the battery pack or back up battery to fire or water And do not subject the battery pack or back up battery to strong physical shock Do not install the battery pack or back up battery in reversed polarity Do not mix new and old or different types of batteries Do not recharge the battery pack outside the allowable ambient temperature range of 0 C 40 C 32 F 104 F Also do not exceed the recharging time Do not insert any foreign metallic objects into the electrical contacts of the camera accessories
135. atic slide show i 1 Select Slide show Resize Under the gt 2 tab select Slide Rating show then press lt 61 gt Slide show I p Image transfer Image jump w 4 Number of images to be played 2 Select the images to be played Slide show Turn the lt gt dial to select the i m6 imaaes desired option then press lt gt i AII images 2 gt Sae i All images Movies Stills Ba Set up Turn the lt gt dial to select one of stat the following AII images eae Movies Stills Then press lt gt Date Folder Rating Turn the lt gt dial to select one of the following E Date Mm Folder Rating e When lt M Y7 gt is highlighted press the lt INFO gt button e Turn the lt gt dial to select the desired setting then press lt gt Date Folder Rating Select date i Select folder KSelect images 28 02 2012 6 ew 100 0035 100EOS5D All 01 03 2012 28 as 101EOS5D J 07 03 2012 12 a 102EOS5D 265 MW Slide Show Auto Playback N fC Item Playback Description AII images foes still photos and movies on the card will be played ra Still photos and movies taken on the selected shooting Date date will be played back Still photos and movies in the selected folder will be Ba Folder played back Movies Only the movies on the card will be played back Stills Only the still photos on the c
136. ation amount exceeds 3 stops the end of the exposure level indicator will display lt 4 gt or lt p gt 169 Auto Exposure Bracketing AEB mums By changing the shutter speed or aperture automatically the camera brackets the exposure up to 3 stops in 1 3 stop increments for three successive shots This is called AEB AEB stands for Auto Exposure Bracketing 1 Select Expo comp AEB Expo comp AEB 3 2 1 89 1 283 e Under the 2 tab select Expo so erase Sauls comp AEB then press lt gt Exposure comp AEB setting 2 Set the AEB range Turn the lt gt dial to set the AEB range If you turn lt gt you can set the exposure compensation e Press lt gt to set it gt When you exit the menu lt Kh gt and the AEB range will be displayed on the LCD panel Darker Brighter 7B 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 Take the picture The three bracketed shots will be taken according to the drive mode set in this sequence Standard exposure decreased exposure and increased exposure e AEB will not be automatically canceled To cancel AEB follow step 2 to turn off the AEB range display F During AEB shooting lt gt and lt gt will blink respectively in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel f the drive mode is set to lt CJ gt or lt S gt press the shutter button three times for each shot When lt Hip gt lt li gt or lt S gt is set and you hold do
137. available Eye Fi card already set up you can automatically transfer captured images to a personal computer or upload them to an online service via a wireless LAN The image transfer is a function of the Eye Fi card For instructions on how to set up and use the Eye Fi card or to troubleshoot any image transfer problems refer to the Eye Fi card s instruction manual or contact the card s manufacturer The camera is not guaranteed to support Eye Fi card functions including wireless transfer In case of an issue with an Eye Fi card please check with the card manufacturer Also note that approval is required to use Eye Fi cards in many countries or regions Without approval use of the card is not permitted If it is unclear whether the card has been approved for use in your area please check with the card manufacturer 1 Insert an Eye Fi card p 31 m SET UPI Record func card folder sel Under the 1 tab select Eye Fi a Continuous settings then press lt gt Anere ons This menu is displayed only when an Format card Eye Fi card is inserted into the camera Eye Fi settings 3 Enable Eye Fi transmission Eye Fi trans Disable e Press lt gt set Eye Fi trans to p Enable Enable then press lt gt e f you set Disable automatic transmission will not occur even with the Eye Fi card inserted Transmission status icon O A mM o x 2 Select Eye Fi settings Eye Fi settings A Displ
138. ay back consecutively automatically After the movie playback ends select the next movie to play e Movie Shooting Time Limit The maximum recording time of one movie clip is 29 min 59 sec If the movie shooting time reaches 29 min 59 sec the movie shooting will stop automatically You can start shooting a movie again by pressing the lt 8 gt button A new movie file starts being recorded 232 MM Setting the Movie Recording Size Q e An increase of the camera s internal temperature may cause movie shooting to stop before the maximum recording time shown in the preceding page p 241 e Even if Record func is set to Auto switch card the card cannot be switched automatically during movie shooting F About Full HD 1080 Full HD 1080 indicates compatibility with High Definition inns featuring 1080 vertical pixels scanning lines 1080 233 uam Setting the Sound Recording m Sound recording You can shoot movies while recording Sound rec Auto sound with the built in monaural microphone or a commercially available stereo microphone You can also freely adjust the sound recording level Set the sound recording with 6 4 Sound recording In the lt G gt mode this setting is displayed in 32 Wind filter Disable Sound Recording Sound Recording Level Auto The sound recording level is adjusted automatically Auto level control will operate automatically in response to the sound level Manual
139. ay the connection Eye Fi trans Enable information er ee e Select Connection info then press lt gt 344 Using Eye Fi Cards Connection info 5 Check the Access point SSID Access point SSID Check that an access point is ABCDEFG1 234567890 f f a IT displayed for Access point SSID MAC address 00 12 5a 07 4b 9c You can also check the Eye Fi card s Eye Fi firmware Ver a A GRIT itty ais ET MAC address and firmware version MENUR e Press the lt MENU gt button to exit the menu 6 Take the picture gt The picture is transferred and the onesHot CH lt gt icon switches from gray Not fon un connected to one of the icons below e For transferred images is displayed in the shooting information display p 246 Transmission status icon 7 Gray Not connected No connection with access point Q Blinking Connecting Connection with access point Displayed Connected Connection to access point established D 1 Transferring Image transfer to access point in progress Q Cautions for Using Eye Fi Cards e If is displayed an error occurred while retrieving the card information Turn the camera s power switch off and on again e Even if Eye Fi trans is set to Disable it may still transmit a signal In hospitals airports and other places where wireless transmissions are prohibited remove the Eye Fi card from the camera If the image transf
140. back time during movie playback Time code Displays the time code during movie playback With Time code set 00 02 00 00 102 0027 Li za ee a DN 3 24123 OOH During movie shooting During movie playback F If you change the setting for either Movie play count in 65 movie Time code or for gt 3 Movie play count the other setting will also change automatically Frames are not displayed during movie shooting and movie playback Drop Frame If the frame rate setting is 25 00 fps or I 50 00 fps the time code s frame count causes a discrepancy between the actual time and time code This discrepancy can be corrected automatically This correction function is called drop frame Enable The discrepancy is corrected automatically by skipping time code numbers Disable The discrepancy is not corrected F When the frame rate is set to I 23 976 fps the drop frame function does not take effect 238 um Menu Function Settings m 64 Menu ok When the Live View shooting Movie Resin we shooting switch is set to lt gt the 4 Grid display Off and 5 tabs dedicated to movie a dna pmi shooting will be displayed The menu Silent LV shoot Mode 1 options are as follows eis GES In the lt E gt mode 2 and 1083 will be displayed e AF mode The AF modes will be the same as described on pages 207 213 You can select Live mode 1 Live mode or Quick mode Not
141. be set p 127 128 for movie shooting Q Since shooting a movie at ISO 16000 20000 25600 may result in much noise it is designated as an expanded ISO speed displayed as H e f Minimum is set to L 50 and Maximum to H1 51200 or H2 102400 in ISO speed range and you switch from still photo shooting to movie shooting the minimum setting for manual ISO range will be ISO 100 and the maximum will be H ISO 25600 The ISO speed cannot be expanded to ISO 50 or ISO 51200 102400 Changing the shutter speed or aperture during movie shooting is not recommended since the changes in the exposure will be recorded When shooting a movie of a moving subject a shutter speed of 1 30 sec to 1 125 sec is recommended The faster the shutter speed the less smooth the subject s movement will look e f you change the shutter speed while shooting under fluorescent or LED lighting image flicker may be recorded Fl e If ISO Auto is set you can press the lt gt button to lock the ISO speed When you press the lt gt button and then recompose the picture you can see the exposure level difference on the exposure level indicator p 22 225 compared to when you first press the lt gt button By pressing the lt INFO gt button you can display the histogram 224 Shooting Movies a Se el Information Display e Each time you press the lt INFO gt button the information display will change AF mode Picture
142. bject suddenly and greatly changes speed setting Accel decel tracking to 2 may give better results p 91 Ifthe subject moves erratically up down left or right setting AF pt auto switching to 2 may give better results p 92 89 CEM Selecting Al Servo AF Characteristics For a Subject ee eS Se About the Parameters e Tracking sensitivity Tracking sensitivity Sets the subject tracking sensitivity during Al Servo AF when an obstacle enters the AF points or when the AF points stray from the subject Case 1 Locked on Responsive TEA Help SET eld 0 Standard setting suited for most moving subjects Locked on 2 Locked on 1 The camera will try to continue focusing the subject even if an obstacle enters the AF points or if the subject strays from the AF points The 2 setting makes the camera track the target subject longer than with the 1 setting However if the camera focuses the wrong subject it may take slightly longer to switch and focus the target subject Responsive 2 Responsive 1 Once an AF point tracks a subject the camera can focus consecutive subjects at different distances Also effective when you want to always focus on the closest subject The 2 setting makes it quicker to focus the next consecutive subject than with 1 However the camera will be more prone to focus on the wrong subject F Tracking sensitivity is the feature named AI Servo tracking sensitivity
143. bled O O 322 2 2 Custom Controls 7 O O O 0 2 O 2 O O Oo 0 3 O on O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O s O 5 O s O 5 O O O O O O O O O O O O The AF stop button G38 is provided only on super telephoto IS lenses 323 4 2 Custom Controls yf Metering and AF start When you press the button assigned to this function metering and AF are executed 4 If you assign the Metering and AF start function to the lt AF ON gt and lt gt buttons and add the function to switch to the registered AF point you can instantly switch to the registered AF point To enable this function press the lt INFO gt button in step 3 on page 321 On the AF start point selection screen select Registered AF point e Registering and using an AF point 1 Set the AF area selection mode to one of the following Single point Spot AF Single point AF AF point expansion manual selection surrounding points or 61 point automatic selection AF Zone AF cannot be registered Select an AF point manually p 74 3 Hold down the lt E gt button and press the lt 8 gt button A beep will sound and the AF point will be registered If the AF area selection mode is not set to 61 point automatic selection AF the registered AF point will blink If AF 4 Orientation linked AF po
144. card Approx 36 x 24 mm Canon EF lenses except EF S lenses 35 mm equivalent lens focal length will be as indicated on the lens Canon EF mount CMOS sensor Approx 22 30 megapixels 3 2 Auto Manual Dust Delete Data appending Design rule for Camera File System 2 0 JPEG RAW 14 bit Canon original RAW JPEG simultaneous recording enabled L Large Approx 22 10 megapixels 5760 x 3840 M Medium Approx 9 80 megapixels 3840 x 2560 S1 Small 1 Approx 5 50 megapixels 2880 x 1920 S2 Small 2 Approx 2 50 megapixels 1920 x 1280 S3 Small 3 Approx 350 000 pixels 720 x 480 RAW Approx 22 10 megapixels 5760 x 3840 M RAW Approx 10 50 megapixels 3960 x 2640 S RAW Approx 5 50 megapixels 2880 x 1920 Standard Auto switch card Rec separately Rec to multiple Possible Preset code User setting 1 User setting 2 Continuous auto reset manual reset e Image Processing During Shooting Picture Style White balance 372 Auto Standard Portrait Landscape Neutral Faithful Monochrome User Def 1 3 Auto Preset Daylight Shade Cloudy Tungsten light White fluorescent light Flash Custom Color temperature setting Approx 2500 10000K White balance correction and White balance bracketing possible Flash color temperature information transmission enabled Specifications Noise reduction Applicable to long exposures and high ISO speed shots Automatic image brightness correc
145. city p 338 is 94 or higher the battery will not be recharged The charger cannot charge any battery other than Battery Pack LP E6 29 Installing and Removing the Battery mam Load a fully charged Battery Pack LP E6 into the camera The camera s viewfinder becomes bright when a battery is installed and darkens when the battery is removed Installing the Battery Open the cover Slide the lever as shown by the arrows and open the cover Insert the battery e Insert the end with the battery contacts e Insert the battery until it locks in place Close the cover e Press the cover until it snaps shut Q Only Battery Pack LP E6 can be used Removing the Battery Open the cover and remove the battery Press the battery release lever as shown by the arrow and remove the battery To prevent short circuiting of the battery contacts be sure to attach the protective cover provided p 29 to the battery 30 Installing and Removing the Card sau The camera can use a CF card and SD card Images can be recorded when at least one card is installed in the camera If a card is inserted in both slots you can select which card to record images to or record the same images simultaneously on both cards p 116 118 Q Ifyou use an SD card be sure the card s write protect switch i is set upward to enable writing erasing Installing the Card WOK E E x 0587 1 Open the
146. ck count Rec time Movie recording size 1920x1080 IPB LCD brightness Auto Sound recording Auto Date Time Zone Unchanged Silent LV shooting Mode 1 Language Unchanged Metering timer 16 sec Video system Unchanged Time code Count up Unchanged INFO button All items selected Start time setting Unchanged display options Movie s Unchanged VF grid display Disable recording count button function Rating Movie i Unchanged Custom shooting modes Unchanged playback count Copyright information Unchanged Drop frame Unchanged Control over HDMI Disable Silent Control Disable Eye Fi transmission Disable Movie shooting button My Menu settings Unchanged Display from My Menu Disable E For WFT and GPS settings refer to the respective device s instruction Displaying the Grid and Electronic Level mm You can display a grid and electronic level in the viewfinder and on the LCD monitor to help correct camera tilt Displaying the Grid in the Viewfinder Eo x 1 Select VF grid display e Under the 2 tab select VF grid display then press lt gt Select Enable VF grid display Disable Enable e Turn the lt gt dial to select Enable then press lt gt The grid will be displayed in the viewfinder CN LJ Displaying the Electronic Level in the Viewfinder The viewfinder can display an electronic level using the AF points For details see Cust
147. confirmation light lt gt blinks with certain subjects such as the following Subjects difficult to focus Very low contrast subjects Example Blue sky solid color walls etc Subjects in very low light e Extremely backlit or reflective subjects Example Car with a highly reflective body etc e Near and far subjects covered by an AF point Example Animal in a cage etc Repetitive patterns Example Skyscraper windows computer keyboards etc In such cases do either of the following 1 With One Shot AF focus on an object at the same distance as the subject and lock the focus before recomposing p 67 2 Set the lens focus mode switch to lt MF gt and focus manually p 111 F For conditions where AF can fail to achieve focus with Live mode Live mode during Live View shooting see page 211 110 When Autofocus Fails MF Manual Focusing Set the lens focus mode switch to lt MF gt gt lt M FOCUS gt will be displayed on the LCD panel Focus the subject Focus by turning the lens focusing ring until the subject looks sharp in the viewfinder F When you press the shutter button halfway while focusing manually the focus confirmation light lt gt will light up when focus is achieved e With 61 point automatic selection when the center AF point achieves focus the focus confirmation light lt gt will light up 111 C1 Selecting the Drive Mode sx
148. constant Selected constant KE The selected AF point s is always All constant Selected pre AF focused displayed i All constant All 61 AF points are always displayed Selected focused Disable display INFO falalo aia Selected pre AF focused The selected AF point s is displayed for 1 2 and 4 The selected AF point s is displayed for 1 and 4 OFF Disable display For 2 3 and 4 the selected AF point s will not be displayed 102 EM Customizing AF Functions s eS a I Fil If Selected pre AF focused or Selected focused is set the AF point will not be displayed even when focus is achieved with Al Servo AF VF display illumination The AF points and grid in the viewfinder can be illuminated in red when focus is achieved VF display illumination AUTO Auto Auto The AF points and grid are automatically as illuminated in red under low light 2 ON Enable The AF points and grid are illuminated in red regardless of the ambient light level OFF Disable The AF points and grid are not illuminated in red Q The setting here is not applied to the electronic level display p 59 in the viewfinder F When you press the lt E J gt button the AF points and grid will be illuminated in red regardless of this setting AF Microadjustment You can make fine adjustments for the AF s point of focus For details see Fine Adjustment of AF s Point of Focus on page 104 103
149. cord or put a heavy object on the cord Also do not twist or tie the cords Do not connect too many power plugs to the same power outlet Do not use a cord whose insulation has been damaged Occasionally unplug the power plug and use a dry cloth to clean off the dust around the power outlet If the surrounding is dusty humid or oily the dust on the power outlet may become moist and short circuit the outlet to cause a fire Preventing Injury or Equipment Damage Do not leave equipment inside a car under the hot sun or near a heat source The equipment may become hot and cause skin burns Do not carry the camera around while it is attached to a tripod Doing so may cause injury Also make sure the tripod is sturdy enough to support the camera and lens Do not leave a lens or lens attached camera under the sun without the lens cap attached Otherwise the lens may concentrate the sun s rays and cause a fire Do not cover or wrap the battery recharging apparatus with a cloth Doing so may trap heat within and cause the casing to deform or catch fire If you drop the camera in water or if water or metal fragments enter inside the camera promptly remove the battery pack and back up battery This is to prevent fire and electrical shock Do not use or leave the battery pack or back up battery in a hot environment Doing so may cause battery leakage or a shorter battery life The battery pack or back up battery can also become ho
150. cover 2 Slide the cover as shown by the D arrow to open it 2 Insert the card The camera front side slot is for a CF card and the camera back side slot is for an SD card e Face the CF card s label side toward you and insert the end with the small holes into the camera If the card is inserted in the wrong way it may damage the camera gt The CF card eject button will stick out e With the SD card s label facing you push in the card until it clicks in place Write protect switch 31 Installing and Removing the Card Close the cover Close the cover and slide it in the direction shown by the arrows until it snaps shut gt When you set the power switch to lt ON gt p 34 the number of possible shots and the loaded card s will be displayed on the LCD panel The images will be recorded to the card with the lt gt icon next to the respective card s indicator CF card indicator SD card indicator 32 The camera cannot use Type II CF cards or hard disk cards Although the camera does not comply with the UHS Ultra High Speed speed class standard UHS SDHC SDXC cards can be used SDHC SDXC memory cards can be used with the camera SI Ultra DMA UDMA CF cards can also be used with the XC camera UDMA CF cards enable faster data writing The number of possible shots depends on the remaining capacity of the card image recording
151. ctive cover provided with the battery 2 Attach the battery e Asshown in the illustration attach the battery securely to the charger To detach the battery follow the above procedure in reverse Recharge the battery For LC E6 e As shown by the arrow flip out the battery charger s prongs and insert the prongs into a power outlet For LC E6E Connect the power cord to the charger and insert the plug into the power outlet gt Recharging starts automatically and the charge lamp blinks in orange Charge Lamp oak ane tae Color Indicator 0 49 Blinks once per second 50 74 Orange Blinks twice per second 75 or higher Blinks three times per second Fully charged Green Lights up It takes approx 2 5 hours to fully recharge a completely exhausted battery at 23 C 73 F The time required to recharge the battery depends on the ambient temperature and the battery s charge level e For safety reasons recharging in low temperatures 5 C 10 C 41 F 50 F will take longer up to 4 hours 28 Charging the Battery SSE SSS Sa ee eee 34 Tips for Using the Battery and Charger e Upon purchase the battery is not fully charged Recharge the battery before using Recharge the battery on the day before or on the day it is to be used Even during storage a charged battery will gradually drain and lose its capacity e After recha
152. d s contacts with your fingers or metal objects 33 Turning on the Power lau If you turn on the power switch and the Date Time Zone setting screen appears see page 36 to set the Date Time Zone lt ON gt The camera turns on lt OFF gt The camera is turned off and does not operate Set to this position when not using the camera About the Automatic Self Cleaning Sensor Whenever you set the power switch to lt ON gt or lt OFF gt sensor cleaning will be executed automatically A small sound may be heard During GE ETT the sensor cleaning the LCD monitor will display lt t gt e You can still shoot during sensor cleaning by pressing the shutter button halfway p 44 to stop the sensor cleaning and take a picture e If you repeatedly turn the power switch lt ON gt lt OFF gt at a short interval the lt G gt icon may not be displayed This is normal and not a problem mM About Auto Power Off To save battery power the camera turns off automatically after 1 minute of non operation To turn on the camera again just press the shutter button halfway p 44 e You can change the auto power off time with 2 Auto power off p 55 Fl If you set the power switch to lt OFF gt while an image is being recorded to the card Recording will be displayed and the power will turn off after the card finishes recording the image 34 Turning on the Power daa Checking th
153. d take the picture e Flash exposure compensation In the same way as normal exposure compensation flash exposure compensation can be set You can set flash exposure compensation up to 3 stops in 1 3 stop increments Press the camera s lt ISO 4 gt button then turn the lt 63 gt dial while looking in the viewfinder or at the LCD panel Q If 2 Auto Lighting Optimizer p 142 is not set to Disable the image may still look bright even if a darker flash exposure compensation amount has been set F When it is difficult to achieve focus with autofocus the EOS dedicated external Speedlite may automatically emit the AF assist beam 188 4 Flash Photography EES eee ee Using Non EX series Canon Speedlites e With an EZ E EG ML TL series Speedlite set to A TTL or TTL autoflash mode the flash can be fired at full output only Set the camera s shooting mode to lt M gt manual exposure or lt Av gt aperture priority AE and adjust the aperture setting before shooting When using a Speedlite that has manual flash mode shoot in the manual flash mode Using Non Canon Flash Units Sync Speed The camera can synchronize with non Canon compact flash units at 1 200 sec and slower speeds With large studio flash units since the flash duration is longer than compact flash units set the sync speed within 1 60 sec to 1 30 sec Be sure to test the flash synchronization H before shooting PC Terminal The camera
154. d to the camera with EOS Utility provided software p 390 1 Press the lt C gt button 2 Select 323 e Turn the lt gt dial to select 313 then press lt gt gt The Picture Style selection screen will appear Picture Style 3 Select User Def User Def 1 Standard e Turn the lt gt dial to select User 03008000 Def then press lt INFO gt ESF EM INFO POETES Detail set User Def 1 Press lt Ge gt mctirestyie Samian e With Picture Style selected press OSharpness OCcontrast gt gt Saturation Color tone Detail set ExT User Def 1 Select the base Picture Style Picture Style Landscape lt Turn the lt gt dial to select the base Picture Style then press lt gt e To adjust the parameters of a Picture Style that has been registered to the camera with EOS Utility provided software select the Picture Style here 135 32 Registering a Picture Style Detail set ExT User Def 1 Select a parameter RERAN Landscape Turn the lt gt dial to select a ae parameter such as Sharpness then Saturation press lt E gt Color tone Detail set ExT User Def 1 Set the parameter Picture Style Landscape Turn the lt gt dial to set the OSharpness maita parameter as desired then press lt gt For details see Customizing a MENUS Picture Style on pages 132 134 Picture Style e Press the lt MENU gt button to register Use
155. ded Headphones Headphone terminal provided Grid display Three types Still photos Possible e LCD Monitor Type TFT color liquid crystal monitor Monitor size and dots Wide 8 1 cm 3 2 inches 3 2 with approx 1 04 million dots Brightness adjustment Auto Dark Standard Bright Manual 7 levels Electronic level Horizontal 1 increments 6 Vertical 1 increments 4 Interface languages 25 Feature guide Displayable e Playback Image display formats Single image display Single image Info display Basic info shooting info histogram 4 image index 9 image index 2 image display Highlight alert Overexposed highlights blink AF point display Possible Grid display Three types Zoom magnification Approx 1 5x 10x starting magnification and position settable Image browsing methods Single image jump by 10 or 100 images by shooting date by folder by movies by stills by rating 377 Specifications Image rotate Possible Ratings Provided Movie playback Enabled LCD monitor video audio OUT HDMI OUT built in speaker Slide show All images by date by folder movies stills or by rating Image protect Possible Copying images Possible e Post Processing of Images In camera RAW image processing Brightness correction White balance Picture Style Auto Lighting Optimizer High ISO speed noise reduction JPEG image recording quality Color space Peripheral illumination correction
156. densetdesictsscaitanssaieaeenes 296 AG Printing eee eaan i A ied 298 Trimming the IMage ecceceseceseeeeseceeeceeeeeeeeneesieeseeeeeeeaeeneees 303 i Digital Print Order Format DPOF ccccccccsesessseeeeseseneees 305 i Direct Printing with DPOF cccccecssecseeseeeseseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 308 Transferring Images to a Personal Computet 0065 309 Contents 13 Customizing the Camera 313 Custom FUNCIONS reses serenade ancien einer 314 Custom Function Settings cccceecceseeecesereeereeeeeeneeeneeenreetenaees 315 CIRM 1 EXpOsure ies a a a a aa eaaa eee 315 C Fn2 Display Operation ecccecceeceeereeeeceeeseeeeereeereeneeeaeeees 318 C Fn3 Others 320 Q2 Custom Controls siei ianea 321 Registering My MenU s ssessssssnsssrsnsrsrsrnrisrsrnrnsininrnrnsrnrnrnrrnrntntt 331 Register Custom Shooting Modes eee eee 332 14 Reference INFO Button FUNCTIONS ccccceececeseseceseeeeeececeeeesestseseetseeneeeeees Checking the Battery Information Using a Household Power Oulttlet 0 0 cece eee eee eeeeeee Replacing the Date Time Battery cccceeeceeceeeeeeteeereeereeereee Using Eye Fi CafdSnsr dapan a aa eater Function Availability Table According to Shooting Mode Menu Settings i nornen ane System Map te acer ean Troubleshooting Guide cecceeceeeeeeeeeeeceereeeeeeeeeeesereeneeeeeeats Error Codes Specif
157. displayed see About the Lens Correction Data on page 149 3 Take the picture The image will be recorded with the peripheral illumination corrected Q Depending on shooting conditions noise may appear on the image periphery F e The correction amount applied will be slightly lower than the maximum correction amount settable with Digital Photo Professional provided software The higher the ISO speed the lower the correction amount will be 147 MM Lens Peripheral Illumination Chromatic Aberration Correction Chromatic Aberration Correction Lens aberration correction 1 Select the setting EF24 105mm f 4L IS USH Check that Correction data Correction data available available is displayed for the attached lens bEnable i Chromatic aberration Disable e Turn the lt gt dial to select mmo Chromatic aberration then press lt Ge gt Select Enable then press lt gt e If Correction data not available is displayed see About the Lens Correction Data on the next page 2 Take the picture The image will be recorded with the chromatic aberration corrected Q If you play back a image shot with the chromatic aberration corrected the image will be displayed on the camera without the chromatic aberration correction applied Check the chromatic aberration correction with Digital Photo Professional provided software p 390 148 M Lens Peripheral Illumination Chromatic Aber
158. dividually Disable All by same amount Adjust by lens INFO Fear Tae G 0 W 1_T 2 Clear all For a zoom lens turn the lt 3 gt dial and select the wide angle W or telephoto T end Pressing lt gt will turn off the purple frame and make the adjustment possible Turn the lt gt dial to adjust as desired then press lt G gt The adjustable range is 20 steps Setting it toward will shift the point of focus in front of the standard point of focus Setting it toward Aa will shift the point of focus to the rear of the standard point of focus For a zoom lens repeat step 4 and adjust it for the wide angle W and telephoto T ends After completing the adjustment press the lt MENU gt button to return to the screen in step 1 Turn the lt gt dial to select Adjust by lens then press lt Ge gt The menu will reappear 5 Check the result of the adjustment Take a picture and play back the image p 244 to check the adjustment result When the resulting picture is focused in front of the targeted point adjust toward the Aa side When the resulting picture is focused behind the targeted point adjust toward the side If necessary do the adjustment again F When shooting with the intermediate range focal length of a zoom lens the AF s point of focus is corrected relative to the adjustments made for the wide angle and telephoto ends Even if
159. duction effect with Digital Photo Professional provided software p 390 143 CEM Noise Reduction Settings Long Exposure Noise Reduction Noise reduction is possible with images exposed for 1 sec or longer SHOOT3 Picture Style Auto Long exp noise reduction OFF High ISO speed NR all Highlight tone priority OFF Dust Delete Data Multiple exposure Disable HDR Mode Disable HDR Long exp noise reduction Disable OFF Auto AUTO Enable ON Noise reduction applied to ima ges exposed at 1 sec or longer INFO fao e Auto 1 Select Long exp noise reduction e Under the 3 tab select Long exp noise reduction then press lt gt Set the desired setting e Turn the lt gt dial to select the desired setting then press lt gt gt The setting screen closes and the menu will reappear For 1 sec or longer exposures noise reduction is performed automatically if noise typical of long exposures is detected This Auto setting is effective in most cases Enable Noise reduction is performed for all exposures of 1 sec or longer The Enable setting may be able to reduce noise that otherwise cannot be detected with the Auto setting 144 3 Take the picture The image will be recorded with noise reduction applied MEW Noise Reduction Settings 5 a Q With Auto and Enable after the picture is taken the noise reduction process may take the same amount of t
160. e Save source imgs z ae select All images then press lt amp gt gt a To save only the merged multiple Select image for multi expo zi exposure image select Result only then press lt gt Multiple exposure 7 Set Continue Mult exp Select either 1 shot only or Continuously then press lt gt Continue Mult exp MEN Nih n shot only the setting n step 2 a will be set automatically to Disable Multiple exposure shooting will be canceled automatically after the shooting ends e With Continuously multiple exposure shooting continues until the setting in step 3 is set to Disable 8 Take the first exposure gt When On Func Ctrl is set the captured image will be displayed AWE a AL gt The lt gt icon will blink onestot 6 OO The number of remaining exposures E ea fm 3 514 is displayed in brackets in the viewfinder or on the screen e Pressing the lt gt gt button enables you to view the captured image p 182 P 1 125 F5 6 100 7 29 1 2 23 Remaining number of exposures Q e During multiple exposure shooting Auto Lighting Optimizer highlight tone priority peripheral illumination correction and chromatic aberration correction will be disabled The image recording quality ISO speed Picture Style high ISO speed noise reduction and color space etc set for the first single exposure will also be set for the subsequent exposures f the Picture Style
161. e lt gt dial to select the movie to be played e With the single image display the lt A 83 gt icon displayed on the upper left indicates a movie On the index display the perforations on the left edge of the image indicates a movie As movies cannot be played on the index display press lt gt to switch to the single image display 3 On the single image display press lt gt gt The movie playback panel will appear on the bottom Easier 4 Play back the movie Turn the lt gt dial to select P Play then press lt gt gt The movie will start playing e You can pause the movie playback by pressing lt gt e During movie playback you can adjust the sound volume by turning the lt 7 gt dial For more details on the playback procedure see the next page Q Before listening to a movie through headphones tone down the volume to prevent hurting your ears 261 Playing Movies Function Playback Description D Exit Returns to the single image display gt Play Pressing lt gt toggles between play and stop Adjust the slow motion speed by turning the lt gt dial l gt Slow motion The slow motion speed is indicated on the upper right M4 First frame Displays the movie s first frame Each time you press lt gt the previous frame is Il Previous frame displayed If you hold down lt gt it will rewind the movie Each time you pr
162. e that continuous focusing of a moving subject is not possible Even if the AF mode is set to Quick mode it will switch to Live mode during movie shooting e Grid display With 3x3 or 6x4 you can display grid lines It can help you level the camera vertically or horizontally Also with 3x3 diag K the grid is displayed together with diagonal lines to help you align the intersections over the subject for better balance in the E composition Movie recording size You can set the movie recording size image size frame rate and compression rate For details see pages 231 to 233 e Sound recording You can set sound recording settings For details see pages 234 and 235 239 EM Menu Function Settings Silent LV shooting This function applies to still photo shooting For details see page 206 e Metering timer You can change how long the exposure setting is displayed AE lock time 65 Menu Oo a4 E Y hid SHOOTS Movie Time code Silent Control Disable Movie shoot btn aa Time code You can set the time code For details see pages 237 and 238 Silent Control When Enable is set you can use the touch pad lt gt and Quick Control screen to change settings silently during movie shooting For details see page 236 e Movie shooting button When f is set besides pressing the lt gt button you can also press the shutter button comple
163. e Battery Level When the power switch is set to lt ON gt the battery level will be indicated in one of six levels A blinking battery icon indicates that the battery will be exhausted soon 999 icon mmz ma Cm Ca a aa Level 100 70 69 50 49 20 19 10 9 1 0 Battery Life Temperature At 23 C 73 F At 0 C 32 F Possible shots Approx 950 shots Approx 850 shots e The figures above are based on a fully charged Battery Pack LP E6 no Live View shooting and CIPA Camera amp Imaging Products Association testing standards e Possible shots with Battery Grip BG E11 e With LP E6 x 2 approx twice the shots without the battery grip e With size AA LR6 alkaline batteries at 23 C 73 F approx 270 shots F e The number of possible shots will decrease with any of the following operations e Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period e Activating the AF frequently without taking a picture e Using the lens Image Stabilizer e Using the LCD monitor often The number of possible shots may decrease depending on the actual shooting conditions The lens operation is powered by the camera s battery Depending on the lens used the number of possible shots may be lower For the number of possible shots with Live View shooting see page 199 See 3 Battery info to check the battery s condition in detail p 338 e
164. e Stabilizer camera shake is corrected to obtain a sharper shot The procedure explained here is based on the EF 24 105mm f 4L IS USM lens as an example IS stands for Image Stabilizer 1 Set the IS switch to lt ON gt e Also set the camera s power switch to STABILIZER lt ON gt ON rat 2 Press the shutter button halfway gt The Image Stabilizer will operate 3 Take the picture When the picture looks steady in the viewfinder press the shutter button completely to take the picture Q e The Image Stabilizer cannot correct subject blur when the subject moves at the time of exposure e For bulb exposures set the IS switch to lt OFF gt If lt ON gt is set instead Image Stabilizer misoperation may occur e The Image Stabilizer may not be effective for excessive shaking such as on a rocking boat e The Image Stabilizer may not be effective when you use the EF 24 105mm f 4L IS USM lens for panned shots F e The Image Stabilizer can operate with the lens focus mode switch set to either lt AF gt or lt MF gt e When using a tripod you can still shoot with the IS switch set to lt ON gt with no problem However to save battery power setting the IS switch to lt OFF gt is recommended The Image Stabilizer is effective even when the camera is mounted on a monopod 42 Basic Operation mx Adjusting the Viewfinder Clarity ee Turn the dioptric adjustment TE 2 knob y Turn
165. e a camcorder e During movie shooting do not point the lens toward the sun The sun s heat can damage the camera s internal components Under 1 Record func card folder sel even if Record func is set to Rec to multiple p 116 the movie cannot be recorded to both the CF card lt i gt and SD card lt B gt If Rec separately or Rec to multiple is set the movie will be recorded to the card which has been set for Playback e if lt GMWH gt is set and the ISO speed or aperture changes during movie shooting the white balance may also change f you shoot a movie under fluorescent or LED lighting the movie may flicker Zooming the lens during movie shooting is not recommended Zooming the lens can cause changes in the exposure regardless of whether the lens maximum aperture changes or not Exposure changes may be recorded as a result e Cautions for movie shooting are on pages 241 and 242 e If necessary also read the Live View shooting cautions on pages 215 and 216 Fl e Movie related settings are under the 4 and 485 tabs p 239 In the lt G gt mode they are under the 92 and 3 tabs e A movie file is recorded each time you shoot a movie If the file size exceeds 4 GB a new file will be created e The movie image s field of view is approx 100 with movie recording size set to i920 e You can also focus the image by pressing the lt AF ON gt button To focus during mov
166. e card having the lower number If one of the cards becomes full Card full will be displayed and shooting will be disabled If this happens either replace the card or set the recording method to Standard or Auto switch card and select the card with space remaining to continue shooting 117 MM Selecting the Card for Recording and Playback a a a eS SS Selecting the CF or SD Card for Recording and Playback If Record func is set to Standard or Auto switch card select the card for recording and playing images If Record func is set to Rec separately or Rec to multiple select the card for playing images If Standard or Auto switch card is set Record functcard folder sel Select Record play Record func Standard Turn the lt gt dial to select Record Record play i Folder 100EOS5D play then press lt gt Record images to and play fE images back from the CF card MENUS D Record images to and play images back from the SD card Turn the lt gt dial to select the card then press lt gt If Rec separately or Rec to multiple is set Record func card folder sel Select Playback Record func Rec separately e Turn the lt gt dial to select Playpack aca Playback then press lt gt a D Play back the SD card s MENOS images Turn the lt gt dial to select the card then press lt gt 118 U Setting the Image Recording Qua
167. e compensation lt gt will be displayed lt HDR gt and the dynamic range adjustment amount will be displayed for images taken in the HDR mode lt mh gt will be displayed for multiple exposure photos For still photos taken during movie shooting lt gt will be displayed For JPEG images developed with the camera s RAW processing function or resized and then saved lt gt will be displayed 246 INFO Shooting Information Display i a BES Es a Sample Information for Movies Shooting time Playback time Time code Playback Shutter speed Aperture Shooting mode E a RA V A 400 K byt 0O Movie recording rye A SRGB Movie file size size BRP 28 02 2012 13 30 00 Frame rate Compression method e About the Highlight Alert When gt 3 Highlight alert is set to Enable overexposed highlight areas will blink To obtain more image detail in the overexposed areas set the exposure compensation to a negative amount and shoot again e About the AF Point Display When gt 3 AF point disp is set to Enable the AF point that E achieved focus will be displayed in red If automatic AF point selection was used multiple AF points may be displayed in red 247 INFO Shooting Information Display SS SS ee e About the Histogram The brightness histogram shows the exposure level distribution and overall brightness The RGB histogram is for checking the color saturation and gradation
168. e compensation can be set in the P Tv Av shooting modes Although you can set the exposure compensation up to 5 stops in 1 3 stop increments the exposure compensation indicator in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel can only display the setting up to 3 stops If you want to set the exposure compensation setting beyond 3 stops you should use the Quick Control p 49 or follow the instructions for 8 2 Expo comp AEB on the next page Check the exposure level indicator Press the shutter button halfway 4 and check the exposure level indicator Increased exposure for a 2 Set the exposure compensation brighter image amount While looking at the viewfinder or LCD panel turn the lt gt dial f it cannot be set set the lt LOCKR gt switch to the left then turn the lt gt dial Decreased exposure for a darker image 3 Take the picture e To cancel the exposure compensation set the exposure compensation amount back to lt gt Q f 2 Auto Lighting Optimizer p 142 is not set to Disable the image may still look bright even if a darker exposure compensation amount has been set ir The exposure compensation amount will remain in effect even after you set the power switch to lt OFF gt e After setting the exposure compensation amount you can set the lt LOCK gt switch to the right to prevent the exposure compensation amount from changing accidentally If the exposure compens
169. e functions do not take effect during viewfinder shooting e Live View shooting You can set Live View shooting to Enable or Disable e AF mode You can select Live mode p 207 Live mode p 208 or Quick mode p 212 e Grid display By displaying a 3x3 or 6x4 grid you can check for any picture tilting Also with 3x3 diag gt the grid is displayed together with diagonal lines to help you align the intersections over the subject for better balance in the composition 203 EM Menu Function Settings a SSS 8 EEE SS e Aspect ratio The image s aspect ratio can be set to 3 2 4 3 16 9 or 1 1 The area surrounding the Live View image is masked in black when the following aspect ratios are set 4 3 16 9 1 1 JPEG images will be saved with the set aspect ratio RAW images will always be saved with the 3 2 aspect ratio Since the aspect ratio information is appended to the RAW image the image can be generated in the respective aspect ratio when you process the RAW image with the provided software When 9 3 Add cropping information is not set to Off the aspect ratio will be 3 2 The aspect ratio cannot be changed Image Aspect Ratio and Pixel Count approx Quality 3 2 4 3 16 9 1 1 L 5760x3840 5120x3840 5760x3240 3840x3840 22 1 megapixels 19 7 megapixels 18 7 megapixels 14 7 megapixe
170. e i lever p 30 1 Fight sensor pe Battery compartment i cover p 30 i LCD monitor p 279 Access lamp p 33 2 4 Multi function lock switch p 47 ao Tripod socket SD card slot p 31 CF card slot p 31 CF card ejection button p 33 20 Nomenclature LCD Panel Shutter speed Aperture FE lock FEL F Busy buSY ooo AF point selection Multi function lock warning L 27 AF SEL SEL AF No card warning Card AF point registration Error code Err 27 HP SEL SEL HP Cleaning image sensor CLn Card warning Card 1 2 1 2 Possible shots Self timer countdown Bulb exposure time Card full warning Full Card error warning Err White balance p 137 Error No Auto Remaining images to record Daylight BK Shade AF mode p 70 Cloudy ONE SHOT Tungsten One Shot AF light Al FOCUS White Al Focus AF fluorescent light 4 Flash x Custom E3 Color temperature Al SERVO Al Servo AF M FOCUS Manual focus Drive mode p 112 a lt B gt White balance C Single shooting correction p 140 iy High speed continuous shooting lt AB gt GPS device connected A Low speed icon continuous shooting lt gt Auto Lighting Optimizer OS Silent single shooting p 142 S Silent continuous shooting 10 sec Self timer Remote control 2 2 sec Self timer lt B W gt Monochrome shooting p 131 Remote control
171. e in the Al Servo AF and Al Focus AF modes p 70 The continuous shooting speed is slow e Depending on the shutter speed aperture subject conditions brightness etc the continuous shooting speed may become slower 361 Troubleshooting Guide The maximum burst during continuous shooting is lower e If you shoot something that has fine detail such as a field of grass the file size will be larger and the actual maximum burst may be lower than the number mentioned on page 121 ISO 100 cannot be set ISO speed expansion cannot be selected e If 3 Highlight tone priority is set to Enable the settable ISO speed range will be ISO 200 25600 or up to 12800 for movie shooting Even if you expand the settable ISO speed range in ISO speed range you cannot set expanded ISO speeds L H H1 H2 When t483 Highlight tone priority is set to Disable ISO 100 125 160 can be set p 146 The Auto Lighting Optimizer cannot be set e f 3 Highlight tone priority is set to Enable the Auto Lighting Optimizer cannot be set When 483 Highlight tone priority is set to Disable then the Auto Lighting Optimizer can be set p 146 Even though I set a decreased exposure compensation the image comes out bright e Set 492 Auto Lighting Optimizer to Disable When Standard Low High is set even if you set a decreased exposure compensation or flash exposure compensation the image may come out bright p 169 T
172. e printer s ink level and check the waste ink tank Hardware Error Check for any printer problems other than paper and ink problems File Error The selected image cannot be printed via PictBridge Images taken with a different camera or images edited with a computer may not be printable 304 Digital Print Order Format DPOF mums You can set the print type date imprinting and file number imprinting The print settings will be applied to all print ordered images They cannot be set individually for each image Setting the Printing Options O a MM g 1 Select Print order Protect images e Under the L 11 tab select Print Rotate image aean order then press lt gt Print order Image copy RAW image processing Print order fi 2 Select Set up O Standard 0 prints e Select Set up then press lt G gt Date Off File No Off Sel Image Bya a All image Set up MENUR 3 Set the option as desired Set the Print type Date and File No Select the option to be set then press lt gt Select the desired setting then press lt 6 gt Print type Date File No Print order Print order Print order Set up Set up Set up Print type Standard Index On Both Off File No 305 gt Digital Print Order Format DPOF Se eS Standard Prints one image on one sheet Index Multiple thumbnail images are printed on one sheet Print type
173. e shot and press the shutter button completely 160 P Program AE e If the 30 shutter speed and the maximum aperture blink it indicates underexposure tN Increase the ISO speed or use flash If the 8000 shutter speed and the minimum aperture blink it indicates overexposure Lower the ISO speed or use an ND filter sold separately to reduce the amount of light entering the lens Al Differences Between lt P gt and lt J gt Modes In the lt J gt mode many functions such the AF mode and metering mode are set automatically to prevent spoiled shots The functions you can set are limited With lt P gt mode only the shutter speed and aperture are set automatically You can freely set the AF mode metering mode and other E functions p 346 About Program Shift Inthe Program AE mode you can freely change the shutter speed and aperture combination Program set automatically by the camera while maintaining the same exposure This is called Program shift To shift the program press the shutter button down halfway then turn the lt gt dial until the desired shutter speed or aperture is displayed e Program shift is canceled automatically after the picture is taken e Program shift cannot be used with flash 161 Tv Shutter Priority AE memm In this mode you set the shutter speed and the camera automatically sets the aperture to obtain the standard exposure suiting the brightness of the subject
174. e time from both the lt HDMI OUT gt and lt A V OUT gt terminals ir Do not connect any other device s output to the camera s lt HDMI OUT gt terminal Doing so may cause a malfunction Certain TVs may not be able to play back the captured images In such a case use the provided AV cable to connect to the TV Using HDMI CEC TV Sets If the TV set connected to the camera with an HDMI cable is compatible with HDMI CEC you can use the TV set s remote control for playback operations An HDMI standard function enabling HDMI devices to control each other so that you can control them with one remote control unit 1 Set Ctrl over HDMI to Enable Under the gt 3 tab select Ctrl over HDMI then press lt gt e Select Enable then press lt gt Disable Ctrl over HDMI b Enable 269 Viewing the Images on TV Connect the camera to a TV set e Use an HDMI cable to connect the camera to the TV gt The TV s input will switch automatically to the HDMI port connected to the camera Press the camera s lt gt gt button gt An image will appear on the TV screen and you can use the TV s remote control to play back images Select an image or movie Point the remote control toward the TV set and press the button to select an image Still photo playback menu 5 Press the remote control s Enter button 5 gt The menu appears and you can perform the playback operations sh
175. e will be displayed for 2 sec on the LCD 4 monitor To display the image again press the lt gt gt button p 244 To shoot while looking at the LCD monitor see Live View Shooting p 197 To view the images captured so far see Image Playback p 244 e To delete an image see Erasing Images p 277 17 Nomenclature memm lt AF DRIVE gt AF mode selection Drive mode selection button p 70 112 lt ISO amp 4 gt ISO speed setting Flash exposure compensation button p 124 188 lt 6 gt LCD panel illumination button p 48 lt gt Main Dial p 45 Shutter button p 44 Remote control sensor p 186 DC coupler cord hole p 342 Grip Battery compartment Depth of field preview button p 165 Mirror p 184 293 Body cap p 39 18 lt WB gt Metering mode selection White balance selection button p 167 137 m lt M Fn gt AF area selection mode Multi function button p 73 188 Lens mount index p 39 Flash sync contacts Hot shoe p 188 Mode Dial lock release button p 45 ia Mode Dial p 24 Strap mount p 27 Microphone p 234 Lens release button p 40 Lens lock pin Lens mount Contacts p 15 Nomenclature Eyecup p 185 Viewfinder eyepiece lt INFO gt Info button p 60 61 200 225 244 336 M Power switch
176. eason communication with the battery is not possible or irregular Use this battery will be displayed If you select OK you can continue shooting However depending on the battery the battery info screen may not be displayed or may not display battery info correctly 338 Checking the Battery Information i Se SS ee eS i I Registering the Battery to the Camera You can register up to six LP E6 battery packs to the camera To register multiple battery packs to the camera do the procedure below for each battery pack 1 Press the lt INFO gt button e With the battery info screen displayed press the lt INFO gt button gt The battery history screen will appear gt Ifthe battery has not been registered it will be grayed out Battery info 2 Select Register e Select Register then press lt gt gt The confirmation dialog will appear Register Battery info 3 Select OK e Select OK then press lt gt gt The battery pack will be registered and the battery history screen will reappear Cancel OK gt The grayed out battery number will now be displayed in white letters e Press the lt MENU gt button The battery info screen will reappear Register new battery Info F Battery registration is not possible if size AA LR6 batteries are in the E Battery Grip BG E11 or if you use the AC Adapter Kit ACK E6 f six battery packs have already been registered Regi
177. ect Detail set eM Monochrome With a filter effect applied toa YN None monochrome image you can make Yervellow white clouds or green trees stand out Filter effect Or Orange R Red more G Green Filter Sample Effects N None Normal black and white image with no filter effects A The blue sky will look more natural and the white clouds will look Ye Yellow crisper Or Orange The blue sky will look slightly darker The sunset will look more brilliant 3 The blue sky will look quite dark Fall leaves will look crisper and R Red brighter G Green Skin tones and lips will appear muted Tree leaves will look crisper and brighter F Increasing the Contrast will make the filter effect more pronounced Toning Effect By applying a toning effect you can Detail set EM Monochrome PN None create a monochrome image in that color It can make the image look more Toning effect P Purple impressive G Green The following can be selected N None S Sepia B Blue P Purple or G Green 134 312 Registering a Picture Style mum You can select a base Picture Style such as Portrait or Landscape adjust its parameters as desired and register it under User Def 1 User Def 2 or User Def 3 You can create Picture Styles whose parameter settings such as sharpness and contrast are different You can also adjust the parameters of a Picture Style that has been registere
178. ect one of four methods to measure the subject brightness The metering mode is set automatically to evaluative metering in the lt E gt mode 1 Press the lt WB gt button 66 E 2 Select the metering mode While looking at the LCD panel turn the lt s Xs gt dial Evaluative metering Partial metering Spot metering CJ Center weighted average metering Evaluative metering This is a general purpose metering mode suited EEE ia Ete even for backlit subjects The camera sets the ii exposure automatically to suit the scene Partial metering Effective when the background is much brighter than the subject due to backlighting etc Partial metering covers approx 6 2 of the viewfinder area at the center 167 Selecting the Metering Mode C Spot metering This is for metering a specific spot of the subject or scene The metering is weighted at the center covering approx 1 5 of the viewfinder area CJ Center weighted average metering The metering is weighted at the center and then averaged for the entire scene F When lt e gt is set lt gt can be displayed in the viewfinder p 318 168 Setting Exposure Compensation mau Exposure compensation can brighten increased exposure or darken decreased exposure the standard exposure set by the camera Exposur
179. ection impossible search White balance Selectable AF point 61 points bracketi Canceled racteung Select AF area All modes Color space sRGB selection mode selected Long exposure AF area selection noise reduction Disable method M Fn button High ISO speed Standard Orientation linked Same for both noise reduction AF point vertical horizontal Highlight tone priority Disable Manual AF point Stops at AF Record function Standard selection pattern area edges File numbering Continuous AF point display Selected File name Preset code during focus constant Auto cleaning Enable VF display illumination Auto Dust Delete Data Erased AF Microadjustment Disable The default settings are shown on pages 86 to 89 57 Before You Start ee OO a SS S Camera Settings Live View Shooting Settings manual 58 Auto power off 1 min Live View shooting Enable Beep Enable AF mode Live mode Release shutter Grid display Off 5 Enable without card Aspect ratio 3 2 Image review 2 sec Exposure TOR z Enable Highlight alert Disable simulation AF point display Disable Silent LV shooting Mode 1 Histogram display Brightness Metering timer 16 sec Playback grid Off Magnification Approx 2x Movie Shooting Settings Image jump wi 10 images AF mode Live mode Auto rotate ond Grid display Off Movie playba
180. ed and focused Have the target person face the camera p 1 Display the Live View image e Press the lt gt button gt The Live View image will appear on Sy the LCD monitor sii aN When a face is detected the lt gt ra Mor frame will appear over the face to be focused f multiple faces are detected lt gt gt will be displayed Use lt gt to move the lt lt gt gt frame over the target face 208 Using AF to Focus 2 Focus the subject Press the shutter button halfway and the camera will focus the face covered by the lt 1 gt frame gt When focus is achieved the AF point will turn green and the beeper will sound gt If focus is not achieved the AF point will turn orange Ifa face cannot be detected the AF point lt gt will be displayed and AF will be executed at the center 3 Take the picture Check the focus and exposure then press the shutter button completely to take the picture p 198 Q f the focus is far off face detection will not be possible If the lens enables manual focusing even while the lens focus mode switch is set to lt AF gt turn the focusing ring to attain rough focus The face will then be detected and lt gt will be displayed An object other than a human face may be detected as a face e Face detection will not work if the face is very small or large in the picture too bright or too dark titled h
181. ed on the card p 181 Note that you cannot merge multiple images already recorded on the card e Are multiple exposures possible with Live View shooting With On Funce Ctrl set you can shoot multiple exposures with Live View shooting p 197 Note that t 84 Aspect ratio will be fixed at 3 2 e What file numbers are used for saving merged multiple exposures If all images are set to be saved the merged multiple exposure image file number will be the serial number coming after the file number of the final single exposure used to create the merged multiple exposure image e Will auto power off take effect during multiple exposure shooting As long as 2 Auto power off is not set to Disable the power will turn off automatically after 30 min of non operation If the auto power off takes effect multiple exposure shooting will end and multiple exposure settings will be canceled Before starting the multiple exposure shooting the auto power off will take effect as set with the camera and multiple exposure settings will be canceled 183 K7 Mirror Lockup me Although using the self timer or Remote Switch can prevent camera shake using mirror lockup to prevent camera vibrations mirror shock can also help when you use a super telephoto lens or shoot close ups macro photography 1 Set Mirror lockup to Enable e Under the 1 tab select Mirror lockup then press lt gt e Select Enable then press lt
182. eeeesetteeeenees 28 Recharge performance 338 Pressing completely Paper settings Print Order DPOF Printing effects Tilt correction Trimming Program AE me Program Shift a se Protect image erase protection 272 Ora 49 202 230 257 Quick Control 49 202 230 257 Quick Control Dial Quick mode AF RAW image processing aa RAW UPEG 1 eeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee Rec separately c ccceeeeeeeeees Rec to multiple Recharge Record TUNG iingie ndas Recording level Reduced display Registering and using an AP POI ortis kreida 324 Release shutter without card 32 Remote control shooting Remote switch shooting Resize Rotate image Safety Shift eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee Safety warnings Saturation SD SDHC SDXC card gt Card Second curtain synchronization 194 Self timer ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 113 186 Sensor cleaning ccceceeeees Sepia Monochrome Sharpness Shooting information display 246 Shooting mode Av Aperture priority AE Custom shooting M Manual exposure P Program AEB Tv Shutter priority AE a Scene Intelligent Auto 64 Shooting mode s settable FUNGON Ss scec eiae 346 Shutter synchronization 194 Shutter priority AE 162 219 399 Index Silent shooting Contin
183. ees 67 AF area selection mode AF Configuration Tool AF ON AF start button 44 AF point expansion Al FOCUS Al Focus AF Al SERVO Al Servo AF Accel decel tracking AF pt auto switching Tracking sensitivity Al Servo AP srein 394 ALL l I Only ossessi 231 Ambient light Sensor ee 20 Aperture priority AE 164 220 Area AF frame 23 72 77 Aspect ratio eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 204 Audio video OUT 068 259 268 Auto Lighting Optimizer 63 142 Auto playback eeceeeeeeeeeee Auto power off Auto reset Auto rotate of vertical images 280 Auto switch Card ceeeeeeeeeeeeee 117 Autofocus gt AF Automatic selection AF 73 77 Automatic selection of AF point 73 77 Av Aperture priority AE 164 220 Battery Battery Grip Beeperiiie n init tiie Black and white image 131 134 Bracketing ccceeceeeeee 141 170 Bulb exposures ceeeeeeeeeeteees 172 Camera Camera shake eee Clear camera settings Holding the camera Settings display Center weighted average Metering seriea a aE es 168 CF card gt Card Charge soree ara oaa 26 28 Chromatic aberration correction 148 CIGANING i ssesccasitesstesiisesegedeezieesatee 289 Clear camera settingS 0 00 56 Color space Color temperature 137 139 COlOrtOnG asseccecrcacccn
184. ees a ee U l OMMO M O Q e Using a tripod is recommended For handheld shooting using a fast shutter speed is recommended e HDR shooting of a moving subject is not recommended because the movement of the subject will appear as afterimages in the merged image HDR shooting is suited for still subjects In HDR shooting 3 images are captured with different shutter speeds set automatically Therefore even in Tv and M shooting modes the shutter speed will be shifted based on the shutter speed you set e To prevent camera shake the ISO speed may be set higher than usual f Auto Image Align is set to Enable and the HDR picture is shot handheld the edges of the photos will be cropped lowering the resolution slightly Also if the images cannot be aligned properly due to camera shake etc auto image alignment may not take effect Note that when shooting with excessively bright or dark exposure settings auto image alignment may not work properly f you perform handheld HDR shooting while Auto Image Align is set to Disable the 3 images may not be properly aligned and the HDR effect may be minimal e Auto image alignment may not work properly with repetitive patterns lattice stripes etc or flat single tone images e The color gradation of the sky or white walls may not be reproduced correctly Irregular colors or noise may appear e HDR shooting under fluorescent or LED lighting may result in unnatural color reproduct
185. enveneaceedos 133 Continuous Continuous shooting Contrast Copyright information Cropping information 065 Cross type focusing Custom Controls Custom Functions cceeeee Custom shooting mode 332 Custom WB Date Time 0 eee 36 Date time battery replacement cceeeeeeees Daylight saving time DC coupler Depth of field preview 165 198 201 Dial Main Dial Quick Control Dial Digital terminal 00 Dioptric adjustment ee Direct printing eeeeeeeeeeee Direct selection AF point DPOF ies 55 Drive mode Dust Delete Data eee Electronic level Erase image Error CodeS iias aiiin sans Evaluative metering exFAT Exposure compensation Exposure level increments Exposure level indicator 22 23 337 Exposure simulation 0 205 EXENSION siii sia 153 External Speedlite Flash EV CUp ss Sence cotiieti ieee Eje Fica d aoira Eyepiece COVET ceeeeee FE lock Feature guide File name File size Filter effect Final image simulation 201 227 Fine Image recording quality 119 Firmware Ver cceeceeeeeeeeeeeeee 354 395 Index First curtain synchronization 194 Flash Speedlite Custom Functions External Speedlite FE lock Flash sync speed 0 0 189 Manual flash 193 Shut
186. er does not function check the Eye Fi card and personal computer settings For details refer to the card s instruction manual e Depending on the wireless LAN s connection conditions the image transfer may take longer or it may be interrupted Because of the transmission function the Eye Fi card may become hot The battery power will be consumed faster During the image transfer auto power off will not take effect 345 Function Availability Table According to Shooting Mode mm Set automatically O User selectable Not selectable Disabled Function Still Photos Movies P Tv AviMIB amp All image quality settings selectable Oo POLO OO O Except M Automatically set Auto ISO ISO speed STOS oS Oln M Manual ololololo Olin M Automatic selection Ea GS mode EZ Picture Style Manual selection O2 O Oh OO O Auto oO O O 0 0 O Preset O O O O O O White balance Custom GO O OO O Color temperature setting EI G O Oo Correction Bracketing 2O 1 0 Or O O Auto Lighting Optimizer e ololololo O Lens aberration Peripheral illumination correction O Ololololo O correction Chromatic aberration correction O OlOoOlololo O Long exposure noise reduction OTOLOG OO High ISO speed noise reduction e OoOlolololo O Highlight tone priority SASIE IES AES O Multiple exposures ololololo
187. esources For more information about the recycling of this product please contact your local city office waste authority approved scheme or your household waste disposal service or visit www canon europe com environment EEA Norway Iceland and Liechtenstein 385 IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1 SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS This manual contains important safety and operating instructions for Battery Charger LC E6 amp LC E6E 2 Before using the charger read all instructions and cautionary remarks on 1 the charger 2 the battery pack and 3 the product using the battery pack CAUTION To reduce risk of injury charge only the Battery Pack LP E6 3 Other types of batteries may burst causing personal injury and other damage 4 Do not expose the charger to rain or snow 5 Use of an attachment not recommended or sold by Canon may result in fire electric shock or personal injury 6 To reduce risk of damage to electric plug and cord pull by plug rather than by cord when disconnecting charger 7 Make sure cord is located so that it will not be stepped on tripped over or otherwise subjected to damage or stress 8 Do not operate the charger with damaged cord or plug replace them immediately 9 Do not operate the charger if it has received a sharp blow been dropped or otherwise damaged in any way take it to a qualified serviceman 10 Do not disassemble the charger take it to a qualified serv
188. ess lt gt the movie will play frame by li gt Next frame frame If you hold down lt gt it will fast forward the movie gt gt Last frame Displays the movie s last frame X Edit Displays the editing screen p 263 E Playback position ee Playback time minutes seconds with Movie play count mm ss i Rec time set z por Time code hours minutes seconds frames with Movie hh mm ss ff f play count Time code set You can adjust the built in speaker s p 261 volume b atl Volume Peake RZE y turning the lt gt dial Fl With a fully charged Battery Pack LP E6 the continuous playback time at 23 C 73 F will be as follows approx 3 hr 30 min e By connecting commercially available headphones equipped with a 3 5 mm stereo mini plug to the camera s headphone terminal p 19 you can listen to the movie s sound p 235 e If you connect the camera to a TV set p 268 271 to play back a movie adjust the sound volume with the TV set Turning the lt 7 gt dial will not adjust the sound volume e f you took a still photo while you shot the movie the movie image displayed will look still for approx 1 sec 262 X Editing the Movie s First and Last Scenes m You can edit out the first and last scenes of a movie in 1 sec increments 1 On the movie playback screen select X gt The movie editing panel will be displayed at the bottom of the screen DP b g
189. et the ISO speed For details on the ISO speed see the next page Set the shutter speed and aperture Press the shutter button halfway and check the exposure level indicator To set the shutter speed turn the lt gt dial The settable shutter speeds depend on the frame rate lt f gt 0 I m 1 4000 sec 1 30 sec eo o 1 4000 sec 1 60 sec To set the aperture turn the lt gt dial e If it cannot be set set the lt LOCKR gt switch to the left then turn the lt g gt or lt gt dial Focus and shoot the movie The procedure is the same as steps 3 and 4 for Autoexposure Shooting p 218 223 Shooting Movies pe ee eee es ISO speed during manual exposure shooting e With Auto A the ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO 100 12800 e You can set the ISO speed manually within ISO 100 12800 in 1 3 stop increments Under t 492 ISO speed settings if you set ISO speed range s Maximum setting to 25600 H the maximum ISO speed for manual ISO speed setting will be expanded to H equivalent to 25600 Be aware that when you set Maximum to 25600 the maximum ISO speed will not be expanded and remains ISO 12800 e if 3 Highlight tone priority is set to Enable p 146 you can set the ISO speed within ISO 200 12800 depending on the ISO speed range setting e Under 2 ISO speed settings Auto ISO range and Min shutter spd cannot
190. evices compatible with MOV files Since hard disk recorders do not have an HDMI IN terminal the camera cannot be connected to a hard disk recorder with an HDMI cable e Even if the camera is connected to a hard disk recorder with a USB cable movies and still photos cannot be played nor saved Playback on the Camera s LCD Monitor p 261 267 You can play back movies on the camera s LCD monitor You can also edit out the movie s first and last scenes and play back the still photos and movies on the card in an automatic slide show Q A movie edited with a personal computer cannot be rewritten to the card and played back with the camera 259 m Enjoying Movies Playback and Editing with a Personal Computer p 390 The movie files recorded on the card can be transferred to a personal computer ii and played with ImageBrowser EX SEAS Q To have the movie play back smoothly on a personal computer use a high performance personal computer Regarding the computer hardware requirements for ImageBrowser EX refer to the PDF file ImageBrowser EX User Guide e If you want to use commercially available software to play back or edit the movies be sure it is compatible with MOV files For details on commercially available software contact the software maker 260 Playing Movies memme 1 Play back the image e Press the lt gt button to display images Select a movie Turn th
191. ewfinder or LCD panel turn the lt gt dial to set the desired setting e Use this dial to set the shutter speed aperture etc F The operations in 1 are also possible while the lt LOCK gt switch is set to the right Multi function lock p 47 45 Basic Operation Quick Control Dial N 4 1 After pressing a button turn the lt amp gt dial When you press a button such as lt WB gt lt AF DRIVE gt lt ISO 2 gt the respective function remains selected for 6 seconds 6 During this time you can turn the lt gt dial to set the desired setting When the function selection ends or if you press the shutter button halfway the camera will be ready to shoot Use this dial to select or set the white balance drive mode flash exposure compensation AF point etc Turn the lt gt dial only While looking at the viewfinder or LCD panel turn the lt gt dial to set the desired setting e Use this dial to set the exposure compensation amount the aperture setting for manual exposures etc F The operations in 1 are also possible while the lt LOCK gt switch is set to the right Multi function lock p 47 Touch Pad During movie shooting the touch pad provides a quiet way to adjust the shutter speed aperture ISO speed exposure compensation sound recording level and headphone volume p 236 This function works
192. f will not work The display time may vary depending on the image To view the slide show on a TV set see pages 268 and 271 267 Viewing the Images On TV la You can view the still photos and movies on a TV set Q e Adjust the movie s sound volume with the TV set The sound volume cannot be adjusted with the camera Before connecting or disconnecting the cable between the camera and television turn off the camera and TV set Depending on the TV set part of the image displayed may be cut off Viewing on High Definition HD TV Sets HDMI Cable HTC 100 sold separately is required 1 Connect the HDMI cable to the camera e With the plug s lt a HDMI MINI gt logo facing the front of the camera insert it i into the lt HDMI OUT gt terminal Ar Connect the HDMI cable to the TV set Connect the HDMI cable to the TV s HDMI IN port Turn on the TV and switch the TV s video input to select the connected port A Set the camera s power switch to lt ON gt 268 Viewing the Images on TV 5 Press the lt gt gt button gt The image will appear on the TV screen Nothing will be displayed on the camera s LCD monitor e The images will automatically be displayed at the TV s optimum resolution e By pressing the lt INFO gt button you can change the display format e To play back movies see page 261 Q The movie cannot be output at the sam
193. field by pressing the depth of field preview button e During continuous shooting the exposure set for the first shot will also be applied to subsequent shots You can also use a remote controller sold separately p 186 for Live View shooting 198 Shooting with the LCD Monitor SS aS TS il Enabling Live View Shooting Set 6 4 Live View shoot to Enable SHOOTA LV func EE Enaie In the lt GF gt mode it is displayed under Disable 62 Battery Life with Live View Shooting Temperature At 23 C 73 F At 0 C 32 F Possible shots Approx 200 shots Approx 180 shots The figures above are based on a fully charged Battery Pack LP E6 and CIPA Camera amp Imaging Products Association testing standards e With a fully charged Battery Pack LP E6 continuous Live View shooting is possible for approx 1 hr 30 min at 23 C 73 F Q e During Live View shooting do not point the lens toward the sun The sun s heat can damage the camera s internal components e Cautions for using Live View shooting are on pages 215 216 F e You can also focus by pressing the lt AF ON gt button When flash is used there will be two shutter sounds but only one shot will be taken If the camera is not operated for a prolonged period the power will turn off automatically as set with 2 Auto power off p 55 If 2 Auto power off is set to Disable Live View shooting will end automat
194. flect the setting s effect e NRu High ISO speed noise reduction p 143 You can set the noise reduction for high ISO speeds The displayed image will reflect the setting s effect If the effect is difficult to discern press the lt Q gt button to magnify the image Press the lt Q gt button to return to the normal view e 4L Image quality p 119 You can set the image quality of the JPEG image to be saved when converting the RAW image The image size displayed such as M ae X has a 3 2 aspect ratio The pixel count of each aspect ratio is indicated on page 288 284 RWI Processing RAW Images with the Camera sRGB Color space p 158 You can select either sRGB or Adobe RGB Since the camera s LCD monitor is not compatible with Adobe RGB the image will not look very different when either color space is set Clot Peripheral illumination correction p 147 If Enable is set the corrected image will be displayed If the effect is difficult to discern press the lt Q gt button to magnify the image and check the corners Press the lt Q gt button to return to the normal view The peripheral illumination correction applied with the camera will be less pronounced than with Digital Photo Professional provided software and may be less apparent In such a case use Digital Photo Professional to apply the peripheral illumination correction or Distortion correction When Enable is set
195. for changing the AF area selection mode AF area selection method vD M Fn button gt M Fn button After you press the lt E amp gt button each Main Dial time you press the lt M Fn gt button the AF area selection mode changes a amp Main Dial After you press the lt E gt button turning the lt gt dial changes the AF area selection mode F When E Main Dial is set use the lt 4 gt to move the AF point horizontally 100 EM Customizing AF Functions LSS a ae ee ees Orientation linked AF point You can set the AF area selection mode and manually selected AF point separately for vertical shooting and horizontal shooting Orientation linked AF point Same for both vert horiz Same for both vert horiz m The same AF area selection mode and Select separate AF points 0 manually selected AF point or Zone are used for both vertical shooting and horizontal shooting Select separate AF points The AF area selection mode and manually selected AF point or Zone can be set separately for each camera orientation 1 Horizontal 2 Vertical with the camera grip at the top 3 Vertical with the camera grip at the bottom Convenient when for instance you want to keep using the right AF point during all camera orientations When you manually select the AF area selection mode and AF point or Zone with Zone AF for each of the three camera orienta
196. g Dust When changing lenses do it quickly in a place with minimal dust When storing the camera without a lens attached be sure to attach the body cap to the camera Remove dust on the body cap before attaching it About Zooming To zoom turn the zoom ring on the lens with your fingers If you want to zoom do it before focusing Turning the zoom ring after achieving focus may throw off the focus slightly While pressing the lens release button turn the lens as shown by the arrow e Turn the lens until it stops then detach it e Attach the rear lens cap to the detached lens 40 Attaching and Detaching a Lens ESS R Attaching a Lens Hood When the dedicated EW 83H hood is attached to the EF 24 105mm f 4L IS USM lens it blocks stray light and protects the front of the lens from snow rain dust etc Before storing the lens in a bag etc you can attach the hood in reverse B Align the red dots on the hood and lens edges 2 Turn the hood as shown in the illustration Turn the lens hood clockwise until it attaches securely Q If the hood is not properly attached it may obstruct the image s periphery making it look dark e When attaching or detaching the lens hood grasp the base of the hood when turning it Grasping the hood s edges when turning it may deform the hood 41 About the Lens Image Stabilizer mx When you use the IS lens built in Imag
197. g and Removing the Battery cesceseeceeeeeereeeteeteeeees 30 Installing and Removing the Card ceceeceeseeeeseceeereeereeneeeeeeaes 31 Turning on the POWED cesseceseceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeesneeseneeeeeaees 34 Setting the Date Time and Zone 36 Selecting the Interface Language scceecesseeeeeereeeeeeetereeeneees 38 Attaching and Detaching a Lens ecceeeeeceeereeeeeeneeeneeeereetnennees 39 About the Lens Image Stabilizer eceeeeeseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeteeenneenees 42 Basic Operation tiressi e REANA E E E 43 Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions s seseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeer enee 49 MENU Menu KO olre 110 DSA 51 Before You Start Formatting th Cardisiis annata i 53 Setting the Power off Time Auto Power Off 55 Setting the Image Review Time cecceeteeeceeereeereeteeeneeeneees 55 Reverting the Camera to the Default Settings eeeee 56 Displaying the Grid and Electronic Level cesceceereeeteeteeere 59 O Feat rs G lderen ec et cleat ide cd le hl A oh eg 61 Contents 2 Basic Shooting EH Fully Automatic Shooting Scene Intelligent Auto G Full Auto Techniques Scene Intelligent Auto e eee 3 Setting the AF and Drive Modes AF Selecting the AF Mode c ccccsceceseseseeeeeseeseseseseeteeeeeeeeeeaes Selecting the AF Arearen a aa AF Area Selection Modes Pe About the AF Sensor cf c7st nae aun nnai
198. g liquid crystal In low temperatures the AF point s blinking p 74 may be difficult to see This is a characteristic of AF point display using liquid crystal If you set AF 4 Orientation linked AF point to HL Select separate AF points you can set the AF area selection mode and manually selected AF point or Zone separately for vertical and horizontal shooting p 101 With AF 4 Selectable AF point you can change the number of manually selectable AF points p 98 77 About the AF Sensor mem The camera s AF sensor has 61 AF points The illustration below shows the AF sensor pattern corresponding to each AF point With f 2 8 or larger maximum aperture lenses high precision AF is possible at the viewfinder center Depending on the lens attached to the camera the number of usable AF points and AF pattern will differ For details see pages 79 to 84 Diagram Cross type focusing f 4 horizontal f 5 6 vertical Cross type focusing Fa A 5 6 vertical f 5 6 horizontal He D H H q he he a 5 6 vertical L Dual cross type focusing focusing f 2 8 right diagonal f 2 8 left diagona 5 6 vertical f 5 6 horizontal The focusing sensor is geared to obtain higher precision focusing with f 2 8 or larger maximum aperture lenses A diagonal cross pattern makes it easier to focu
199. g movie shooting the image displayed will automatically reflect the effects of the settings listed below Final image simulation for movies e Picture Style All settings such as sharpness contrast color saturation and color tone will be reflected White balance White balance correction Exposure Depth of field Auto Lighting Optimizer Peripheral illumination correction Chromatic aberration correction Highlight tone priority 227 Shooting Movies Shooting Still Photos While shooting a movie you can also take a still photo by pressing the shutter button completely Taking still photos during movie shooting If you take a still photo during movie shooting the movie will record a still moment lasting approx 1 sec The captured still photo will be recorded to the card and the movie shooting will resume automatically when the Live View image is displayed The movie and still photo will be recorded as separate files on the card If Record func p 116 is set to Standard or Auto switch card the movies and still photos will be recorded to the same card If Rec separately or Rec to multiple is set the movies will be recorded to the card set for Playback The still photos will be recorded at the image recording quality set for the respective card Functions particular to still photo shooting are shown below Other functions will be the same as for movie shooting Function Settings
200. ge can also be transferred in this way Select Sel i and select Folder images not transfer d When you select a folder all the images in that folder not yet transferred to the personal computer will be selected Selecting Folder images failed transf will select the selected folder s images that failed to transfer Selecting Clear folder transf history will clear the transfer history of the images in the selected folder After clearing the transfer history you can select Folder images not transfer d and again transfer all the images in the folder e Allimage If All image is selected and you select Card images not transferred all the images on the card not yet transferred to a personal computer will be selected For a description of Card images failed transfer and Clear card s transf history see Sel E above Q f any screen other than EOS Utility s top screen is displayed on the personal computer Direct transfer is not displayed e During the image transfer certain menu options cannot be used Gl You can also transfer movies 312 Up to 9 999 images can be transferred in one batch Shooting is possible during the image transfer 13 Customizing the Camera You can customize various camera features to suit your picture taking preferences with Custom Functions Also the current camera settings can be saved under the Mode Dial s lt gt lt gt and lt gt positi
201. ge quality Stop Live View shooting when not shooting images e f you shoot a long exposure while the camera s internal temperature is high image quality may be degraded Stop Live View shooting and wait a few minutes before shooting again White lt I gt and Red lt i gt Internal Temperature Warning If the camera s internal temperature increases due to prolonged Live View shooting or a high ambient temperature a white icon lt gt will appear If you continue shooting while this icon is displayed the image quality may degrade You should stop the Live View shooting and allow the camera to cool down before shooting again Ifthe camera s internal temperature further increases while the white icon lt gt is displayed a red icon lt gt will start blinking This blinking icon is a warning that the Live View shooting will soon end automatically If this happens you will not be able to shoot again until the camera s internal temperature decreases Turn off the power and let the camera rest for a while e Using Live View shooting at a high temperature for a prolonged period will cause the lt i gt and lt i gt icons to appear earlier When you are not shooting turn off the camera f the camera s internal temperature is high the image quality of high ISO speed images or long exposures may be degraded even before the white icon lt E gt is displayed Shooting Result f you take the picture in magnified view t
202. ges Quickly eeccceseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeees 249 Qe Magnified VieWsae ia n tonit dees eas 251 0 Comparing Images Two image Display sceeeeee 253 f Rotating the Image 254 Setting RANGS es casccseeefescsesvececzcesacessenseaisecegetegstssactscessisasiessenacztae 255 Q Quick Control During Playback eeccceseeseseeeseeeseeteteeees 257 Contents Enjoying Movies PUM Playing MOVIOS 3 3 ise tirh caer diel ee a X Editing the Movie s First and Last Scenes 0 ee 263 Slide Show Auto Playback cc ceeceeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeteresereeneeeaeeeaes 265 Viewing the Images ON TV secceeceeeeeeeeeeeeereeeeeeereeneeeeeneeeeaeenee 268 e Protecting Imag ssesnin e a n a 272 COPYING IMAGES AAE E EEE E E 274 1i Erasing Images nyir genae e S 277 Changing Image Playback Settings 0 0 0 0 eee eee 279 Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness 0 eee 279 Auto Rotation of Vertical Images eects 280 10 Post Processing Images 281 RWI Processing RAW Images with the Camera c ccceeee 282 m RESIZO issu aaah reae ated paaa aa Aeee a a a aa ians 287 11 Sensor Cleaning 289 Joa Automatic Sensor Cleaning cccccccccesesesseeeseseteseteesesesees 290 Appending Dust Delete Data ceceeceeceeneeeeeeeereeeeneeteneeereeee 291 Manual Sensor Cleaning 0 0 ccc eee esse eeeteeteeteeeneee 293 Preparing to Print 2iciscccc2 ezceseceseuscssaueeats ceed c
203. gt 2 Focus the subject then press the shutter button completely gt The mirror will swing up and the lt 47 gt icon will blink on the LCD panel 3 Press the shutter button completely again gt The picture is taken and the mirror goes back down Q In very bright light such as at the beach or a ski slope on a sunny day take the picture promptly after mirror lockup e Do not point the camera toward the sun The sun s heat can scorch and damage the shutter curtains f you use the self timer and mirror lockup in combination with a bulb exposure keep pressing the shutter button completely self timer delay time bulb exposure time If you let go of the shutter button during the self timer countdown there will be a shutter release sound but no picture will be taken During mirror lockup shooting function settings and menu operations etc are disabled Fl e Even if the drive mode is set to continuous shooting only one shot can be taken e You can also use the self timer with mirror lockup f 30 seconds elapse after the mirror has locked up it will go back down automatically Pressing the shutter button completely again locks up the mirror again For mirror lockup using a tripod and Remote Switch RS 80N3 sold separately or Timer Remote Controller TC 80N3 sold separately is recommended p 185 e You can also use a remote controller sold separately p 186 Setting the remote controller to a 2 sec delay is
204. gt gt button you can display the image highlighted in blue as a single image e To return to the single image display press the lt M D gt button ir e Magnified view jump display setting ratings protecting the image and deleting the image are possible e By pressing the lt INFO gt button you can change the shooting information display e You cannot play back movies in the two image display 253 3 Rotating the Image mum You can rotate the displayed image to the desired orientation 1 Select Rotate image Protect images Under the 1 tab select Rotate Rotate i i aes image then press lt gt Print order Image copy 2 Select an image Turn the lt gt dial to select the image to be rotated e You can also select an image on the index display p 249 3 Rotate the image e Each time you press lt gt the image will rotate clockwise as follows 90 270 gt 0 e To rotate another image repeat steps 2 and 3 e Press the lt MENU gt button to return to the menu Fl e If you have set 1 Auto rotate to On 6 p 280 before taking vertical shots you need not rotate the image as described above If the rotated image is not displayed in the rotated orientation during image playback set 1 Auto rotate to On O e A movie cannot be rotated 254 Setting Ratings sx You can rate images and movies with one of five rating marks E EN
205. gt button Each time you press the lt M Fn gt button the AF area selection mode changes 212 Using AF to Focus 3 Select the AF point e The AF point selection will change in the direction you tilt the lt lt gt If you press lt gt straight down the center AF point or center Zone will be selected apata fo E e You can also use the lt gt and lt gt CESS SHSSSee SR dials to select the AF point The lt 7 gt OOU0 OOO OU00 y aey A 0go dial selects an AF point in the horizontal direction and the lt gt dial selects an AF point in the vertical direction A Focus the subject e Aim the AF point over the subject and press the shutter button halfway gt The Live View image will turn off the reflex mirror will go back down and AF will be executed No picture is taken gt When focus is achieved the beeper will sound and the Live View image will reappear gt The AF point used to focus will light 125 56 324 84 2 3 1 5141 59100 up in green gt If focus is not achieved the AF point will blink in orange co 5 Take the picture R Check the focus and exposure then press the shutter button completely to take the picture p 198 Eri at mg 125 56 22 18 4253 514 100 Fl You cannot take a picture during autofocusing Take the picture while the Live V
206. he mode the ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO 100 12800 ISO speed in the P Tv Av and B modes The ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO 100 12800 e Under 82 ISO speed settings p 126 if you set the ISO speed range s Maximum setting to 25600 H in the P Av or B mode the automatic ISO range will be expanded to H equivalent to ISO 25600 Be aware that when you set Maximum to 25600 the maximum ISO speed will not be expanded and remains ISO 12800 e If 3 Highlight tone priority is set to Enable p 146 the ISO speed will be ISO 200 12800 Under 2 ISO speed settings Auto ISO range and Min shutter spd cannot be set p 127 128 for movie shooting Also ISO speed range cannot be set in the Tv mode Q If Minimum is set to L 50 and Maximum to H1 51200 or H2 102400 in ISO speed range and you switch from still photo shooting to movie shooting the minimum setting for automatic ISO range will be ISO 100 and the maximum will be H ISO 25600 except in and Tv shooting modes The ISO speed cannot be expanded to ISO 50 or ISO 51200 102400 221 Shooting Movies a a Se MM Notes for Autoexposure Shutter priority AE and Aperture priority AE F e You can lock the exposure AE lock by pressing the lt gt button except in the G mode p 171 After applying AE lock during movie shooting you can cancel it by pressing the lt E gt button
207. he lt Q gt button in step 3 The magnification will differ depending on the pixel count of Image quality set in RAW image processing With lt gt you can scroll around the magnified image To cancel the magnified view press the lt Q gt button again Images with Aspect Ratio Setting Images shot in a Live View shooting aspect ratio 4 3 16 9 1 1 will be displayed in the respective aspect ratio JPEG images will also be saved in the set aspect ratio 283 RAW Processing RAW Images with the Camera RAW Image processing Options e 0 Brightness adjustment You can adjust the image brightness up to 1 stop in 1 3 stop increments The displayed image will reflect the setting s effect e wp White balance p 137 You can select the white balance If you select K8 turn the lt s3 gt dial to set the color temperature on the setting screen The displayed image will reflect the setting s effect e 5 Picture Style p 129 You can select the Picture Style To set the parameters such as Sharpness press lt gt to display the setting screen Turn the lt gt dial to select the Picture Style Turn the lt gt dial to select a parameter to be adjusted then turn the lt gt dial to set it To return to the screen in step 3 press lt gt The displayed image will reflect the setting s effect e B Auto Lighting Optimizer p 142 You can set the Auto Lighting Optimizer The displayed image will re
208. he Live View image or movie shooting image is not displayed during multiple exposure shooting e If On ContShtng is set Live View display image review after image capture and image playback are not possible during shooting p 177 The multiple exposure image is shot in quality When the image recording quality is set to M or S GM the multiple exposure image will be recorded in quality p 183 362 Troubleshooting Guide SESS EE SS ee When I use the lt Av gt mode with flash the shutter speed becomes slow e If you shoot at night when the background is dark the shutter speed becomes slow automatically slow sync shooting so that both the subject and background are properly exposed To prevent a slow shutter speed under 81 External Speedlite control set Flash sync speed in Av mode to 1 200 1 60 sec auto or 1 200 sec fixed p 192 The flash does not fire Make sure the flash or PC sync cord is securely attached to the camera e If you use a non Canon flash unit with Live View shooting set 6 4 Silent LV shoot to Disable p 206 The flash always fires at full output e If you use a flash unit other than an EX series Speedlite the flash will always be fired at full output p 189 When the Flash metering mode flash Custom Function is set to TTL autoflash the flash will always be fired at full output p 196 Flash exposure compensation cannot be set If flash exposure co
209. he desired aperture and the camera sets the shutter speed automatically to obtain the standard exposure suiting the subject brightness This is called aperture priority AE A higher f number smaller aperture hole will make more of the foreground and background fall within acceptable focus On the other hand a lower f number larger aperture hole will make less of the foreground and background fall within acceptable focus lt Av gt stands for Aperture value aperture opening With a low aperture f number f 5 6 With a high aperture f number f 32 1 Set the Mode Dial to lt Av gt 2 Set the desired aperture While looking at the LCD panel turn the lt sA gt dial Focus the subject Press the shutter button halfway gt The shutter speed is set automatically A Check the viewfinder display and shoot As long as the shutter speed is not blinking a standard exposure will be obtained 164 Av Aperture Priority AE Ewe SS eee Q zs e Ifthe 30 shutter speed blinks it indicates si s i underexposure IN Turn the lt gt dial to set a larger aperture lower f number until the shutter speed blinking stops or set a higher ISO speed f the 8000 shutter speed blinks it indicates overexposure Turn the lt gt dial to set a smaller aperture higher aperture f number until the shutter speed blinking stops or set a lower ISO speed F Aperture Display T
210. he exposure may not come out as desired Return to the normal view before taking the picture In magnified view the shutter speed and aperture will be displayed in orange Even if you take the picture in magnified view the image will be captured in the normal view If 2 Auto Lighting Optimizer p 142 is not set to Disable the image may look bright even if a decreased exposure compensation or decreased flash exposure compensation has been set e If you use a TS E lens to shift the lens vertically or use an Extension Tube the standard exposure may not be obtained or an irregular exposure may result 215 4 Live View Shooting Cautions Live View Image Under low or bright light conditions the Live View image may not reflect the brightness of the captured image Ifthe light source within the image changes the screen may flicker If this happens stop the Live View shooting and resume shooting under the actual light source to be used If you point the camera in a different direction it may throw off the Live View image s correct brightness momentarily Wait until the brightness level stabilizes before shooting If there is a very bright light source in the picture such as the sun the bright area may appear black on the LCD monitor However the actual captured image will correctly show the bright area e In low light if you set the 2 LCD brightness to a bright setting noise or irregular colors may appear
211. he higher the f number the smaller the aperture opening will be The apertures displayed will differ depending on the lens If no lens is attached to the camera 00 will be displayed for the aperture Depth of Field Preview The aperture opening diaphragm changes only at the moment when the picture is taken Otherwise the aperture remains fully open Therefore when you look at the scene through the viewfinder or on the LCD monitor the depth of field will look narrow Press the depth of field preview button to stop down the lens to the current aperture setting and check the depth of field range of acceptable focus F A higher f number will make more of the foreground and background fall within acceptable focus However the viewfinder will look darker The depth of field effect can be clearly seen on the Live View image as you change the aperture and press the depth of field preview button p 198 The exposure will be locked AE lock while the depth of field preview button is pressed 165 M Manual Exposure memm In this mode you set both the shutter speed and aperture as desired To determine the exposure refer to the exposure level indicator in the viewfinder or use a commercially available exposure meter This method is called manual exposure lt M gt stands for Manual Va 1 Set the Mode Dial to lt M gt 2 Set the shutter speed and aperture To set the shutter speed turn
212. he moment of exposure is called camera shake It can cause blurred pictures To prevent camera shake note the following Hold and steady the camera as shown on the preceding page e Press the shutter button halfway to autofocus then slowly press the shutter button completely F e Inthe P Tv Av M B modes pressing the lt AF ON gt button will execute the same operation as pressing the shutter button halfway Ifyou press the shutter button completely without pressing it halfway first or if you press the shutter button halfway and then press it completely immediately the camera will take a moment before it takes the picture Even during menu display image playback or image recording you can instantly go back to shooting ready by pressing the shutter button halfway 44 Basic Operation Mode Dial Turn the dial while holding down the lock release button at the center of the dial 1 After pressing a button turn the lt gt dial When you press a button such as lt WB gt lt AF DRIVE gt lt ISO amp 4 gt the respective function remains selected for 6 seconds 6 During this time you can turn the lt gt dial to set the desired setting When the function selection ends or if you press the shutter button halfway the camera will be ready to shoot e Use this dial to select or set the metering mode AF mode ISO speed AF point etc 2 Turn the lt gt dial only While looking at the vi
213. he white balance bracketing amount In step 2 for white balance correction when you turn the lt gt dial the m mark on the screen will change to m 3 points Turning the dial to the right sets the B A bracketing and turning it to the left sets the M G bracketing gt On the right Bracket indicates the bracketing direction and correction amount Pressing the lt p gt button will cancel ayn all the WB Shift Bkt settings E3 M 2 Shift EB Clear all Press lt gt to exit the setting and Bracket BOK Gs return to the menu Bracketing Sequence The images will be bracketed in the following sequence 1 Standard white balance 2 Blue B bias and 3 Amber A bias or 1 Standard white balance 2 Magenta M bias and 3 Green G bias F During WB bracketing the maximum burst for continuous shooting will be lower and the number of possible shots will also decrease to one third the normal number e You can also set white balance correction and AEB together with white balance bracketing If you set AEB in combination with white balance bracketing a total of nine images will be recorded for a single shot Since three images are recorded for one shot the card will take longer to record the shot When white balance bracketing is set the white balance icon will blink You can change the number of shots for white balance bracketing p 316 BKT stands for bracketing 1
214. hooting information When printing you can imprint the date and time in the picture by using the date and time recorded in the shooting information p 301 305 is displayed e Ifthe card has recorded a number of images greater than the camera can display will be displayed p 256 In the viewfinder the AF point display speed is slow e In low temperatures the display speed of the AF points may become slower due to the AF point display device s liquid crystal characteristics The display speed will return to normal at room temperature The LCD monitor does not display a clear image e Ifthe LCD monitor is dirty use a soft cloth to clean it e In low or high temperatures the LCD monitor display may seem slow or may look black It will return to normal at room temperature 367 Troubleshooting Guide Eye Fi settings does not appear e Eye Fi settings will appear only when an Eye Fi card is inserted into the camera If the Eye Fi card has a write protect switch set to the LOCK position you will not be able to check the card s connection status or disable Eye Fi card transmission p 344 Playback Problems Part of the image blinks in black e 3 Highlight alert is set to Enable p 247 A red box is displayed on the image e 3 AF point disp is set to Enable p 247 The image cannot be erased Ifthe image is protected it cannot be erased p 272 The movie cannot play
215. ht information Enter author s name Copy rightintomnatien Enter copyright details Delete copyright information De Firmware Ver For updating the firmware 4 Custom Functions Orange C Fn1 Exposure 315 C Fn2 Display Operation Customize camera functions as desired 318 C Fn3 Others 320 C Fn4 Clear Clears all Custom Function settings 314 x My Menu Green My Menu settings Register frequently used menu options and Custom Functions 331 354 Menu Settings i ne For Movie Shooting Shooting 4 Movie Red Page AF mode Live mode X Live mode Quick mode 239 Grid display Off 3x3 6x4 3x3 diag 32 239 1920x1080 T3 I Ta Au IPB Movie recording size 1280x720 IIo 0 AL IPB 231 640x480 36 2 PBI Sound recording Auto Manual Disable Sound recording Recording level 234 Wind filter Disable Enable Silent LV shooting Mode 1 Mode 2 Disable 240 4 sec 16 sec 30 sec 1 min 10 min Metering timer 30 min 240 1 In the lt gt mode these menu options are displayed under 32 2 In the lt E gt mode it will be Sound recording On Off O Shooting 5 Movie Red Time code Count up Start time setting Movie rec count 237 Movie play count Drop frame Silent Control Enable Disable 236 Movie
216. htness is close to what the captured image will look like e If lt A gt is blinking it indicates that the Live View image is not being displayed at the suitable brightness due to low or bright light conditions However the actual image recorded will reflect the exposure setting e If flash is used or bulb is set the lt HM gt icon and histogram will be grayed out for your reference The histogram may not be properly displayed in low or bright light conditions 200 Shooting with the LCD Monitor ii SS a eS Final Image Simulation The final image simulation reflects the effects of the Picture Style white balance etc in the Live View image so you can see what the captured image will look like During shooting the Live View image will automatically reflect the function settings listed below Final image simulation during Live View shooting e Picture Style All parameters such as sharpness contrast color saturation and color tone are reflected White balance White balance correction Exposure with Expo simulation Enable Depth of field with depth of field preview button ON Auto Lighting Optimizer Peripheral illumination correction Highlight tone priority Aspect ratio image area confirmation 201 Shooting Function Settings sx ISO amp 4 AF DRIVE WB GEJ 22 Settings While the Live View image is displayed if you press the lt ISO amp 4 gt lt AF DRIVE gt lt WB gt lt
217. ically after 30 min camera power remains on e With the stereo AV cable provided or HDMI cable sold separately you can display the Live View image on a TV p 268 271 199 Shooting with the LCD Monitor aaa About the Information Display e Each time you press the lt INFO gt button the information display will change AF mode AME Live mode e FX Face detection Live mode NMM Quick mode Shooting mode fJ Di Histogram Drive mode White balance A a y Picture Style FEB Auto Lighting Optimizer m Eye Fi card transmission status AF point Live mode GPS connection indicator Digital compass Card for recording gt E RAW AL ues Magnification playback omw Magnifying position Flash exposure Ts HVA E z FEBJAEB Eos Mi Exposure compensation i ga 125 56 224 simulation AE lock Flash ready Image recording quality Shutter speed HDR shooting Multiple exposures Aperture Battery check Highlight tone priority AEB ISO speed Possible shots Exposure level F The histogram can be displayed when Expo simulation Enable is set p 205 e You can display the electronic level by pressing the lt INFO gt button p 60 Note that if the AF mode is set to 4 Live mode or the camera is connected to a TV set with an HDMI cable the electronic level cannot be displayed e When lt J gt is displayed in white it indicates that the Live View image brig
218. ications Safety Warnings isrsnn Mid iri nre delta el 383 15 Software Start Guide 11 Index to Features mu Power AF e Charging the battery gt p 28 e AF mode gt p 70 e Battery check gt p 35 e AF area selection mode gt p 72 Battery information check gt p 338 e AF point selection gt p 74 e Power outlet gt p 342 Al Servo AF characteristics gt p 85 Auto power off gt p 55 e AF Custom Functions gt p 94 e AF Microadjustment gt p 104 Card e Manual focusing gt p 111 e Format gt p 53 Metering e Select card gt p 116 A Release shutter without card gt p 32 Metering mode gt p 167 Tene Drive e Attaching Detaching gt p 39 Drive mode pie e Self timer gt p 113 Zoom gt p 40 Maxi burst gt 1 123 e Image Stabilizer gt p 42 SaXImMuUm aurs P Recording Images Basic Settings e Record func gt p 116 e Language gt p 38 eCreate select a folder gt p 150 e Date Time Zone gt p 36 e File name gt p 152 Beeper gt p 348 ofFile No gt p 154 Copyright information gt p 156 g e Clear all camera settings gt p 56 Image Quality Image recording quality gt p 119 Viewfinder ISO speed gt p 124 e Dioptric adjustment gt p 43 e Picture Style gt p 129 e Eyepiece cover gt p 185 White balance gt p 137 e Grid display gt p 59 e Auto Lighting Optimizer gt p 142 e Electronic level gt p 59 Noise reduction for high ISO speeds gt p 143 LCD Monitor e Noise reduction for l
219. iceman when service or repair is required Incorrect reassembly may result in a risk of electric shock or fire 11 To reduce risk of electric shock unplug charger from outlet before attempting any maintenance or cleaning MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION Unless otherwise stated in this manual there are no user serviceable parts inside Refer servicing to qualified serviceman CAUTION RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO LOCAL REGULATION 386 A 388 Software Start Guide This chapter gives an overview of the software on the EOS Solution Disk CD ROM provided with the camera and explains how to install the software on a personal computer It also explains how to view the PDF files on the EOS Software Instruction Manuals Disk CD ROM EOS Solution Disk EOS Software Instruction Software Manuals Disk Software Start Guide EOS Solution Disk z This disk contains various software for EOS cameras Q EOS Utility Communication Software for the Camera and Computer e You can download images still photos movies you have shot with the camera to your computer e You can set the various settings of the camera from your computer You can shoot photos remotely by connecting the camera to your computer Digital Photo Professional Image Viewing and Editing Software e You can view edit and print shot images on your computer at high speed e Yo
220. ie shooting press the lt AF ON gt button You cannot focus by pressing the shutter button Under t 85 Movie shoot btn if 89 is selected you can press the shutter button completely to start or stop the movie shooting p 240 e Monaural sound is recorded by the camera s built in microphone p 218 e By connecting a stereo microphone commercially available equipped with a 3 5 mm mini plug to the camera s external microphone IN terminal p 19 stereo sound recording is possible e By connecting stereo headphones commercially available equipped with a 3 5 mm mini plug to the camera s headphone terminal p 19 you can listen to the sound during movie shooting 226 Shooting Movies a SS Notes on Movie Shooting F e You can use Remote Controller RC 6 sold separately p 186 to start and stop the movie shooting if the drive mode is lt 7 gt or lt j 2 gt Set the shooting timing switch to lt 2 gt 2 sec delay then press the transmit button If the switch is set to lt gt immediate shooting still photo shooting will take effect e With a fully charged Battery Pack LP E6 the total movie shooting time will be as follows approx 1 hr 30 min at room temperature 23 C 73 F and approx 1 hr 20 min at low temperatures 0 C 32 F Final Image Simulation The final image simulation is a function that allows you to see the effects of the Picture Style white balance etc on the image Durin
221. iew image is displayed 213 Focusing Manually mx You can magnify the image and focus precisely with manual focus 1 Set the lens focus mode switch to lt MF gt Turn the lens focusing ring to focus roughly Move the magnifying frame Use lt gt to move the magnifying frame to the position where you want to focus e Pressing lt gt straight down will return the magnifying frame to the image center Press the lt Q gt button gt The area within the magnifying frame will be magnified Each time you press the lt Q gt button the view will change as follows 3 Magnify the image Approx gt Approx gt Normal 5x 10x view 4 Focus manually While looking at the magnified image AE lock turn the lens focusing ring to focus Magnified area position e After achieving focus press the lt Q gt Magnification button to return to the normal view 5 Take the picture Check the focus and exposure then press the shutter button completely to take the picture p 198 214 Q Live View Shooting Cautions Image Quality When you shoot at high ISO speeds noise dots of light banding etc may become noticeable Shooting in high temperatures may cause noise and irregular colors in the image f Live View shooting is used continuously for a long period the camera s internal temperature may rise degrading ima
222. ill appear on the personal computer Q After the EOS Utility screen appears do not operate EOS Utility If any screen other than EOS Utility s top screen is displayed Direct transfer in step 5 on page 312 will not be displayed The image transfer function will not be available F e f the EOS Utility screen does not appear refer to the PDF Software Instruction Manual p 393 on the CD ROM Before disconnecting the cable turn off the camera Hold the plug not the cord to pull out the cable uam Transferring RAW JPEG Images image transfer For RAW JPEG images you can specify which image to transfer On the next RAW 4JPEG transfer JPEG only page in step 2 select RAW JPEG RAW only P RAW 4JPEG transfer and select the image to be transferred JPEG only RAW only or RAW JPEG 310 Transferring Images to a Personal Computer BSS 22538 SS SS SSS Select the Images to be Transferred e Sel lmage Py g 1 Select Image transfer Resize e Under the gt 2 tab select Image Rating transfer then press lt gt Slide show 1 p Image transfer Image jump w 4 Image transfer Select Image sel transfer Image sel transfer Select Image sel transfer then RAW JPEG transfer JPEG only press lt 8 gt Slmage sel transfer Select Sel Image v Images to transfer e Select Sel Image then press lt gt X Images failed trans Mtns ies Select the images to be transfer
223. image distortion due to the lens characteristics is corrected If Enable is set the corrected image will be displayed The image periphery will be cropped in the corrected image Since the image resolution may look slightly lower use the Picture Style s Sharpness parameter to make adjustments as necessary Q When processing images with Distortion correction set to Enable AF point display information p 247 and Dust Delete data p 291 will not be appended to the image 285 RAWI Processing RAW Images with the Camera or Chromatic aberration correction When Enable is set the lens chromatic aberrations color fringing along the subject s outline can be corrected If Enable is set the corrected image will be displayed If the effect is difficult to discern press the lt Q gt button to magnify the image Press the lt Q gt button to return to the normal view Q About peripheral illumination correction distortion correction and chromatic aberration correction To execute peripheral illumination correction distortion correction and chromatic aberration correction with the camera the data of the lens used for the shot must be registered in the camera If the lens data has not been registered in the camera use EOS Utility provided software p 390 to register the lens data Q Processing RAW images in the camera will not produce the same results as processing RAW images with Digital Photo Professional
224. ime as the exposure During noise reduction shooting is still possible as long as the maximum burst indicator in the viewfinder shows 1 or higher e Images taken at ISO 1600 or higher may look grainier with the Enable setting than with the Disable and Auto settings e With Enable if a long exposure is shot with the Live View image displayed BUSY will be displayed during the noise reduction process The Live View display will not appear until the noise reduction is completed You cannot take another picture 145 MM Highlight Tone Priority mem You can minimize overexposed highlight areas SM ari Fi 1 1 Select Highlight tone priority Picture Style Auto Under the 3 tab select ON exp DOSE EOC HON EOE Highlight tone priority then press High ISO speed NR al Highlig p y p Highlight tone priority OFF lt gt Dust Delete Data Multiple exposure Disable HDR Mode Disable HDR Highlight tone priority Select Enable Disable Turn the lt gt dial to select Enable Enable then press lt gt Highlight details are improved The pra aac nen dynamic range is expanded from the TEA Help standard 18 gray to bright highlights The gradation between the grays and highlights becomes smoother 3 Take the picture e The image will be recorded with highlight tone priority applied Q e With Enable the Auto Lighting Optimizer p 142 is automatically set to Disable and the
225. in the Live View image However the noise or irregular colors will not be recorded in the captured image When you magnify the image the image sharpness may look more pronounced than it really is Custom Functions e During Live View shooting certain Custom Function settings will not take effect p 314 Lens and Flash The focus preset feature on super telephoto lenses cannot be used e FE lock and modeling flash will not work if an external Speedlite is used 216 Shooting Movies Movie shooting is enabled by setting the Live View shooting Movie shooting switch to lt gt The movie recording format will be MOV Q Cards that can record movies e When shooting movies use a large capacity card with a fast writing reading speed as shown in the table Compression Method p 231 IPB 10 MB sec or faster 6 MB sec or faster ALL I l only 30 MB sec or faster 20 MB sec or faster CF Card SD Card e If you use a slow writing card when shooting movies the movie may not be recorded properly Also if you play back a movie on a card with a slow reading speed the movie may not play back properly e If you want to shoot still photos while shooting a movie you will need an even faster card To check the card s reading writing speed refer to the card manufacturer s Web site Shooting Movies mam Autoexposure Shooting When the shooting mode is set to lt
226. instructions such as the image selection quantity to print etc You can print multiple images in one batch or give the print order to a photofinisher e Transferring Images to a Personal Computer p 309 You can connect the camera to a personal computer and operate the camera to transfer images recorded on the card to the personal computer Preparing to Print mem The direct printing procedure can be performed entirely with the camera while you look at the LCD monitor Connecting the Camera to a Printer E DET Set the camera s power switch to lt OFF gt 2 Set up the printer e For details refer to the printer s instruction manual 3 Connecting the camera to the printer e Use the interface cable provided with the camera Connect the cable to the camera s lt DIGITAL gt terminal with the cable plug s lt lt gt icon facing the front of the camera To connect to the printer refer to the printer s instruction manual A Turn on the printer 5 Set the camera s power switch to lt ON gt gt Some printers may make a beeping sound Preparing to Print E a EER P4 PictBridge aes Wasi Pi aaPress SET D to prin 6 Play back the image e Press the lt gt gt button gt The image will appear and the lt gt icon will appear on the upper left to indicate that the camera is connected to a printer Q Movies cannot be printed The c
227. int is set to Select separate AF points you can register the AF point separately for the vertical camera grip at top or bottom and horizontal orientations 4 When you press the lt AF ON gt button assigned to this function or press the lt gt button the camera will switch to the registered AF area selection mode and manually selected AF point To cancel the registered AF point hold down the lt E amp gt button and press the lt ISO 4 gt button The registered AF point will also be canceled if you select 4 Clear all camera settings N Fl e When an AF point is registered the following will be displayed 61 point automatic selection AF 12 HP Single point Spot AF Single point AF AF point expansion SEL 1 Center SEL HP Off center When registered with SEL or SEL HP the registered AF point will blink 324 2 2 Custom Controls AFOFF AF stop The AF will stop while you hold down the button assigned to this function Convenient when you want to lock the focus during Al Servo AF AFe Switch to registered AF function After setting AF area selection mode p 72 Tracking sensitivity p 90 Acceleration deceleration tracking p 91 AF point auto switching p 92 Al Servo 1st image priority p 94 and Al Servo 2nd image priority p 95 and assigning this function to a button you can apply these settings while you hold down the assigned button for AF Convenient when you want to change the
228. ion of the illuminated areas e With HDR shooting the three images will be merged after you take a picture Therefore it will take a longer time to record the HDR image to the card than with normal shooting During the merging of the images BUSY will be displayed and you cannot take another picture until the merging is completed e In HDR mode the options dimmed in the camera menu cannot be set When you set HDR mode the Auto Lighting Optimizer will be set automatically to Disable It will revert to the original setting when you cancel the HDR mode F f the image recording quality is set to RAW the HDR image will be recorded in L quality If the image recording quality is set to RAW JPEG the HDR image will be recorded in the JPEG quality set e You can also set HDR shooting with t 93 HDR Mode 176 Multiple Exposures You can shoot two to nine exposures to be merged into one image If you shoot multiple exposure images with Live View shooting p 197 you can see how the single exposures merge while shooting 1 Press the lt 51 gt button es Select multiple exposure e Turn the lt gt dial to select h Hor Multiple exposure Combine multiple images then press lt gt gt The multiple exposure setting screen will appear Multiple exposure 3 Set Multiple exposure ALICE ESS ee e Select On Func Ctrl or On Func Ctrl chiens On ContShtng then press lt gt B
229. is Auto the Standard Picture Style will be set for shooting 179 Multiple Exposures 9 Shoot subsequent exposures gt 180 When On Func Ctrl is set the merged multiple exposure image will be displayed With Live View shooting the multiple exposure images merged so far will be displayed By pressing the lt INFO gt button you can display only the Live View image After you shoot the set number of exposures multiple exposure shooting will be canceled With continuous shooting after you finish shooting the set number of exposures while holding down the shutter button the shooting will stop With multiple exposures the more exposures there are the more noticeable the noise irregular colors and banding will be Also as noise increases with higher ISO speeds shooting at low ISO speeds is recommended If Additive is set the image processing after taking the multiple exposures will take time The access lamp will light up for longer than usual If you perform Live View shooting while On Func Ctrl and Additive are both set the Live View function will stop automatically when the multiple exposure shooting ends In step 9 the brightness and noise of the multiple exposure image displayed during Live View shooting will be different from the final multiple exposure image recorded If On ContShtng is set let go of the shutter button after shooting the set number of exposures If the power switch is set t
230. isia Au AR acini 191 7 8 Shooting Movies 9 Contents Shooting with the LCD Monitor Live View Shooting 197 Shooting with the LCD Monitor Shooting Function Settings c ceccecesereseeeereeeeeeseeeteseneeneeeaees Menu Function Settings 0 0 ccc eee eee eee cee tee teen teeeeeaee Using AF tO FOCUS iroi enes i ae a E sie Focusing Manually ccccceceeceeeeeeereeeeeeaeeeeeeeeseeeeeeesnresereereee PH Shooting Movies ceccccccscscecececeeeseececeseeeseeeeceseeeseeeeeeneaeaens 218 Autoexposure Shooting cecceecesscesereeereeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeneeeaeees 218 Shutter priority AB enero aa 219 Aperture priority AE irsin aeaaea a a 220 Manual Exposure Shooting sse ssseeneisieeneieisinenererernerernnrnee 223 Shooting Still Photos sioan einige ee doao es 228 Shooting Function Settings c cecceceseeeereeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeaees 230 Setting the Movie Recording SiZe ceceeeeeeeeeeereeeteeeteeneenees 231 Setting the Sound Recording cescceseeeceeeeeeeeeeneeetreeneeeneeenees 234 Silent Control 236 Setting the Time Code 0 eccecececeeeseeeeceeeseeecereeeeeeesaeeeatenaeenaees 237 Menu Function Settings ccecceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenreeeneeereee 239 Image Playback gt Image Playback coina erin arate 244 INFO Shooting Information Display cccsscseseeeeeseeeeeees 246 E li Searching for Ima
231. it a movie using time code it is recommended not to shoot still photos during movie shooting Operation Problems I cannot change the setting with lt 4 gt lt gt or lt lt 3 gt e Set the lt LOCKB gt switch to the left lock release p 47 Check the 4 2 Multi function lock setting p 319 The camera button dial s function has changed Check the 4 2 Custom Controls setting p 321 BITIEK 0 Ya lt 3 The menu screen shows few tabs and options e Inthe lt J gt mode only certain menu tabs and options are displayed Set the shooting mode to lt P Tv Av M B gt p 51 The file name s first character is an underscore _ e Set the color space to sRGB If Adobe RGB is set the first character will be an underscore p 158 366 Troubleshooting Guide E E ee The fourth character in the file name changes e With 1 File name select the camera s unique file name or the file name registered under User setting 1 p 152 The file numbering does not start from 0001 e Ifthe card already contains recorded images the image number may not start from 0001 p 154 The shooting date and time displayed is incorrect e The correct date and time has not been set p 36 Check the time zone and daylight savings time p 37 The date and time is not in the picture The shooting date and time does not appear in the picture The date and time is instead recorded in the image data as s
232. ivity Locked on 1 e Accel decel tracking 0 AF pt auto switching 0 The camera will try to continue focusing the subject even if an obstacle enters the AF points or if the subject strays from the AF points Effective when there may be an obstacle blocking the subject or when you do not want to focus the background F If an obstacle gets in the way or if the subject moves away from the AF points for a prolonged period and the default setting is unable to track the target subject setting Tracking sensitivity to Locked on 2 may give better results p 90 86 MM Selecting Al Servo AF Characteristics For a Subject _ SSS SS SS SS SS I Case 3 Instantly focus on subjects suddenly entering AF points mem y Q x Once an AF point starts tracking the a oy ee subject this setting enables the camera Instantly focus on subjects to focus consecutive subjects at different suddenly entering AF points n x i aa aksa distances If a new subject appears in Y Accel decel tracking ga front of the target subject the camera will Gai Abpialitolsintchind ate aa start focusing the new subject Also INFO Jat RATED effective when you want to always focus Default settings on the closest subject Tracking sensitivity E Responsive 1 e Accel decel tracking 1 AF pt auto switching 0 ir If you want to quickly focus a subject appearing suddenly setting Tracking sensitivity to 2 may give better re
233. k of Adobe Systems Incorporated e Windows is a trademark or registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries e Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks or registered trademarks of Apple Inc in the United States and other countries CompactFlash is a trademark of SanDisk Corporation SDXC logo is a trademark of SD 3C LLC e HDMI HDMI logo and High Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC e All other corporate and product names and trademarks mentioned in this manual are the property of their respective owners About MPEG 4 Licensing This product is licensed under AT amp T patents for the MPEG 4 standard and may be used for encoding MPEG 4 compliant video and or decoding MPEG 4 compliant video that was encoded only 1 for a personal and non commercial purpose or 2 by a video provider licensed under the AT amp T patents to provide MPEG 4 compliant video No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG 4 standard Notice displayed in English as required 381 Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used with genuine Canon accessories Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and or accidents such as fire etc caused by the malfunction of non genuine Canon accessories e g a leakage and or explosion of a battery pack Please note th
234. ke i e Flash exposure compensation Flash exposure compensation The same setting as Flash exposure compensation on page 188 can be set For details refer to the Speedlite s instruction manual e Flash exposure bracketing Flash exposure bracketing While the flash output is changed automatically three shots are taken For details on FEB Flash Exposure Bracketing refer to the Speedlite s instruction manual Q When using second curtain synchronization set the shutter speed to 1 25 sec or slower If the shutter speed is 1 30 sec or faster first curtain synchronization will be applied even if Second curtain synchronization is set F e By selecting Clear flash settings you can revert the flash settings to their defaults e With an EX series Speedlite not compatible with flash function settings you can only set the following Flash firing E TTL II meter and Flash exposure compensation under Flash function settings Shutter synchronization can also be set with certain EX series Speedlites If flash exposure compensation is set with the Speedlite you cannot set the flash exposure compensation on the camera with the lt ISO G4 gt button or flash function settings If it is set with both the camera and Speedlite the Speedlite s setting overrides the camera s 195 MEW Setting the Flash SS SE Flash Custom Function Settings For details on the Speedlite s Custom Functions refer to
235. l not be automatically rotated for the image review Ifthe vertical image is taken while the camera is pointed up or down the image may not be rotated automatically for playback e If the vertical image is not automatically rotated on the personal computer screen it means the software you are using is unable to rotate the image Using the provided software is recommended 280 Post Processing Images You can process RAW images with the camera or resize shrink JPEG images e A x icon at the upper right of a page title indicates that the function can be used when the Mode Dial is set to lt P Tv Av M B gt The function cannot be used in the lt J gt mode Q The camera may not be able to process images taken with another camera e Post processing images as described in this chapter is not possible if the camera is set for HDR shooting or multiple exposures or while it is connected to a personal computer via the lt DIGITAL gt terminal RAW Processing RAW Images with the Camera m You can process images with the camera and save them as JPEG images While the RAW image itself does not change you can process the RAW image according to different conditions to create any number of JPEG images from it Note that M and S images cannot be processed with the camera Use Digital Photo Professional provided software p 390 to process those images a E 1 Select RAW image processing Protect images Under the L
236. le image display you can turn the lt gt dial to jump through the images forward or back according to the jump method set a 1 Select Image jump wi 2 Resize Under the 2 tab select Image Rating jump w 23 then press lt gt Slide show Image transfer TERRES Select the jump method Turn the lt gt dial to select the jump method then press lt gt Image jump w Jump 10 images Display images one by one Jump 10 images Jump 100 images Display by date Display by folder Display movies only Display stills only Display by image rating p 255 Turn the lt 7 gt dial to select the rating AHNANMAAAAN Browse by jumping Press the lt gt gt button to play back images On the single image display turn the lt gt dial Playback position F To search images according to the shooting date select Date To search images according to folder select Folder Ifthe card contains both Movies and Stills select either one to display only movies or still photos Ifno images match the selected Rating you cannot browse through the images with the lt gt dial 250 Q Magnified View memm You can magnify a captured image by approx 1 5x to 10x on the LCD monitor 1 Magnify the image The image can be magnified during image playback single image display during image review after image capture and from shooting ready state e
237. lect Copyright information Per SET UPA Custom shooting mode C1 C3 Under the 4 tab select Copyright Clear all camera settings i i lt Ge1 gt e aration information then press lt gt firmware ver 1 0 0 Copyright information 2 Select the option to be set Turn the lt gt dial select either Enter author s name Enter author s name or Enter Enter copyright details copyright details then press lt gt Enter author s name 3 Enter text XXXXX XXXX Press the lt Q gt button and the text palette will be highlighted in a color frame Text can be entered Operate the lt gt dial or lt 4 gt to move the and select the desired character Then press lt gt to enter it You can enter up to 63 characters To delete a character press the lt f gt button A Exit the setting e After entering the text press the lt MENU gt button gt The information will be saved and the screen will return to step 2 156 Setting Copyright Information i ae a Checking the Copyright Information Display copyright info When you select Display copyright Author info in step 2 on the preceding page ASAE TENE you can check the Author and Copyright Copyright information that you Canon Inc entered Deleting the Copyright Information When you select Delete copyright information in step 2 on the B preceding page you can delete the
238. lect other images to be erased repeat step 3 i a Erase images il A Erase the images Press the lt f gt button e Select OK then press lt G gt gt The selected images will be erased Erase selected images Cancel uam Erasing All Images in a Folder or Card You can erase all the images in a folder or on a card at one time When 11 Erase images is set to All images in folder or All images on card all the images in the folder or card will be erased F To also erase protected images format the card p 53 When All images on card is selected the images will be erased on the card selected under 1 Record func card folder sel with Record play Playback 278 Changing Image Playback Settings mas Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness The LCD monitor s brightness is adjusted automatically for optimum viewing You can set the automatic adjustment s brightness level brighter or darker or adjust the brightness manually oa mM o x 1 Select LCD brightness ns SET UP2 o power off 1 min e Under the 2 tab select LCD LCD brightness _Auto__ i lt 6e1 gt Date Time Zone 28 02 12 13 30 brightness then press LCD brightness t lt SC 2 Select Auto or Manual ba a e Turn the lt 7 gt dial to make the os A Pee E i unia selection 3 Adjust the brightness While referring to the gray chart turn the lt gt dial then press
239. lity mm You can select the pixel count and the image quality There are eight JPEG image recording quality settings ML ML AM aM AS A S1 S2 3 There are three RAW image quality settings MWM M M S M p 122 Image quality Image review 2 sec Beep Enable Release shutter without card ON Lens aberration correction With Standard Auto switch card Rec to multiple set Image quality Standard AL 2245760x3840 t 9991 RAW fa RAW RAW E RAW at JPEG amp dL al AM aM 4S1 dS1 S2 S3 With Rec separately set Img type size Rec separately ii AL 224 5760x3840 1 9991 i aL E a Image quality Rec separately i AL 22M 5760x3840 t 9991 AL al AM aM ASI dSi S2 S3 RAWE RAW E RAW 1 Select Image quality e Under the 481 tab select Image quality then press lt gt 2 Select the image recording quality e To select a RAW setting turn the lt gt dial To select a JPEG setting turn the lt gt gt dial On the upper right the M megapixels x number indicates the recorded pixel count and is the number of possible shots displayed up to 9999 e Press lt gt to set it Under 1 Record func card folder sel if Record func is set to Rec separately turn the lt gt dial lt gt On the screen that appears turn the lt gt dial to select the image recording quality then press lt gt 119
240. low on the left and on the right are used to focus Effective when it is difficult to track a moving subject with just one AF point With Al Servo AF the manually selected AF point lt gt must focus track the subject first However it is easier to focus the target subject than with Zone AF With One Shot AF when focus is achieved with an expanded AF point the expanded AF point lt gt will also be displayed along with the manually selected AF point lt gt oa aga al aoa a 75 AF Area Selection Modes AF point expansion Manual selection surrounding points The manually selected AF point lt gt and adjacent AF points lt gt are used to focus The AF point expansion is larger than with AF point expansion Manual selection a so the focusing is executed over a wider area Effective when it is difficult to track a moving subject with just one AF point Al Servo AF and One Shot AF work in the same way as with AF point expansion Manual selection a mode p 75 oa Bae aa ao am aom aaa og oo cia io 0 a aaa Zone AF Manual selection of zone The 61 AF points are divided into nine zones for focusing All the AF points in the selected zone are used for the automatic selection of the point of focus It makes achieving focus easier than with single point AF or AF point expansion and it is effective for moving subjects However since it is inclined to focus the nearest subject focusi
241. ls M 3840x2560 3408x2560 3840x2160 2560x2560 9 8 megapixels 8 7 megapixels 8 3 megapixels 6 6 megapixels M 3960x2640 3520x2640 3960x2228 2640x2640 10 45 megapixels 9 3 megapixels 8 8 megapixels 7 0 megapixels s1 2880x1920 2560x1920 2880x1624 1920x1920 5 5 megapixels 4 9 megapixels 4 7 megapixels 3 7 megapixels S 2880x1920 2560x1920 2880x1620 1920x1920 5 5 megapixels 4 9 megapixels 4 7 megapixels 3 7 megapixels 52 1920x1280 1696x1280 1920x1080 1280x1280 2 5 megapixels 2 2 megapixels 2 1 megapixels 1 6 megapixels 53 720x480 640x480 720x400 480x480 350 000 pixels 310 000 pixels 290 000 pixels 230 000 pixels 204 EM Menu Function Settings Q e For asterisked image recording quality the pixel count does not exactly match the set aspect ratio e The image area displayed for the asterisked aspect ratio is slightly larger than the recorded area Check the captured images on the LCD monitor when shooting f you use a different camera to directly print images shot with this camera in the 1 1 aspect ratio the images may not be correctly printed Fil With 9 2 LV shooting area display you can set the display method for the shooting area p 318 e Exposure simulation Exposure simulation displays and simulates how the brightness of the actual image exposure will look Enable Gi The displayed image brightness will be close to the actu
242. lso when it was last used Serial No Date last used Look for the serial number Saye Refer to the battery s serial number Cy 7c400300 4E 93 21 09 2011 label and look for the battery s serial c54406dc sz 98 30 09 2011 number on the battery history screen gt You can check the respective battery pack s remaining capacity and the cE date when it was last used a Delete info Remaining capacity Deleting the Registered Battery Pack Information 1 Select Delete info e Follow step 2 on page 339 to select Delete info then press lt gt 2 Select the battery pack information to be deleted Select the battery pack information to be deleted then press lt gt gt lt y gt will appear To delete information for another battery pack repeat this procedure 3 Press the lt gt button gt The confirmation dialog will appear A Select OK e Select OK then press lt gt a gt The battery pack information will be deleted and the screen in step 1 will reappear 341 Using a Household Power Outlet sx With the AC Adapter Kit ACK E6 sold separately you can connect the camera to a household power outlet and not worry about the remaining battery level 1 Connect the DC Coupler s plug e Connect the DC Coupler s plug to the AC Adapter s socket Connect the power cord Connect the power cord as shown in the illustration e After using the camera unplug the power
243. lt gt e You can adjust Auto to one of three levels and Manual to one of seven levels LCD brightness LCD brightness Manual Fa lt r Adjust brightness OK Automatic adjustment Adjust brightness OK Manual adjustment Q While Auto is set be careful not to obstruct the round external light sensor p 20 on the right of the LCD monitor with your finger etc F To check the image s exposure looking at the histogram is recommended p 248 279 Changing Image Playback Settings M Auto Rotation of Vertical Images Vertical images are rotated automatically so they are displayed vertically on the camera s LCD monitor and on the personal computer instead of horizontally The setting of this feature can be changed 1 Select Auto rotate Under the 1 tab select Auto rotate then press lt gt SET UPI apem WEH Set the auto rotation LOff_ it Select the desired option then press lt gt e Onn The vertical image is automatically rotated during playback on both the camera s LCD monitor and on the computer e On The vertical image is automatically rotated only on the computer e Off The vertical image is not automatically rotated Q Auto rotation will not work with vertical images captured while auto rotation was Off They will not rotate even if you later switch it to On for playback F Immediately after image capture the vertical image wil
244. may no longer be correct Inthe X Live mode pressing the lt Q gt button will not magnify the image Fl e Inthe Live mode or amp face detection Live mode if you shoot a peripheral subject and it is slightly out of focus aim the center AF point over the subject to focus then take the picture e The external Speedlite will not emit the AF assist beam However if an EX series Speedlite sold separately equipped with a LED light is used the LED light will turn on automatically for AF assist when necessary in the Live mode and amp face detection Live mode 210 Using AF to Focus _ ee eae eS Shooting conditions that can make focusing difficult e Low contrast subjects such as the blue sky and solid color flat surfaces Subjects in low light Stripes and other patterns where there is contrast only in the horizontal direction Under a light source whose brightness color or pattern keeps changing Night scenes or points of light Under fluorescent or LED light sources or when the image flickers Extremely small subjects Subjects at the edge of the picture Subjects strongly reflecting light The AF point covers both a near and faraway subject such as an animal in a cage Subjects that keep moving within the AF point and cannot keep still due to camera shake or subject blur A subject approaching or moving away from the camera Autofocusing while the subject is way out of focus Soft focus effect
245. mpensation has already been set with the Speedlite flash exposure compensation cannot be set with the camera When the Speedlite s flash exposure compensation is canceled set to 0 flash exposure compensation can be set with the camera High speed sync cannot be set in the lt Av gt mode e Under 1 External Speedlite control set Flash sync speed in Av mode to Auto p 192 The shutter makes two shooting sounds during Live View shooting Ifyou use flash the shutter will make two sounds each time you shoot p 199 363 Troubleshooting Guide During Live View and movie shooting a white M or red icon is displayed Itindicates that the camera s internal temperature is high If the white lt gt icon displayed the still photo s image quality may deteriorate If the red lt i gt icon is displayed it indicates that the Live View or movie shooting will soon be terminated automatically p 215 241 Movie shooting terminates by itself Ifthe card s writing speed is slow movie shooting may stop automatically When the compression method is set to IPB use a CF card with a reading writing speed of at least 10 MB per sec and a SD card with a reading writing speed of at least 6 MB per sec When the compression method is set to ALL I I only use a CF card with a reading writing speed of at least 30 MB per sec and a SD card with a reading writing speed of at least 20 MB per sec To find out the card s
246. n be used when the Mode Dial is set to lt P Tv Av M B gt Inthe lt G gt mode the AF mode and AF point AF area selection mode will be set automatically F lt AF gt stands for autofocus lt MF gt stands for manual focus AF Selecting the AF Mode mam You can select the AF mode to suit the shooting conditions or subject In the lt E gt mode Al Focus AF is set automatically 1 On the lens set the focus mode switch to lt AF gt 2 Press the lt AF DRIVE gt button 6 3 Select the AF mode While looking at the LCD panel turn the lt gt dial ONE SHOT One Shot AF Al FOCUS Al Focus AF Al SERVO Al Servo AF F In the P Tv Av M B shooting modes AF is also possible by pressing the lt AF ON gt button One Shot AF for Still Subjects Suited for still subjects When you press the shutter button halfway the camera will focus only once When focus is achieved the AF point that achieved focus will be displayed and the focus confirmation light lt gt in the viewfinder will also light up e With evaluative metering the exposure setting will be set at the same time focus is achieved While you hold down the shutter button halfway the focus will be locked You can then recompose the shot if desired 70 AF Selecting the AF Mode a ES EE I Fl f focus cannot be achieved the focus confirmation light lt gt and AF status indicator l
247. n tracking AF point auto switching 373 Specifications AF fine adjustment AF assist beam e Exposure Control Metering modes Metering range Exposure control ISO speed Recommended exposure index ISO speed settings Exposure compensation AE lock HDR Shooting Dynamic range adjustment Effect Auto image align e Multiple Exposures Shooting method No of multiple exposures Multiple exposure control 374 AF Microadjustment All lenses by same amount or Adjust by lens Emitted by the EOS dedicated external Speedlite 63 zone TTL full aperture metering Evaluative metering linked to all AF points Partial metering approx 6 2 of viewfinder at center Spot metering approx 1 5 of viewfinder at center Center weighted average metering EV 1 20 at 23 C 73 F with EF 50mm f 1 4 USM lens ISO 100 Program AE Scene Intelligent Auto Program Shutter priority AE Aperture priority AE Manual exposure Bulb exposure Scene Intelligent Auto ISO 100 12800 set automatically P Tv Av M B Auto ISO ISO 100 25600 in 1 3 or whole stop increments or ISO expansion to L 50 H1 equivalent to ISO 51200 H2 equivalent to ISO 102400 ISO speed range Auto ISO range and Auto ISO minimum shutter speed settable Manual 5 stops in 1 3 or 1 2 stop increments AEB 3 stops in 1 3 or 1 2 stop increments Can be combined with manual exposure compensation Auto Applied in O
248. nding on the shutter speed aperture subject conditions brightness lens type flash use etc With the AF mode set to One Shot AF and the Image Stabilizer turned off when using the following lenses EF 300mm f 4L IS USM EF 28 135mm 3 5 5 6 IS USM EF 75 300mm f 4 5 6 IS USM EF 100 400mm 4 5 5 6L IS USM H Using the Self timer Use the self timer when you want to be in the picture 1 Press the lt AF DRIVE gt button 66 2 Select the self timer While looking at the LCD panel turn the lt gt dial to select the self timer 10 sec self timer 2 2 sec self timer 3 Take the picture Look through the viewfinder focus the subject then press the shutter button completely You can check the self timer operation with the self timer lamp beeper and countdown display in seconds on the LCD panel gt Two seconds before the picture is taken the self timer lamp will stay on and the beeper will sound faster 113 amp Using the Self timer ice 8 l _ U Q If you will not look through the viewfinder when you press the shutter button attach the eyepiece cover p 185 If stray light enters the viewfinder when the picture is taken it may throw off the exposure Fil The lt 2 gt enables you to shoot while not touching the camera mounted on a tripod This prevents camera shake while you shoot still lifes or bulb exposures e After taking self timer shots playi
249. nds and frames It is mainly used during movie editing Set the time code with t 95 Time code In the lt J gt mode this function is displayed in 63 MENU s Count Up Rec run The time code counts up only while you are shooting a movie Free run The time code counts up whether you are shooting or not Start Time Setting You can set the time code s start time Manual input setting You can freely set the hour minute second and frames Reset The time set with Manual input setting and Set to camera time is reset to 00 00 00 00 Set to camera time Sets hours minutes and seconds to match the camera s internal clock Frames will be set to 00 Movie Recording Count You can select what to display on the movie shooting screen Rec time Indicates the elapsed time from the start of the movie shooting Time code Indicates the time code during movie shooting Q Shooting still photos during movie shooting will cause a discrepancy between the actual time and time code e f Free run is set and you change the time zone or daylight saving time p 36 the time code will be affected 237 MW Setting the Time Code e o SSS Fl Regardless of the Movie rec count setting the time code will always be recorded to the movie file Movie Playback Count You can select what to display on the movie playback screen Rec time Displays the recording time and play
250. ne Shot AF mode with evaluative metering when focus is achieved Manual By AE lock button Auto 1 EV 2 EV 3 EV Natural Art standard Art vivid Art bold Art embossed Possible Function control priority Continuous shooting priority 2 to 9 exposures Additive Average Bright Dark Specifications e Shutter Type Shutter speeds e Drive System Drive modes Continuous shooting speed Max burst e External Speedlite Compatible Speedlites Flash metering Flash exposure compensation FE lock PC terminal External Speedlite control Electronically controlled focal plane shutter 1 8000 sec to 1 60 sec Scene Intelligent Auto mode X sync at 1 200 sec With a wide angle lens the shutter speed may be 1 60 sec or slower 1 8000 sec to 30 sec bulb Total shutter speed range Available range varies by shooting mode Single shooting High speed continuous shooting Low speed continuous shooting Silent single shooting Silent continuous shooting 10 sec self timer remote control 2 sec self timer remote control High speed continuous shooting Max approx 6 shots sec Low speed continuous shooting Max approx 3 shots sec Silent continuous shooting Max approx 3 shots sec JPEG Large Fine Approx 65 shots approx 16270 shots RAW Approx 13 shots approx 18 shots RAW JPEG Large Fine Approx 7 shots approx 7 shots Figures are based on Canon s testing stand
251. ng a specific target is harder than with single point AF or AF point expansion The AF point s achieving focus is displayed as lt gt 76 AF Area Selection Modes 61 point automatic selection AF All the AF points are used to focus This mode is set automatically in the lt J gt mode L With One Shot AF pressing the shutter button E halfway will display the AF point s lt gt that i achieved focus If multiple AF points are displayed it means they all have achieved focus This mode tends to focus the nearest subject With Al Servo AF the manually selected p 74 AF n point lt gt is used first to achieve focus The AF as i point s achieving focus is displayed as lt J gt With 61 point automatic selection AF or Zone AF the active AF point lt L gt will keep switching to track the subject in Al Servo AF mode However under certain shooting conditions such as when the subject is small it may not be able to track the subject Also in low temperatures the tracking response is slower With Single point Spot AF focusing with the Speedlite s AF assist beam may be difficult If the camera cannot focus with the EOS dedicated Speedlite s AF assist beam set the AF area selection mode to Single point AF Manual selection and select the center AF point to focus When the AF point s light up part or all of the viewfinder may light up in red This is a characteristic of AF point display usin
252. ng back the image p 244 to check focus and exposure is recommended e When using the self timer to shoot only yourself use focus lock p 67 on an object at about the same distance as where you will stand e To cancel the self timer after it starts press the lt AF DRIVE gt button 114 Image Settings This chapter explains image related function settings Image recording quality ISO speed Picture Style white balance Auto Lighting Optimizer lens peripheral illumination correction chromatic aberration correction and other functions e A x icon atthe upper right of a page title indicates that the function can be used when the Mode Dial is set to lt P Tv Av M B gt The function cannot be used in the lt gt mode MaM Selecting the Card for Recording and Playback mm If either a CF card or SD card is already inserted you can start shooting When only one card is inserted the procedures described on pages 116 to 118 are not necessary If you insert both a CF card and SD card you can select the recording method and select which card to use for recording and playing back images Recording Method with Two Cards Inserted AFC Mo x 1 Select Record functcard folder SET UPI Record func card folder sel sel Eoman Sieme e Under the 1 tab select Record ile name Auto rotate rel func card folder sel then press Format card lt Ge gt Record func card folder sel Select Record f
253. ns nae Lenses and Usable AF Points eect eee testes tee eeeeneeeee 79 Selecting Al Servo AF Characteristics For a Subject 85 Customizing AF Functions cc ceccceceeeceeereeereeeceeeeeneeeneeneeenneeaee 94 Fine Adjustment of AF s Point of Focus AF Microadjustment 104 When Autofocus Fails 0 c cece esee ee eeeeeeseeeeeeeneeneenne 110 MF Manual Focusing 111 Gy Selecting the Drive MOde c cccceeesceceeeeeseeeeseeseseeseeeeeaes 112 Using the Self timerz s csscrctearscrun tsar a 113 4 Image Settings Selecting the Card for Recording and Playback Setting the Image Recording Quality 0 00 ISO Setting the ISO Spee d eeceececseseseeeseseeeteeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeaees 343 Selecting a Picture Style ceccceeceeceseseseseeeeeseeeeeeeeteeeeteees 313 Customizing a Picture Style 313 Registering a Picture Style cccccceceecesseeseeeetteseeeeteees WB Setting the White Balance cceceseseeeeeseetesesesesteeseseeeees a Custom White Balance 000 eee cee cere tee teeeeeeeee E3 Setting the Color Temperature scccecesseseeeeteteeeteeeerees WE White Balance Correction ccsccsssseseceseeeeeeseseeeeeeseeeseeeeeaees Correcting the Brightness and Contrast Automatically Auto Lighting Optimizer 142 7 Contents Noise Reduction Settings Highlight Tone Priority pisessi eyiini Lens Peripheral Illumination Chromatic Abe
254. nual Sensor Cleaning a 2 SY Q e While cleaning the sensor never do any of the following Doing any of the following will cut off the power and close the shutter The shutter curtains and image sensor may then get damaged Setting the power switch to lt OFF gt e Removing or inserting the battery The surface of the image sensor is extremely delicate Clean the sensor with care e Use a plain blower without any brush attached A brush can scratch the sensor Do not insert the blower tip inside the camera beyond the lens mount If the power is cut off the shutter will close and the shutter curtains or reflex mirror may get damaged Never use canned air or gas to clean the sensor The blowing force can damage the sensor or the spray gas can freeze on the sensor e Ifthe battery level becomes low while you clean the sensor the beeper will sound as a warning Stop cleaning the sensor f a smudge that cannot be removed with a blower remains having the sensor cleaned by a Canon Service Center is recommended 294 Printing Images and Transferring Images to a Computer e Printing p 298 You can connect the camera directly to a printer and print out the images on the card The camera is compatible with A PictBridge which is the standard for direct printing e Digital Print Order Format DPOF p 305 DPOF Digital Print Order Format enables you to print images recorded on the card according to your printing
255. nvenient if you want to organize images according to cards or folders If the replacement card or existing folder already contains images recorded previously the file numbering of the new images may continue from the file numbering of the existing images in the card or folder If you want to save images with the file numbering starting from 0001 use a newly formatted card each time File numbering after File numbering after replacing the card creating a folder Card B B Card A Ci y fel 0051 001 0051 gt 2001 File numbering is reset Manual Reset To reset the file numbering to 0001 or to start from file number 0001 in a new folder When you reset the file numbering manually a new folder is created automatically and the file numbering of images saved to that folder starts from 0001 This is convenient if you want to use different folders for the images taken yesterday and the ones taken today for example After the manual reset the file numbering returns to continuous or auto reset There will be no Manual reset confirmation screen Q If the file number in folder 999 reaches 9999 shooting will not be possible even if the card still has storage capacity The LCD monitor will display a message telling you to replace the card Replace it with a new card 155 m Setting Copyright Information mum When you set the copyright information it will be recorded to the image as Exif information oan Oo x 1 Se
256. o lt OFF gt or the battery is replaced after you set multiple exposure settings multiple exposure shooting will be canceled If you switch the shooting mode to lt E gt lt gt while shooting multiple exposure shooting will end When multiple exposure is set or during multiple exposure shooting you cannot use the functions dimmed in the camera menu If you connect the camera to a personal computer or printer multiple exposure shooting is not possible When On Func ctrl is set you can press the lt gt gt button to view the multiple exposures taken so far or delete the last single exposure p 182 You can also set multiple exposure with t 83 Multiple exposure Multiple Exposures Merging multiple exposures with an image recorded in the card You can select an image recorded in the card as the first single exposure The original of the selected image will remain intact You can only select QM images You cannot select M M S or JPEG images TROD CxPOSITE 1 Select Select image for multi expo Multiple exposure On Func ctrl Select Select image for multi Multi expos ctrl Additive No of exposures 3 expo then press lt gt P Save source imgs All images gt The images in the card will be displayed Continue Mult exp 1 shot only Select image for multi expo 2 Select an image Turn the lt gt dial to select the image to be used as the first single exposure then press lt gt
257. o ISO You can set the automatic ISO speed range for Auto ISO within ISO 100 25600 You can set the minimum limit within ISO 100 12800 and the maximum limit within ISO 200 25600 in whole stop increments ISO speed settings 1 Select Auto ISO range ISO speed Auto Select Auto ISO range then press ISO speed range 100 25600 lt gt Auto ISO range 100 12800 s Min shutter spd Auto Auto ISO range 2 Set the minimum limit E Minimum Maximum Select the minimum limit box then 100 12800 press lt gt Turn the lt gt dial to select the oK Cancel minimum limit ISO speed then press lt gt Auto ISO range 3 Set the maximum limit Minimum Maximum Select the maximum limit box then 100 25600 press lt gt 7 Turn the lt gt dial to select the oK Cancel maximum limit ISO speed then press lt gt A Exit the setting e Turn the lt gt dial to select OK then press lt gt gt The menu reappears F The Minimum and Maximum settings will also apply to the ISO speed safety shifts minimum and maximum ISO speed p 317 127 ISO Setting the ISO Speed uam Setting the Minimum Shutter Speed for Auto ISO When Auto ISO is set you can set the minimum shutter speed 1 250 sec to 1 sec so that the automatically set shutter speed is not too slow This is convenient in the lt P gt and lt Av gt modes when you use a wide angle lens to shoot a moving subject You can minimi
258. o nine zones for focusing 61 point automatic selection AF All the AF points are used to focus This mode is set automatically in the lt aj gt mode Select the AF Area Selection Mode Select the AF area selection mode Press the lt E gt button Look through the viewfinder and press the lt M Fn gt button gt Press the lt M Fn gt button to switch the AF area selection mode F e With AF4 Select AF area selec mode you can limit the selectable AF area selection modes p 99 e Ifyou set AF4 AF area selection method to amp Main Dial you can select the AF area selection mode by pressing the lt EJ gt button then turning the lt s gt dial p 100 73 Selecting the AF Area Selecting the AF Point Manually You can manually select the AF point or zone With 61 point automatic selection AF you can set the starting AF point for Al Servo AF 1 Press the lt EJ gt button gt The AF points will be displayed in the viewfinder In AF point expansion modes effective adjacent AF points will also be displayed Inthe Zone AF mode the selected zone will be displayed 2 Select an AF point The AF point selection will change in the direction you tilt the lt s3 gt If you press lt gt straight down the center AF point or center Zone will be selected The lt 7 gt dial selects an AF point in the horizontal direction and the lt gt dial
259. ode C1 C3 then press lt B gt custom shooting mode D Select Register settings e Turn the lt gt dial to select Register Clear settings Auto update set Disable settings then press lt gt Register settings 3 Register the Custom shooting mode ns oncon ace Turn the lt gt dial to select the to register settings to Custom shooting mode to be Custom shooting mode C2 registered then press lt gt Custom shooting mode C3 On the confirmation dialog select OK and press lt gt gt The current camera settings p 333 334 will be registered under the Mode Dial s C position Automatic Updating If you change a setting while you shoot in the lt M gt lt gt or lt gt mode the Custom shooting mode can be automatically updated to reflect the changed setting s To enable this automatic update in step 2 set Auto update set to Enable The settings that can be automatically updated are listed on pages 333 and 334 Canceling Registered Custom Shooting Modes In step 2 if you select Clear settings the respective Mode Dial position will revert to the default setting effective before you registered the camera settings The procedure is the same as step 3 332 Register Custom Shooting Modes ae a SS See Settings Registered e Shooting functions Shooting mode exposure setting ISO speed AF mode AF area selection mode AF point Metering mode Drive mode Exposure
260. of the following operations e Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period e Often activating only the AF without taking a picture e Using the lens Image Stabilizer e Using the LCD monitor often e Continuing Live View shooting or movie shooting for a prolonged period The camera turns off by itself e Auto power off is in effect If you do not want auto power off to take effect set 2 Auto power off to Disable p 55 e Even if 2 Auto power off is set to Disable the LCD monitor will still turn off after the camera is left idle for 30 min The camera s power does not turn off 359 Troubleshooting Guide EE Shooting Related Problems The lens cannot be attached The camera cannot be used with EF S lenses p 39 The viewfinder is dark e Install a recharged battery pack in the camera p 28 No images can be shot or recorded The card is not properly inserted p 31 e Ifyou are using an SD card slide the card s write protect switch to the Write Erase setting p 31 e Ifthe card is full replace the card or delete unnecessary images to make room p 31 277 If you try to focus in the One Shot AF mode while the focus confirmation light lt gt in the viewfinder blinks a picture cannot be taken Press the shutter button halfway again to refocus automatically or focus manually p 44 111 The card cannot be used e Ifa card error message is displayed see page
261. om Controls p 321 F A grid can also be displayed on the LCD monitor during Live View shooting and movie shooting p 203 239 59 Displaying the Grid and Electronic Level Displaying the Electronic Level on the LCD Monitor 1 Press the lt INFO gt button e Each time you press the lt INFO gt button the screen display will change e Display the electronic level Ifthe electronic level does not Y Displays camera settings appear set 3 MA button display options so that the electronic level can be displayed p 336 2 Check the camera s tilt The horizontal and vertical tilt are displayed in 1 increments When the red line turns green it indicates that the tilt is corrected AWW Vertical level Horizontal level iin iw Q Even when the tilt is corrected there may be a margin of error of 1 Ifthe camera is very tilted the electronic level s margin of error will be bigger F With this same procedure you can display the electronic level during Live View shooting and before shooting a movie p 200 225 Note that the electronic level cannot be displayed during movie shooting The electronic level will disappear when you start shooting a movie 60 Feature Guide sxe When MZA Help is displayed at the bottom of the menu screen the Feature guide can be displayed The Feature guide is displayed while you hold down the lt INFO gt button If the
262. omize various camera features to suit your picture taking preferences Any settings different from the default will be displayed in blue Sets 1 2 stop increments for the shutter speed aperture exposure compensation AEB flash exposure compensation etc Effective when you prefer to control the exposure in less fine increments than 1 3 stop increments Fl With 1 2 stop set the exposure level will be displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel as shown below OTOL a E 32h 23 so rire i it i I Lt ISO speed setting increments 1 3 1 3 stop 1 1 1 stop Bracketing auto cancel ON Enable When you set the power switch to lt OFF gt the AEB and white balance bracketing settings will be canceled AEB will also be canceled when the flash is ready to fire or if you switch to movie shooting OFF Disable The AEB and white balance bracketing settings will not be canceled even if you set the power switch to lt OFF gt If the flash is ready to fire or if you switch to movie shooting AEB will be canceled temporarily but the AEB range will be retained 315 MM Custom Function Settings Bracketing sequence The AEB shooting sequence and white balance bracketing sequence can be changed 0 0 0 0 0 0 AEB White Balance Bracketing B A Direction M G Direction 0 Standard exposure 0 Standard white balance 0 Standard white balance Decreased ex
263. ong e Brightness adjustment p 279 exposures RON Dp e Electronic level gt p 60 Highlight tone priority gt p 146 e Feature guide gt p 61 e Peripheral illumination correction gt p 147 12 Index to Features e Chromatic aberration correction e Color space Shooting e Shooting mode eHDR Multiple exposures e Mirror lockup e Depth of field preview e Remote control Quick Control Exposure Adjustment e Exposure compensation e AEB e AE lock e Safety shift Flash e External flash e External flash function settings e External Speedlite Custom Functions Live View Shooting e Live View shooting e Focusing e Aspect ratio Movie Shooting Movie shooting e Movie recording size e Sound recording Time code e Still photo shooting gt p 148 gt p 158 gt p 24 gt p 173 gt p 177 gt p 184 gt p 165 gt p 186 gt p 49 gt p 169 gt p 170 gt p 171 gt p 317 gt p 187 gt p 191 gt p 196 gt p 197 gt p 207 gt p 204 gt p 217 gt p 231 gt p 234 gt p 237 gt p 228 Playback e Image review time gt p 55 e Single image display gt p 244 Shooting information display gt p 246 e Index display gt p 249 Image browsing Jump display gt p 250 e Magnified view gt p 251 e Two image display gt p 253 e Image rotate gt p 254 e Rating gt p 255 Movie playback gt p 261 e Slide show gt p 265 eViewing images on TV gt p
264. only the wide angle or telephoto end has been adjusted a correction will be made automatically for the intermediate range 108 TET Fine Adjustment of AF s Point of Focus 8 ee a I Clearing All AF Microadjustments When ft Clear all appears at the bottom of the screen pressing the lt I gt button will clear all the adjustments made for All by same amount and Adjust by lens Notes for AF Microadjustment Q The AF s point of focus will vary slightly depending on the subject conditions brightness zoom position and other shooting conditions Therefore even if you perform AF Microadjustment focus may still not be achieved at the suitable position e The adjustments will be retained even if you clear all the camera settings p 56 However the setting itself will be Disable ir Itis best to make the adjustment at the actual location where you will shoot This will make the adjustment more precise e Using a tripod when making the adjustment is recommended e For checking the adjustment result shooting at the ML image recording quality is recommended e The adjustment amount of one step varies depending on the maximum aperture of the lens Keep adjusting shooting and checking the focus repeatedly to adjust the AF s point of focus e AF adjustment is not possible for the Live mode and amp Live mode contrast AF 109 When Autofocus Fails sxe Autofocus can fail to achieve focus viewfinder s focus
265. ons The features explained in this chapter can be set and used in the following shooting modes P Tv Av M B mM Custom Functions ma Ca LV Movie C Fn1 Exposure Shooting Shooting Exposure level increments O O ISO speed setting increments p 315 O In M Bracketing auto cancel O Still photo ith WB Bracketing sequence O ut A p 316 bracketing Number of bracketed shots O set Safety shift p 317 O C Fn2 Display Operation Warnings in viewfinder p 318 LV shooting area display Q Dial direction during Tv Av O O Multi function lock p 319 O O Custom Controls Depends on setting C Fn3 Others Add cropping information O p 320 Default Erase option During playback C Fn4 Clear Selecting 4 4 Clear all Custom Func C Fn will clear all the Custom Function settings F The shaded Custom Functions do not function during Live View LV shooting nor movie shooting Settings are disabled e Even if all the Custom Functions are cleared the settings for 4 2 Custom Controls will remain unchanged 314 1 Custom Function Settings ma C Fn1 Exposure Exposure level increments VA ISO speed setting increments 1 3 Bracketing auto cancel ON Bracketing sequence Number of bracketed shots 3 Safety shift OFF C Fn1 Exposure Exposure level increments 1 3 1 3 stop 1 2 1 2 stop Under the tab you can cust
266. opera n toh an an etemal Speedie The external Speedlite will not emit the CE3 Help AF assist beam This prevents the AF assist beam from disturbing others IR IR AF assist beam only Among external Speedlites only models with an infrared AF assist beam will be able to emit the beam Set this if you do not want the AF assist to be emitted as small flashes Q If the external Speedlite s Custom Function AF assist beam firing is set to Disable this function s setting will be overridden and the AF assist beam will not be emitted One Shot AF release priority You can set the AF operation characteristics and shutter release timing for One Shot AF One Shot AF release prior Focus priority The picture is not taken until focus is achieved Effective when you want to Focus priority Ko achieve focus before capturing the shot o Release priority CE3 Help Priority is given to taking the picture instead of achieving focus This gives priority to getting the shot rather than achieving correct focus Note that the picture will be taken even if focus has not been achieved 97 MM Customizing AF Functions eee AF4 Lens drive when AF impossible If focus cannot be achieved with autofocus you can have the camera keep searching for the correct focus or have it stop searching Lens drive when AF impossible ON Continue focus search Continue focus search ON If focus cannot be achieved with Stop focus sea
267. or Temperature Approx K Kelvins ET Auto 3000 7000 Ea Daylight 5200 fi Shade 7000 a Cloudy twilight sunset 6000 Bd Tungsten light 3200 Pad White fluorescent light 4000 4 Flash use Automatically set ns Custom p 138 2000 10000 Cs Color temperature p 139 2500 10000 Applicable with Speedlites having a color temperature transmission function Otherwise it will be fixed to approx 6000K About White Balance To the human eye a white object looks white regardless of the type of lighting With a digital camera the color temperature is adjusted with software to make the white areas look white This adjustment serves as the basis for the color correction The result is natural looking colors in the pictures F You can also set this with 492 White balance 137 WB Setting the White Balance ax Custom White Balance Custom white balance enables you to manually set the white balance for a specific light source for better accuracy Do this procedure under the actual light source to be used Photograph a white object The plain white object should fill the spot metering circle e Focus manually and set the standard exposure for the white object e You can set any white balance Spot metering circle 2 Select Custom White Balance Expo comp AEB 3 2 1 1 2 3 e Under the 2 tab select Custom ISO speed settings P lt gt Sigh OANE White Balance then press
268. or one print order If you specify more than this all the images may not be printed 307 iD Direct Printing with DPOF memm esrrint order With a PictBridge printer you can easily QO Standard 7 prints A PEN pa print images with DPOF Date On File No Off Sel Image Bya a All image Set up Print MENU psy 1 Prepare to print See page 296 Follow the Connecting the Camera to a Printer procedure up to step 5 2 Under the 11 tab select Print order 3 Select Print e Print will be displayed only if the camera is connected to a printer and printing is possible 4 Set the Paper settings p 298 Set the printing effects p 300 if necessary 5 Select OK Q e Before printing be sure to set the paper size Certain printers cannot imprint the file number e If Bordered is set certain printers may imprint the date on the border Depending on the printer the date may appear faint if it is imprinted on a bright background or on the border Fl Under Adjust levels Manual cannot be selected e f you stopped the printing and want to resume printing the remaining images select Resume Note that printing will not resume if you stop the printing and any of the following occurs Before resuming the printing you changed the print order or deleted print ordered images When you set the index you changed the paper setting before resuming the printing e When you paused the
269. orizontally or diagonally or partially hidden The lt gt focusing frame may cover only part of the face F When you press lt gt straight down or press lt gt the AF mode will switch to the Live mode p 207 You can tilt lt gt to move the AF point Press lt gt straight down again or press lt gt to return to the X face detection Live mode Since AF is not possible with a face detected near the edge of the picture the lt 1 gt will be grayed out Then if you press the shutter button halfway the center AF point lt gt will be used to focus 209 Using AF to Focus E Live Mode and amp Face Detection Live Mode Notes AF operation Focusing will take slightly longer Even when focus has been achieved pressing the shutter button halfway will focus again The image brightness may change during and after the AF operation e Ifthe light source changes while the Live View image is displayed the screen may flicker and focusing may be difficult If this happens stop the Live View shooting and autofocus under the actual light source If you press the lt Q gt button in the Live mode the image will be magnified at the AF point If focusing is difficult in the magnified view return to the normal view and autofocus Note that the AF speed may differ between the normal and magnified views e If you autofocus in the Live mode s normal view and then magnify the image the focus
270. ot AT release Release priority Focus priority 97 priority AF AF4 Purple pens dnve TOL AE Continue focus search Stop focus search 98 impossible Selectable AF point 61 points I Only cross type AF points 98 15 points 9 points Manual selection Spot AF Manual selection Select AF area 1 point AF Expand AF area e Expand AF 99 selection mode area Surround Manual selection Zone AF Auto selection 61 point AF AF area selection payee M Fn button EJ Main Dial 100 method Orientation linked AF Same for both vertical horizontal Select 101 point separate AF points AF AF5 Purple Manual AE point Stops at AF area edges Continuous 102 selection pattern i i Selected constant All constant Selected AF point display during 0re AF focused Selected focused 102 focus Disable display VF display illumination Auto Enable Disable 103 AF Microadjustment Disable All by same amount Adjust by lens 104 351 Menu Settings gt Playback 1 Blue Page Protect images Erase protect images 272 Rotate image Rotate vertical images 254 Erase images Erase images 277 Print order Specify images to be printed DPOF 305 Image copy Copy images between cards 274 RAW image processing Process images 282 gt Playback 2 Blue Resize Downsize the image s pixel count 287 Rating OFF
271. ot have distance information the correction amount will be lower 149 uam Creating and Selecting a Folder mmmmm You can freely create and select the folder where the captured images are to be saved This is optional since a folder will be created automatically for saving captured images Create a Folder 1 Select Record func card folder Record func card folder sel _ sel oe aiii e Under the 1 tab select Record Auto rotate ones func card folder sel then press Format card lt gt Record func card folder sel Select Folder Record func Standard Turn the lt gt dial to select Folder Record play iJ Folder TOOEOSSD then press lt gt Selectfolder 0 Select Create folder 100EOS5D 33 Turn the lt gt gt dial to select Create folder then press lt gt Selectfolder 0 Create a new folder Turn the lt gt dial to select OK then press lt gt gt Anew folder with the folder number Cancel increased by one is created Create folder 102 150 TEM Creating and Selecting a Folder Selecting a Folder Lowest file number e With the folder selection screen Number of images displayed turn the lt gt dial to select in folder the desired folder then press lt gt Selectfolder CS gt The folder where the captured SCO TEE images will be saved is selected 10150550 ca e Subsequent captured images will be recorded into the selected folder
272. ot with lt AF gt Press the lt AF DRIVE gt button 6 Select the self timer e Look at the LCD panel and turn the lt gt dial to select lt gt or lt jW2 gt Press the remote controller s transmit button e Point the remote controller toward the camera s remote control sensor and press the transmit button gt The self timer lamp lights and the picture is taken control sensor Q Fluorescent or LED lighting may cause camera misoperation by triggering the shutter inadvertently Try to keep the camera away from such light sources 186 Flash Photography This chapter explains how to shoot with an EOS dedicated EX series Speedlite sold separately or non Canon flash unit and how to set flash functions on the camera s menu screen 4 Flash Photography memme EOS dedicated EX series Speedlites An EX series Speedlite sold separately makes flash photography as easy as normal shooting For detailed instructions refer to the EX series Speedlite s instruction manual This camera is a Type A camera that can use all the features of EX series Speedlites To set the flash functions and flash Custom Functions with the camera s menu see pages 191 196 Shoe mount Speedlites Macro Lites FE lock This enables you to attain a proper flash exposure for a specific part of the subject Aim the viewfinder center over the subject then press the camera s lt M Fn gt button an
273. ou can change them With User setting1 you can change and register the four characters as desired With User setting2 if you register three characters the fourth character from the left will be appended automatically to indicate the image size Registering or Changing the File Name 1 Select File name ord func card folder sel Under the Y 1 tab select File File numbering Coni lt gt ferme name then press lt gt Menam SSS 2 Select Change User setting File name BE3B Turn the lt gt dial to select Change Change User setting User setting then press lt gt Filename 3 Enter any alphanumeric characters e For User setting1 enter four characters For User setting2 enter three characters Press the lt f gt button to delete any unnecessary characters Press the lt Q gt button and the text palette will be highlighted in a color frame Text can be entered eie Operate the lt 7 gt dial or lt gt EDIE to move the and select the desired character Then press lt gt to enter it L INFO Kete 152 Changing the File Name a Ss 8 ES 2 Exit the setting Enter the required number of alphanumeric characters then press the lt MENU gt button gt The new file name will be registered and the screen in step 2 will reappear Filename Select the registered file name e Turn the lt gt dial to select File
274. own on the left Movie playback menu Press the lt button to select the BB INFO desired option then press the Enter Return button For a slide show press the remote control s t button to select an option ooo ooo o jal al 9 image index Play movie then press the Enter button Slide show e f you select Return and press the Enter INFO Disp shooting info button the menu will disappear and you can a Rotate use the lt gt button to select an image Q During the two image display p 253 playback with the TV s remote control is not possible To use the TV s remote control for playback first press the lt gt button to return to the single image display Fl Some TV sets require you to first enable the HDMI CEC connection For details refer to the TV set s instruction manual Certain TV sets even those compatible with HDMI CEC may not operate properly In such a case set gt 3 Ctrl over HDMI to Disable and use the camera to control the playback operation 270 Viewing the Images on TV Viewing on Non High Definition HD TV Sets Connect the provided AV cable to the camera e With the plug s lt Canon gt logo facing the back of the camera insert it into the lt A V OUT gt terminal Connect the AV cable to the TV set e Connect the AV cable to the TV s video IN terminal and audio IN terminal 3 Turn on the TV and switch the TV s
275. play 2x 4x 8x 10x magnify from center The magnified view will start at the image center at the selected magnification e Actual size from selected point The recorded image s pixels will be displayed at approx 100 The magnified view will start at the AF point that achieved focus If the photo was taken with manual focus the magnified view will start at the image center e Same as last magnification from center The magnification will be the same as the last time you exited the magnified view with the lt gt gt or lt Q gt button The magnified view starts from the image center Fl With images taken with Live mode or Live mode p 207 the magnified view starts from the image center 252 1 Comparing Images Two Image Display You can compare two images side by side on the LCD monitor 1 Set the two image display e During image playback press the lt m D gt button gt Two images will be displayed The currently selected image will be highlighted in a blue frame 2 Select the images to be compared e Pressing lt gt switches the blue frame between the two images Turn the lt gt dial to select an image e Repeat step 2 to select the other image to be compared By pressing the lt Q gt button you can set the same magnification and magnified area for both images The magnification settings will match those of the image not highlighted in blue By holding the lt
276. plug from the power outlet Place the cord in the groove e Insert the DC Coupler s cord carefully without damaging the cord A Insert the DC Coupler Open the battery compartment cover and open the DC Coupler cord hole cover Insert the DC Coupler securely until it f locks and put the cord through the DC Coupler cord hole hole Close the cover Q Do not connect or disconnect the power cord or DC Coupler while the camera s power switch is set to lt ON gt 342 Replacing the Date Time Battery mx The date time backup battery maintains the camera s date and time Its service life is approx 5 years If the date time is reset when camera is turned on follow the procedure below to replace the backup battery with a new CR1616 lithium battery The date time zone setting will also be reset so be sure to set the correct date time zone p 36 1 Set the power switch to lt OFF gt Unscrew the battery holder screw e Use a small Phillips screwdriver e Be careful not to lose the screw Take off the battery holder e Push out the battery as shown by arrow 2 Replace the battery in the battery holder Make sure the new battery is in the proper orientation Tighten the battery holder s screw Q For the date time battery be sure to use a CR1616 lithium battery 343 Using Eye Fi Cards sx With a commercially
277. posure Blue bias Magenta bias Increased exposure Amber bias Green bias Number of bracketed shots The number of shots taken with AEB and white balance bracketing can be changed from the usual 3 shots to 2 5 or 7 shots When Bracketing sequence 0 is set the bracketed shots will be taken as shown in the table below 3 3 shots 2 2 shots 5 5 shots 7 7 shots 1 stop increments 1st Shot 2nd Shot 3rd Shot 4th Shot 5th Shot 6th Shot 7th Shot 3 3 shots ea 4 Standard 2 2 shots 1 0 5 5 shots Sandard 2 A 2 0 7 7 shots aia i 3 2 4 2 3 Fl If 2 shots is set you can select the or side when setting the AEB range 316 EN Custom Function Settings EE Safety shift OFF Disable Tv Av Shutter speed Aperture This takes effect in the shutter priority AE Tv and aperture priority AE Av modes If the subject brightness changes and the standard exposure cannot be obtained within the autoexposure range the camera will automatically change the manually selected setting to obtain a standard exposure ISO ISO speed This works in the Program AE P shutter priority AE Tv and aperture priority AE Av modes If the subject brightness changes and the standard exposure cannot be obtained within the autoexposure range the camera will automatically change the manually set ISO speed to obtain a standard exposure
278. press lt gt while Stop is displayed then select OK If you execute 4 Clear all camera settings p 56 all the settings will revert to their defaults 301 A Printing lit Adjustment of Printing Effects zF Natural M In step 4 on page 300 select the printing effect When the lt E gt icon is displayed 1 By 1 copies brightly next to lt MEA gt you can press the lt INFO gt button You can then adjust E A the printing effect What can be adjusted Adjust levels off or what is displayed will depend on the A Brightener off RAES cor ae selection made in step 4 PrintEffect gNatural M e Brightness The image brightness can be adjusted e Adjust levels When you select Manual you can change E Adjust levels the histogram s distribution and adjust the image s brightness and contrast With the Adjust levels screen displayed press the lt INFO gt button to change the position of the lt i gt fema Turn the lt gt dial to freely adjust the shadow level 0 127 or highlight level 128 255 g Brightener Effective in backlit conditions that can make the subject s face look dark When On is set the face will be brightened for printing e Red eye corr Effective in flash images where the subject has red eye When On is set the red eye will be corrected for printing F e The Brightener and Red eye corr effects will not show on the
279. quality ISO speed etc Setting 1 Release shutter without card to Disable will prevent you from forgetting to insert a card p 348 Installing and Removing the Card a Se a a ee Removing the Card 1 Open the cover Set the power switch to lt OFF gt Make sure the access lamp is off then open the cover e f Recording is displayed close the cover 2 Remove the card To remove the CF card push the eject button e To remove the SD card push it in gently and release it Then pull it out e Pull the card straight out then close the cover Q e When the access lamp is lit or blinking it indicates that images are being written to or read by the card being erased or data is being transferred Do not open the card slot cover during this time Also never do any of the following while the access lamp is lit or blinking Otherwise it can damage the image data card or camera e Removing the card e Removing the battery Shaking or banging the camera around e Ifthe card already contains recorded images the image number may not start from 0001 p 154 e lfacard related error message is displayed on the LCD monitor remove and reinsert the card If the error persists use a different card If you can transfer all the images on the card to a computer transfer all the images and then format the card with the camera p 53 The card may then return to normal Do not touch the SD car
280. r Def 1 gees the modified Picture Style The 06008000 Picture Style selection screen will then reappear E F gt The base Picture Style will be indicated on the right of User Def INFO DOETE a Q f a Picture Style has already been registered under User Def changing the base Picture Style in step 5 will nullify the parameter settings of the registered Picture Style e f you execute Clear all camera settings p 56 all the User Def settings will revert to their defaults Any Picture Style registered via EOS Utility provided software will have only its modified parameters reverted to their default settings F e To use the adjusted Picture Style select the registered User Def then shoot e For the procedure to register a Picture Style file to the camera refer to the EOS Utility Instructions p 390 136 WB Setting the White Balance ma White balance WB is for making the white areas look white Normally the lt EWIE gt Auto setting will obtain the correct white balance If natural looking colors cannot be obtained with lt AMIB gt you can select the white balance to match the light source or set it manually by shooting a white object lt A gt is automatically set in the lt J gt mode 1 Press the lt WB gt button 6 2 Select the white balance While looking at the LCD panel turn the lt gt dial Display Mode Col
281. r button or other buttons ei Q Aar Co x 1 Select Auto power off Auto power off 1 min e Under the 2 tab select Auto Zinn power off then press lt gt PE gt Set the desired time O Select the desired setting then press Disable lt gt F Even if Disable is set the LCD monitor will turn off automatically after 30 min to save power The camera s power does not turn off 4 min Setting the Image Review Time You can set how long the image is displayed on the LCD monitor immediately after capture To keep the image displayed set Hold To not have the image displayed set Off MEA 1 Select Image review e Under the 681 tab select Image review then press lt gt 2 Set the desired time Select the desired setting then press lt gt Image review F If Hold is set the image will be displayed until the auto power off time elapses 55 Before You Start mM Reverting the Camera to the Default Settings The camera s shooting settings and menu settings can be reverted to their defaults Clear all camera settings Clear all camera settings Cancel SET UP4 2 Select OK Select OK then press lt gt gt Setting Clear all camera settings will reset the camera to the following default settings Shooting Settings 1 Select Clear all camera settings e Under the 4 tab select Clear all camera settings then press l
282. rase all the images p 278 only the protected images will remain This is convenient when you want to erase unnecessary images all at once 273 Copying Images sx The images recorded on one card can be copied to the other card tM Copying Individual Images A I y o x 1 Select Image copy Protect images Under the gt 1 tab select Image SSEPSIIESE copy then press lt gt Erase images Print order Image copy RAW image processing lmage copy 2 Select Sel Image Check the copy source and target card s capacity Freespace 7 72 GB Turn the lt gt dial to select Sel lmage Sel f All image Sel Image then press lt gt MENU a Lowest file number 3 Select the folder Number of images in folder Turn the lt gt dial to select the folder Source folder i containing the image to be copied TOOEOS5D then press lt gt alse e Refer to the images displayed on the right to select the desired folder gt The images in the selected folder will be displayed Source w Folder name Highest file number F The copy source is the card selected in the 1 Record func card folder sel menu s Record play Playback setting 274 Copying Images Total images selected A Select the images to be copied Turn the lt gt dial to select an image E A Se f to be copied then press lt amp gt y gt The lt V gt icon will appear on the upper left of the screen e If you
283. ration Correction About the Lens Correction Data The camera already contains lens peripheral illumination correction data and chromatic aberration correction data for approx 25 lenses If you select Enable the peripheral illumination correction and chromatic aberration correction will be applied automatically for any lens whose correction data has been registered in the camera With EOS Utility provided software you can check which lenses have their correction data registered in the camera You can also register the correction data for unregistered lenses For details refer to the PDF Software Instruction Manual on the CD ROM for EOS Utility p 393 Notes for peripheral illumination correction and chromatic aberration correction Q Corrections cannot be applied to JPEG images captured when Disable was set e When using a non Canon lens setting the corrections to Disable is recommended even if Correction data available is displayed e f you use the magnified view during Live View shooting the peripheral illumination correction and chromatic aberration correction will not be reflected in the image F f the effect of the correction is not so visible magnify the image and check it e The corrections are also applied when an Extender is attached Ifthe correction data for the attached lens is not registered to the camera the result will be the same as when the correction is set to Disable Ifthe lens does n
284. rch OFF autofocus the lens is driven to search for the correct focus Lens operation when focus OFF Stop focus search could not be achieved TEA Help If autofocus starts and the focus is far off or if focus cannot be achieved the lens drive stops This prevents the lens from becoming grossly out of focus due to focus searching F Super telephoto lenses can become grossly out of focus during continuous focus search taking more time to achieve focus the next time Therefore setting Stop focus search is recommended for super telephoto lenses Selectable AF point You can change the number of manually selectable AF points In the case of automatic AF point selection all 61 AF points will remain active regardless of this setting Selectable AF point 61 points 61 points All 61 AF points will be manually eee selectable i Only cross type AF points Only cross type AF points will be Nro ala manually selectable The number of selectable cross type AF points will differ depending on the lens 9 points 98 EM Customizing AF Functions a SS aS ee i 15 points Fifteen major AF points will be manually selectable iiiI 9 points Nine major AF points will be manually selectable Q With a lens from groups F to H p 83 84 the number of manually selectable AF points will be fewer ir e Even with settings other than 61 points AF point expansion Manual selection 3 AF point expansion Manual selection s
285. recommended 184 Using the Eyepiece Cover ma When you use the self timer or shoot bulb exposures and do not look through the viewfinder stray light entering the viewfinder can cause the image to come out dark To prevent this use the eyepiece cover p 27 attached to the camera strap During Live View shooting and movie shooting attaching the eyepiece cover is not necessary Remove the eyecup While grasping both sides of the eyecup slide it upward to remove 2 Attach the eyepiece cover Slide the eyepiece cover down into B the eyepiece groove to attach it f Using a Remote Switch memme You can connect the Remote Switch RS 80N3 or Timer Remote Controller TC 80N3 both sold separately or any EOS accessory equipped with an N3 type terminal to the camera for shooting p 356 To operate the accessory refer to its instruction manual 1 Open the terminal cover G zi J Connect the plug to the remote E control terminal AF Connect the plug as shown in the illustration To disconnect the plug grasp the silver part and pull 185 i Remote Control Shooting m With Remote Controller RC 6 sold separately you can shoot remotely up to approx 5 meters 16 4 feet from the camera You can either shoot immediately or use a 2 sec delay You can also use Remote Controller RC 1 and RC 5 1 Focus the subject Set the lens focus mode switch to lt MF gt e You can also sho
286. recording quality 119 Index display ecceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeee 249 INFO button ISO speed ee eee Automatic setting Auto 125 Automatic setting range 127 ISO expansion ceeeeeeeee Manual Setting range Minimum shutter speed Setting increments 06 JPEG iced aa athens 119 Jump display 250 Language vsececcecasee 38 Large Image recording quality 121 LCD MONO Paiacscscccetiss sche las seedtessaune 15 Brightness adjustment 279 Electronic level Image playback Menu screen LCD Panel cesses ksieiendieneane 21 LO NS ws seers Nae 25 39 Chromatic aberration COMECON ieis aaar eens 148 Lock release eeeceeeeeeeeeeeees 40 Peripheral illumination correction Lens hood Live View shooting 68 197 Exposure simulation 205 Face detection Live mode Manual focusing Metering timer Possible shots Quick Control Quick mode AF Silent shooting Long exposure noise reduction 144 LONG EXPOSUTES eeeeeeeeeereeeeee 172 M Manual exposure 166 223 Magnification Start position 252 Magnified view 0 0 214 251 Main Dial isinai Malfunction Manual exposure Manual focusing 0 Manual reset Manual selection AF Maximum burst Medium Image recording QUality
287. red Sel Image Sel All image Turn the lt gt dial to select the image to be transferred then press lt gt e Turn the lt gt dial to display the lt V gt on the screen s upper left then press lt 6 gt If you press the lt Q gt button and turn the lt s5 gt dial counterclockwise you can select an image from a three image display To return to the single image display turn the lt gt dial clockwise e To select other images to be transferred repeat step 4 To return to the screen in step 3 press the lt MENU gt button a MENU a F When Sel lmage is selected you can check the image s transfer status on the upper left of the screen No mark Not selected v Selected for transfer X Transfer failed O Transfer succeeded On page 310 the procedures for RAW JPEG transfer and steps 1 to 4 can also be performed while the camera is not connected to a personal computer 311 Transferring Images to a Personal Computer lmage sel transfer i 5 Transfer the image v Images to transfer e Images failed trans O Images transferred e Sel Image Sel a All image e Direct transfer 5 e e Sel On the computer screen check that EOS Utility s top screen is displayed Select Direct transfer then press lt 6 gt On the confirmation screen select OK and the images will be transferred to the personal computer Images selected with Sel Al and All ima
288. remote controller sold separately p 186 for bulb exposures When you press the remote controller s transmit button the bulb exposure will start immediately or 2 sec later Press the button again to stop the bulb exposure 172 HDR HDR High Dynamic Range Shooting m You can take artistic photos having a high dynamic range and preserving detail in highlight and shadow areas HDR shooting is effective for landscape and still life shots With HDR shooting three images of different exposures standard exposure underexposure and overexposure are captured for each shot and then merged together automatically The HDR image is recorded as a JPEG image HDR stands for High Dynamic Range HDR Shooting 1 Press the lt c gt button 2 Select the HDR mode e Turn the lt gt dial to select HDR then press lt gt gt The HDR mode screen will appear HDR HDR Mode Shoot images with a wide tonal HDR Mode 3 Set Adjust dyn range Adjust dyn range Disable HDR Select the desired dynamic range 1 EV setting then press lt amp gt 2 EV Selecting Auto will have the dynamic range 3 EV set automatically the image s overall tonal range The higher the number the wider the dynamic range will be HDR Mode e To disable HDR shooting select Disable HDR Effect Natural Art standard A Set Effect Art vivid 2 Art bold Select the desired effect then press Art embossed lt gt
289. rging the battery detach it and disconnect the charger from the power outlet e You can attach the cover in a different orientation to indicate whether the battery has been recharged or not If the battery has been recharged attach the VW i cover so that the battery shaped hole lt L gt is aligned over the blue sticker on the battery If the battery is exhausted attach the cover in the opposite orientation e When not using the camera remove the battery If the battery is left in the camera for a prolonged period a small amount of power current is released resulting in excess discharge and shorter battery life Store the battery with the protective cover attached Storing the battery after it is fully charged can lower the battery s performance e The battery charger can also be used in foreign countries The battery charger is compatible with a 100 V AC to 240 V AC 50 60 Hz power source If necessary attach a commercially available plug adapter for the respective country or region Do not attach any portable voltage transformer to the battery charger Doing so can damage the battery charger e If the battery becomes exhausted quickly even after being fully charged the battery has reached the end of its service life Check the battery s recharge performance p 338 and purchase a new battery Q e After disconnecting the charger s power plug do not touch the prongs for at least 3 sec Ifthe battery s remaining capa
290. ring is set If the metering mode is set to Spot metering p 168 the warning icon will appear LV shooting area display When the aspect ratio for Live View shooting is set to 4 3 16 9 or 1 1 p 204 you can set the display method for the shooting area LI Masked Outlined EN Custom Function Settings Dial direction during Tv Av 7 Normal gt Reverse direction The dial s turning direction for setting the shutter speed and aperture can be reversed In the lt M gt shooting mode the turning direction of the lt s3 gt and lt gt dial will be reversed In the other shooting modes the turning direction of only the lt 5 gt dial will be reversed The lt gt dial s turning direction will be the same for the lt M gt mode and for setting the exposure compensation Multi function lock When the lt LOCK gt switch is set to the right it will prevent the lt gt lt p gt and lt gt from accidentally changing a setting Select the camera control you want to lock then press lt gt to append a checkmark lt vV gt and select OK Main Dial Quick Control Dial Multi controller F Ifthe lt LOCK gt switch is set and you try to use one of the locked camera controls lt L gt will be displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel Also on the shooting settings display p 48 LOCK will be displayed e By default when the lt LO
291. rn the lt gt dial to set the function For RAW image processing and Resize press lt gt and set the function For details see page 282 for RAW image processing and page 287 for Resize To cancel press the lt MENU gt button 3 Exit the setting e Press the lt Q gt button and the Quick Control screen will turn off 257 Q Quick Control During Playback Q To rotate an image set 1 Auto rotate to On 6 If 1 Auto rotate is set to On or Off the Rotate image setting will be recorded to the image but the camera will not rotate the image for display Fl Pressing the lt Q gt button during the index display will switch to the single image display and the Quick Control screen will appear Pressing the lt Q gt button again will return to the index display For images taken with another camera selectable functions may be limited 258 Enjoying Movies a You can play back movies in the following three ways Playback ona TV set p 268 271 Use the provided AV cable or an HDMI Cable HTC 100 sold separately to connect the camera to a TV set Then you can play back captured movies and still photos on the TV If you have a High Definition TV set and connect your camera with an HDMI cable you can watch Full High Definition Full HD 1920x1080 and High Definition HD 1280x720 movies with higher image quality Q Movies on a card can be played only by d
292. rration Correction 147 Creating and Selecting a Folder ce eee eee 150 Changing the File Name ccccecceeceseeeeeeeeeceeeseretereeeeeneeeneeanes 152 File Numbering Methods cesceeceseceeereeereeeeeeneeeeeeeeeneeeners 154 Setting Copyright Information esceeceeteeeteseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 156 Setting the Color Space eeceecceeceseeeeeeeeeceaeseaeseresereeaeeeaeeaee 158 P Program AE tsnainiieen A Seca ee 160 Tv Shutter Priority AE aae 162 Av Aperture Priority AE c ccccccceccsesececececeeeeeseseseseeeeeeeeteaseeeeees 164 Depth of Field Preview 0 c cccccccccsscceeeeeeseeeeseeesseeeesseeeeaees 165 Mi Mantiali Exposure iicriecectortiral ane 166 Selecting the Metering MOde cceeceececeeeeseeeeseteeseteees 167 Setting Exposure Compensation ecceseeeeeeetereeereeneeeneeenes 169 Auto Exposure Bracketing AEB c ceccseeeseeseseeeeseteees 170 JAE LOCK oes i ol ieee ceil cohen Bech ies 171 B Bulb Exposure Sinasanay a a EA 172 HDR HDR High Dynamic Range Shooting csceeeeee 173 Multiple ExpOsures iieiea e piae AZ Mirror LoekUp esiosa ie iaaea ttalla Using the Eyepiece Cover eceecceeceseresereeereeneeeneeeeeeneeeenners fi Using a Remote Switch i Remote Control Shooting 6 Flash Photography 187 Flash Photography ccccccccceecesceseseseeceeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeeeeetetees 188 Setting the Flash s
293. rson s vision When using flash to photograph an infant keep at least 1 meter away Before storing the camera or accessory when not in use remove the battery pack and disconnect the power plug This is to prevent electrical shock heat generation and fire Do not use the equipment where there is flammable gas This is to prevent an explosion or fire 383 If you drop the equipment and the casing breaks open to expose the internal parts do not touch the internal parts due to the possibility of electrical shock Do not disassemble or modify the equipment High voltage internal parts can cause electrical shock Do not look at the sun or an extremely bright light source through the camera or lens Doing so may damage your vision Keep the camera from the reach of small children The neck strap can accidentally choke the child Do not store the equipment in dusty or humid places This is to prevent fire and electrical shock Before using the camera inside an airplane or hospital check if it is allowed Electromagnetic waves emitted by the camera may interfere with the plane s instruments or the hospital s medical equipment To prevent fire and electrical shock follow the safeguards below Always insert the power plug all the way in Do not handle a power plug with wet hands When unplugging a power plug grasp and pull the plug instead of the cord Do not scratch cut or excessively bend the
294. s turn the lt gt dial to select OK then press lt gt About the Lens Serial Number e In step 3 if appears in front of the 10 digit lens serial number you cannot register several copies of the same lens model Even if you enter the serial number will remain displayed e The lens serial number on the lens may differ from the serial number displayed on the screen in step 3 This is not a defect Ifthe lens serial number includes letters enter only the numbers in step 3 e The location of the serial number differs depending on the lens Some lenses may not have a serial number inscribed To register a lens that has no serial number inscribed enter any serial number in step 3 OK Cancel ir e f Adjust by lens is selected and an Extender is used the adjustment will be registered for the lens and Extender combination If 40 lenses have already been registered a message will appear After you select a lens whose registration is to be erased overwritten you can register another lens 107 MM Fine Adjustment of AF s Point of Focus a Se ee A Make the adjustment Single focal length lens AF Microadjustment 00 EF50mm f 1 8 II AF e INFO AUC ae ce Zoom lens AF Microadjustment e 00 EF24 105mm f 4L IS USM t E a M 20 10 0 20 T Ld 20 10 0 10 20 INFO MUTE ace 2 AF Microadjustment EF24 105mm f 4L IS USM Adjust focus for each model of lens in
295. s and shoot p 332 24 Nomenclature EF 24 105mm f 4L IS USM lens Focus mode switch p 39 Distance scale Infrared index Hood mount p 41 f j Lf Le ring p 40 p Z Zoom position index y p 40 Z 77 mm filter thread front of lens Focusing ring p 111 214 Contacts p 15 Image Stabilizer switch p 42 Lens mount index p 39 25 Nomenclature Battery Charger LC E6 Charger for Battery Pack LP E6 p 28 Power plug IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS DANGER TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS For connection to a supply not in the U S A use an attachment plug adapter of the proper configuration for the power outlet if needed Battery Charger LC E6E Charger for Battery Pack LP E6 p 28 Power cord Charge lamp Battery pack slot 26 Getting Started This chapter explains preparatory steps before you start shooting and basic camera operations Attaching the Strap Pass the end of the strap through the camera s strap mount eyelet from the bottom Then pass it through the strap s buckle as shown in the illustration Pull the strap to take up any slack and make sure the strap will not loosen from the buckle The eyepiece cover is also attached to the strap p 185 Eyepiece cover Charging the Battery mx Remove the protective cover e Detach the prote
296. s function is Enable Disable displayed in 03 You can just touch the top bottom left or right of lt gt for silent operation During movie shooting you can press the lt Q gt to display the Quick Control screen and change the settings below with lt gt Settable Shooting Mode Functions P B Tv Av M 1 Shutter speed O oO 2 Aperture O O 3 ISO speed O 4 Exposure compensation 9 z re 5 Sound o o o O recording level Q e If 5 Silent Control is set to Enable you cannot adjust the sound recording level with the lt gt Quick Control dial during movie shooting e Even if you change the aperture silently with lt gt the movie will still record the lens aperture driving sound e If there is water or dirt on the lt gt the touch operation may not work In such a case use a clean cloth to clean the lt gt If it still does not work wait a while and try again Fl Before shooting a movie use the lt gt to adjust the sound recording level in the Quick Control and Rec level screens 236 M4 Setting the Time Code m The time code is a time reference Time code i x A arth recorded automatically to synchronize Start time setting the video and audio during movie Movia rec count ic time shooting It is recorded at all times in the Movie play count Rec time 4 A Drop frame Enable following units hours minutes seco
297. s subjects that may be difficult to focus It covers the five vertical AF points at the center The focusing sensor is geared to obtain high precision focusing with f 4 or larger maximum aperture lenses Since lt it has a horizontal pattern it can detect vertical lines a g The focusing sensor is geared for f 5 6 or larger maximum aperture lenses Since it has a horizontal pattern it can detect vertical lines It covers three columns of AF points at the viewfinder s center aperture lenses It can detect horizontal lines and covers all The focusing sensor is geared for f 5 6 or larger maximum 61 AF points in a vertical pattern Lenses and Usable AF Points mx Q e Although the camera has 61 AF points the number of usable AF points and focusing patterns will differ depending on the lens The lenses are thereby classified into eight groups from A to H Check which group your lens belongs to e When using a lens in Groups F to H fewer AF points will be usable F When you press the lt E gt button the AF points indicated by the O mark will blink The Mi M AF points will stay lit e Both Extender EF 1 4x and Extender EF 2x apply to all the I II models e Regarding new lenses marketed after the EOS 5D Mark III check Canon s Web site to see which group they belong to Some lenses may not be available in certain countries or regions
298. s the RAW image e M and S images cannot be processed with the camera Use the provided software Digital Photo Professional to process the image p 390 cannot resize the image e S3 JPEG images and G M W S images cannot be resized with the camera p 287 369 Troubleshooting Guide Sensor Cleaning Problems The shutter makes a noise during sensor cleaning e If you selected Clean now t the shutter will make a noise but no picture is taken p 290 Automatic sensor cleaning does not work If you repeatedly turn the power switch lt ON gt and lt OFF gt at a short interval the lt t gt icon may not be displayed p 34 Printing Related Problems There are fewer printing effects than listed in the instruction manual e What is displayed on the screen differs depending on the printer This instruction manual lists all the printing effects available p 300 Image Transfer Problems cannot transfer images to a personal computer e Install the provided software EOS Solution Disk CD ROM on the personal computer p 391 392 Check that EOS Utility s top screen is displayed 370 Error Codes memm Error number _ If there is a problem with the camera an error message will appear Follow the on screen instructions Err 01 Communications between the camera and lens is faulty Clean the lens contacts Countermeasures No Error Message amp Solution Communications bet
299. screen e When Detail set is selected you can adjust the Contrast Saturation Color tone and Color balance To adjust the Color balance use lt gt B is for blue A is amber M is magenta and G is green The color in the respective direction will be corrected e Ifyou select Clear all all the printing effect settings will be reverted to their defaults 302 A Printing ioo e z GZ 5 Trimming the Image Tilt correction You can crop the image and print only the trimmed portion as if the image was recomposed Set the trimming right before printing If you set the trimming and then set the print settings you may have to set the trimming again before printing 1 onthe print settings screen select Trimming 2 Set the trimming frame size position and aspect ratio The image area within the trimming frame will be printed The trimming frame s aspect ratio can be changed with Paper settings Changing the trimming frame size Turn the lt gt dial to change the trimming frame size The smaller the trimming frame the larger the image magnification will be for printing Moving the trimming frame Use lt gt to move the frame over the image vertically or horizontally Move the trimming frame until it covers the desired image area Rotating the frame Pressing the lt INFO gt button will toggle the trimming frame between the vertical and horizontal orientations This enables you to create a
300. sensor cleaning will no longer be executed when you set the power switch to lt ON gt or lt OFF gt 290 1 Appending Dust Delete Data mum Normally the Self Cleaning Sensor Unit will eliminate most of the dust that may be visible on captured images However in case visible dust still remains you can append the Dust Delete Data to the image for erasing the dust spots later The Dust Delete Data is used by Digital Photo Professional provided software p 390 to erase the dust spots automatically Preparation Prepare a solid white object such as a sheet of paper Set the lens focal length to 50 mm or longer Set the lens focus mode switch to lt MF gt and set the focus to infinity cc If the lens has no distance scale look at the front of the lens and turn the focusing ring clockwise all the way Obtain the Dust Delete Data O a o es 1 Select Dust Delete Data Picture Style Auto e Under the 83 tab select Dust Long exp noise reduction OFF lt gt P A Delete Data then press lt gt Highlight tone priority OFF Dust Delete Data Dust Delete Data 2 Select OK Obtain data for removing e Select OK and press lt gt After dust using software the automatic self cleaning of the Refer to manual for details 2 r sensor is performed a message will a appear Although there will be a Cancel OK shutter sound during the cleaning no picture is taken Dust Delete Data to Fully press the shu
301. setting cannot be changed When Highlight tone priority is set to Disable the Auto Lighting Optimizer will revert to its original setting e With Enable image noise may increase slightly more than with Disable Al With Enable the settable range will be ISO 200 25600 ISO 200 12800 for movie shooting Also the lt D gt icon will be displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel when highlight tone priority is enabled 146 X Lens Peripheral Illumination Chromatic Aberration Correction m Peripheral light fall off occurs in lenses whose characteristics make the image corners look darker Color fringing along subject outlines also is a chromatic aberration Light fall off and color fringing can be corrected The default setting is Enable for both corrections Peripheral Illumination Correction maf A x 1 Select Lens aberration Image quality correction SAGETEVIEW 2 sec e Under the 1 tab select Lens Beep Enable e i Release shutter without card ON aberration correction then press Lens aberration correction lt gt Lens aberration correction 2 Select the setting iliac Check that Correction data Correction data available available is displayed for the Peripheral illumin Enable attached lens Disable Turn the lt gt dial to select MENUS Peripheral illumin then press lt gt e Select Enable then press lt gt e If Correction data not available is
302. shooting OOOO O O Aspect ratio OIO lOl OTO Quick Control o olo olol lo O 3 In the lt M gt mode with Auto ISO you can set a fixed ISO speed 4 Works only before the start of movie shooting 5 Settable only for Live View shooting 347 Menu Settings sxx For Viewfinder Shooting and Live View Shooting O Shooting 1 Red Page M IS Image quality 119 AL AL AM AM 4S1 dS S2 S3 Image review Off 2 sec 4 sec 8 sec Hold 55 Beep Enable Disable oleaca Snuker Enable Disable 32 without card Lens aberration Peripheral illumination Enable Disable 147 correction Chromatic aberration Enable Disable Flash firing E TTL II metering Flash sync External Speedlite speed in Av mode Flash function settings 191 control Clear flash settings Flash C Fn settings Clear all Speedlite C Fn s Mirror lockup Disable Enable 184 F e Shaded menu options are not displayed in the lt GJ gt mode What is displayed under 1 Image quality depends on the Record func p 116 setting under 1 Record func card folder sel If Rec separately is set set the image quality for each card 348 Menu Settings SESS Gi Shooting 2 Red Page Exposure 169 ompensation AEB 1 3 stop increments 5 stops AEB 3
303. shooting button EOY 240 4 In the lt J gt mode these menu options are displayed under 33 2 The setting is linked to Movie play count under the gt 3 tab 355 System Map ees ST E2 ST E3 RT 270EX II 600EX MR 14EX MT 24EX Dioptic Adustment errsttseetsseetesetesees Peoseeseesssafeafeecssssssssssessssessesessessssesesseseasese Lenses Eg Bundled Accessories Anti Fog i 5 Eyepiece Eg Wide Strap EW EOS5DMKIII F Date time Battery Pack Battery Charger y CRIEI lithi batt LP E6 ICES orlC EBE pe Hand Strap i am i ai Battery Grip Car Battery BG E11 Cable CB 570 ri Car Battery Charger CBC E6 Ae oer Re poeier Battery Magazine Battery Magazine gt BGM E11L for two BGM E11A for AC Adapter Kit P E6 battery packs size AA LR6 batteries ACK E6 attached to BG E11 attached to BG E11 356 System Map GPS Receiver Headphones Remote Timer Remote Remote Wireless GP E2 Controller Controller Switch Controller RC 6 TC 80N3 RS 80N3 LC 5 External microphone H EF D m AT aa HDMI Cable Stereo AV Cable HTC 100 2 9 m 9 5 ft AVC DC400ST 1 3 m 4 3 ft Wireless File Transmitter WFT E7 EOS EOS Software Solution Disk Instruction Manuals Me Di
304. sk Interface Cable Wireless LAN IFC 200U 1 9 m 6 2 ft access point lenses TV Video ea Interface Cable IFC 500U 4 7 m 15 4 ft oo a amp gt USB port Windows 7 Windows Vista Windows XP Mac OS X lt gt Card reader SD SDHC SDXC memory card ue gt PictBridge compatible printer m CF card gt Computer Leather Case EH20 L The length of all cables is approx m ft 357 Troubleshooting Guide sx If a problem occurs with the camera first refer to this Troubleshooting Guide If this Troubleshooting Guide does not resolve the problem contact your dealer or nearest Canon Service Center Power Related Problems The battery pack does not recharge e Ifthe battery s remaining capacity p 338 is 94 or higher the battery will not be recharged Do not recharge any battery pack other than genuine Canon Battery Pack LP E6 The charger s lamp blinks at high speed If there is a problem with the battery charger or battery pack or if communication with the battery pack non Canon battery packs is not possible the protective circuit will terminate the charging and the orange lamp will blink quickly at a regular interval If there is a problem with the battery charger or battery pack unplug the charger s power plug from the power outlet Detach and reattach the battery pack to the charger Wait 2 to 3 minutes then reconnect the power plug
305. speed will not revert to the original setting The exposure changes during movie shooting e If you change the shutter speed or aperture during movie shooting the changes in the exposure may be recorded Zooming the lens during movie shooting can cause changes in the exposure regardless of whether the lens maximum aperture changes or not Changes in the exposure may be recorded as a result The subject looks distorted during movie shooting e Ifyou move the camera to the left or right quickly high speed panning or shoot a moving subject the image may look distorted The image flickers or horizontal stripes appear during movie shooting Flickering horizontal stripes noise or irregular exposures can be caused by fluorescent light LED bulbs or other light sources during movie shooting Also changes in the exposure brightness or color tone may also be recorded In the lt M gt mode a slow shutter speed may solve the problem fal 365 Troubleshooting Guide p_e When I shoot still photos during movie shooting the movie shooting stops To shoot still photos during movie shooting using a CF card compatible with UDMA transfer rates is recommended Setting a lower image quality for still photos and shooting fewer continuous still photos can also resolve the problem Time code is off Shooting still photos during movie shooting will cause a discrepancy between the actual time and time code When you want to ed
306. ss the shutter button halfway The Image Stabilizer consumes battery power and may shorten the total movie shooting time or decrease the number of possible shots If you use a tripod or if the Image Stabilizer is not necessary you should set the IS switch to lt OFF gt The camera s built in microphone will also pick up camera operation noise Using a commercially available external microphone can prevent or reduce these noises from being recorded Do not connect anything other than an external microphone to the camera s external microphone IN terminal e Autofocusing during movie shooting is not recommended since it may momentarily throw the focus far off or change the exposure 241 Q Movie Shooting Cautions Recording and Image Quality e f you use a card having a slow writing speed a five level indicator may appear on the right of the screen during movie shooting It indicates how much data has not yet been written to the card remaining capacity of the internal buffer memory The slower the card the faster the indicator will climb upward If the indicator becomes full movie shooting will stop automatically If the card has a fast writing speed the indicator will either not appear or the level if displayed will hardly go upward First shoot a few test movies to see if the card can write fast enough Indicator Still Photo Shooting During Movie Shooting e Regarding the image quality of still photos see Image
307. ster cannot be selected To delete unnecessary battery information see page 341 339 UEM Checking the Battery Information le ee SS SS _____ __ __ __ Labeling the Serial No on the Battery Affixing a serial number label onto all the registered Battery Pack LP E6 s makes it convenient Serial No 1 Write the serial number ona Battery info label C 7c400300 wees 93 21 09 2011 e Write the serial number displayed on the battery history screen on a commercially available label approx 25 mm x 15 mm 1 0 in x 0 6 in in Delete info size 2 Take out the battery and affix the label Set the power switch to lt OFF gt Open the battery compartment cover and remove the battery e Affix the label as shown side with no electrical contacts in the illustration e Repeat this procedure for all of your battery packs so you can easily see the serial number Q e Do not affix the label on any part other than as shown in the illustration in step 2 Otherwise the misplaced label may make it difficult to insert the battery or impossible to turn on the camera e If you use Battery Grip BG E11 the label may peel off as you repeatedly insert and remove the battery pack If it peels off affix a new label 340 Checking the Battery Information i a a 8S Se Checking the Remaining Capacity of a Registered Battery Pack You can check the remaining capacity of any battery pack even when not installed and a
308. sting shooting and checking the result Repeat this until the desired adjustment is made If you use a zoom lens make the adjustment for the wide angle W and telephoto T ends AF Microadjustment 6 Select Adjust by lens EF24 105mm f 4L IS USM Turn the lt gt dial to select Adjust Adjust focus for each model of lens individually by lens Disable Allby same amount 0 Adjust by lens W 0 T 0 INFO GOGE 9 Clear all e AF Microadjustment AF 2 Press the lt INFO gt button LOOJER2 105mm 1 40 IS USM gt The Adjust by lens screen will ka Ga appear Review edit lens information Check and change the lens information a Check the lens information 1234567890 Press the lt INFO gt button gt The screen will show the lens name and a 10 Cancel digit serial number When the serial number is displayed select OK and go to step 4 Ifthe lens serial number cannot be confirmed 0000000000 will be displayed Enter the number as indicated below See the next page about the asterisk displayed in front of the lens serial number 106 TEN Fine Adjustment of AF s Point of Focus i a a a Se 9 ee i Review edit lens information Enter the serial number e Turn the lt gt dial to select the digit 00 EF24 105mm 4L IS USM then press lt gt to display lt c1 gt 0000000000 Turn the lt gt dial to enter the number then press lt gt e After entering all the digit
309. sults p 90 Case 4 For subjects that accelerate or decelerate quickly Geared for tracking moving subjects whose speed can change dramatically For subjects that accel and suddenly ick erate or decelerate quickly Effective for subjects having sudden Tracking sensitivity ooo E Accel decel tracking a a movements sudden acceleration AF pt auto switching a a i TERETE deceleration or sudden stops Default settings Tracking sensitivity 0 e Accel decel tracking 1 AF pt auto switching 0 F If the moving subject suddenly and greatly changes speed setting Accel decel tracking to 2 may give better results p 91 87 CEM Selecting Al Servo AF Characteristics For a Subject Case 5 For erratic subjects moving quickly in any direction a Even if the target subject moves ZZ ae dramatically up down left or right the i For erratic subjects moving AF point will switch automatically to KH quickly in any direction A agi akn Sena A focus track the subject Effective for Y Accel decel tracking S amp a a shooting subjects that move dramatically oY AF pt auto switching a i a up down left or right This setting takes INFO Lafe RATEDE effect when the following AF area Default settings selection modes are set AF point Tracking sensitivity 0 expansion Manual selection a AF Accel decel tracking 0 AF pt auto switching 1
310. t Delete all items Display from My Menu Disable Select item to register 3 Register the desired items Image quality i Select an item to register then press Image review pash SO yi Release shutter without card On the confirmation dialog select OK Lens aberration correction i z Pena SAA can and press lt gt to register the item MENUS e You can register up to six items e To return to the screen in step 2 press the lt MENU gt button About My Menu Settings e Sort You can change the order of the registered items in My Menu Select Sort and select the item whose order you want to change Then press lt gt With displayed turn the lt gt dial to change the order then press lt gt Delete item items and Delete all items You can delete any of the registered items Delete item items deletes one item at a time and Delete all items deletes all registered items e Display from My Menu When Enable is set the xX tab will be displayed first when you display the menu screen 331 Register Custom Shooting Modes mmm You can register current camera settings such as the shooting mode menu functions and Custom Function settings as Custom shooting modes under the Mode Dial s lt gt lt gt and lt gt positions 1 Select Custom shooting mode C1 C3 Clear all camera settings CORI PIA Under the 4 tab select Custom O firmware ver 1 0 0 shooting m
311. t gt ISO Auto minimum shutter speed Auto settings AF mode One Shot AF Drive mode C Single shooting AF area Single point AF Exposure selection mode Manual selection compensation Canceled AF point selection Center AEB Registered AF point Canceled Flash exposure 3 0 Zero F B compensation Metering mode 4 Evaluative metering Multiple exposure Disable ISO speed Auto HDR Mode Disable HDR ini imit Mirror locku Disable ISO speed range Minimum limit 100 p Maximum limit 25600 Custom Functi Unchanged Minimum limit 100 Functions Auto ISO range Maxi limit 12800 aximum mik Flash function Unchanged 56 Before You Start Image recording Settings AF Settings Image quality aL Case1 Parameter Picture Style Standard Case 1 6 settings of all TR cases cleared pate Lighting Standard piimizon Al Servo 1st image sey riorit Equal priority Peripheral Enable priority illumination Correction data Al Servo 2nd image m correction retained priority Equal priority Chromatic Enable USM lens electronic Enable after aberration Correction data MF One Shot AF correction retained AF assist beam firing Enable White balance Auto One Shot AF S TR Focus priority Custom White Balance Canceled release priority White balance Lens drive when AF Continue focus Canceled s 3 corr
312. t Ke dll I gt NK lw Specify the part to be edited out e Select either 441 Cut beginning or E8 Cut end then press lt gt Tilt lt 4 gt to the left or right to see the previous or next frames Holding it down will fast forward the frames Turn the lt gt dial for frame by frame playback e After deciding which part to edit out press lt gt The portion highlighted in blue on the top of the screen is what will remain Check the edited movie e Select gt and press lt gt to play back the portion highlighted in blue To change the editing go back to step 2 e To cancel the editing select and press lt gt 263 X Editing the Movie s First and Last Scenes A Save the movie e Select then press lt gt gt The save screen will appear e To save it as a new movie select New file To save it and overwrite the original movie file select Overwrite Then press lt 6 gt On the confirmation screen select OK then press lt gt to save the edited movie and return to the movie playback screen Q Since the editing is performed in 1 sec increments position indicated by X the exact position where the movie is edited may differ slightly from the position you specified lf the card does not have enough free space New file will not be available 264 uam Slide Show Auto Playback ma You can play back the images on the card as an autom
313. t gt again The lt gt icon will disappear e To protect another image repeat step 3 e Press the lt MENU gt button to return to the menu 272 Protecting Images 8 SS 2 I Protecting All Images in a Folder or Card You can protect all the images in a folder or on a card at one time o Protect Images ii Under L 1 Protect images when Select images you select All images in folder or All All images in folder images on card all the images in the Unprotect all images in folder All images on card folder or on a card will be protected Unprotect all images on card To cancel the image protection select Unprotect all images in folder or Unprotect all images on card MENU a Set with the lt RATE gt Button During image playback you can use the lt RATE gt button to protect an Set 3 btn function to Protect e Play back the images and select the image to be protected When you press the lt RATE gt button the image will be protected and the lt gt icon will appear at the top of the screen e To cancel the image protection press the lt RATE gt button again The lt gt icon will disappear Q If you format the card p 53 the protected images will also be erased F Movies can also be protected Once an image is protected it cannot be erased by the camera s erase function To erase a protected image you must first cancel the protection f you e
314. t a negative exposure compensation Exposure Compensation Setting Guide for Multiple Exposures Two exposures 1 stop three exposures 1 5 stop four exposures 2 stops Q If On Func Ctrl and Additive are both set the image displayed during shooting may look noisy However when you finish shooting the set number of exposures noise reduction will be applied and the final multiple exposure image will look less noisy e Average Based on the No of exposures negative exposure compensation is set automatically as you shoot multiple exposures If you shoot multiple exposures of the same scene the exposure of the subject s background will be automatically controlled to obtain a standard exposure If you want to change the exposure of each single exposure select Additive e Bright Dark The brightness or darkness of the base image and the images to be added are compared at the same position and then the bright or dark part will be left in the picture Depending on the overlapping colors the colors may be mixed depending on the brightness or darkness ratio of the compared images Multiple exposure Set the No of exposures e Turn the lt gt dial to select the No of exposures 2 number of exposures then press lt gt e You can set it from 2 to 9 exposures 178 Multiple Exposures Multiple exposure 6 Set the images to be saved e To save all the single exposures and the merged multiple exposure imag
315. t and cause skin burns Do not use paint thinner benzene or other organic solvents to clean the equipment Doing so may cause fire or a health hazard If the product does not work properly or requires repair contact your dealer or your nearest Canon Service Center 384 European Union and EEA only These symbols indicate that this product is not to be disposed of with your household waste according to the WEEE Directive 2002 96 EC the Battery Directive 2006 66 EC and or your national laws implementing those Directives a If a chemical symbol is printed beneath the symbol shown above in accordance with the Battery Directive this indicates that a heavy metal Hg Mercury Cd Cadmium Pb Lead is present in this battery or accumulator at a concentration above an applicable threshold specified in the Battery Directive This product should be handed over to a designated collection point e g on an authorized one for one basis when you buy a new similar product or to an authorized collection site for recycling waste electrical and electronic equipment EEE and batteries and accumulators Improper handling of this type of waste could have a possible impact on the environment and human health due to potentially hazardous substances that are generally associated with EEE Your cooperation in the correct disposal of this product will contribute to the effective usage of natural r
316. t x 4 gt in the viewfinder will blink If this occurs the picture cannot be taken even if the shutter button is pressed completely Recompose the picture and try to focus again Or see When Autofocus Fails p 110 If 421 Beep is set to Disable the beeper will not sound when focus is achieved e After achieving focus with One Shot AF you can lock the focus on a subject and recompose the shot This is called focus lock This is convenient when you want to focus a subject not covered by the Area AF frame Al Servo AF for Moving Subjects This AF mode is suited for moving subjects when the focusing distance keeps changing While you hold down the shutter button halfway the subject will be focused continuously e The exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken When the AF area selection mode is set to 61 point automatic selection p 72 the camera first uses the manually selected AF point to focus During autofocusing if the subject moves away from the manually selected AF point focus tracking continues as long as the subject is covered by the Area AF frame Fl With Al Servo AF the beeper will not sound even when focus is achieved Also the focus confirmation light lt gt in the viewfinder will not light up Al Focus AF for Automatic Switching of AF Mode Al Focus AF switches the AF mode from One Shot AF to Al Servo AF automatically if a still subject starts moving e After the subject is focused in
317. te in the lt J gt and lt P gt modes the ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO 400 1600 125 ISO Setting the ISO Speed M M0 Setting the ISO Speed Range You can set the manually settable ISO speed range minimum and maximum limits You can set the minimum limit within L ISO 50 to H1 ISO 51200 and the maximum limit within ISO 100 to H2 ISO 102400 a k 1 Select ISO speed settings Expo comp AEB 3 2 1 1 23 e Under the 2 tab select ISO ISO speed settings A lt A ONES speed settings then press lt gt White balance Awe Custom White Balance WB Shift Bkt 0 0 0 Color space sRGB ISO speed settings 2 Select ISO speed range ISO speed Auto Select ISO speed range then press ISO speed range 100 25600 lt 5 Auto ISO range 100 128000 5 Min shutter spd Auto ISO speed range 3 Set the minimum limit Minimum Maximum Select the minimum limit box then L 50 25600 press lt gt E Turn the lt gt dial to select the minimum limit ISO speed then press lt gt ISO speed range A Set the maximum limit Minimum Maximum Select the maximum limit box then L 50 press Se eee Turn the lt gt dial to select the maximum limit ISO speed then press lt gt 5 Exit the setting Turn the lt gt dial to select OK then press lt gt gt The menu reappears 126 ISO Setting the ISO Speed ies SS SS Setting the ISO Speed Range for Aut
318. tely or use Remote Switch RS 80N3 sold separately or Timer Remote Controller TC 80N3 sold separately to start stop the movie shooting p 185 However when M W is set still photo shooting is not possible p 228 240 Q Movie Shooting Cautions White lt i gt and Red lt gt Internal Temperature Warning Icons f the camera s internal temperature increases due to prolonged movie shooting or a high ambient temperature a white icon lt gt will appear Even if you shoot a movie while this icon is displayed the movie s image quality will hardly be affected However if you shoot still photos the image quality of the still photos may degrade You should stop shooting still photos for a while and allow the camera to cool down If the camera s internal temperature further increases while the white icon lt M gt is displayed a red icon lt gt may start blinking This blinking icon is a warning that movie shooting will soon end automatically If this happens you will not be able to shoot again until the camera s internal temperature decreases Turn off the power and let the camera rest for a while Shooting a movie at a high temperature for a prolonged period will cause the lt gt and lt i gt icons to appear earlier When you are not shooting turn off the camera Recording and Image Quality Ifthe attached lens has an Image Stabilizer the Image Stabilizer will operate at all times even if you do not pre
319. ter button halfway the focusing will be continuous When you want to take the picture press the shutter button completely 67 GF Full Auto Techniques Scene Intelligent Auto Live View Shooting You can shoot while viewing the image on the LCD monitor This is called Live View shooting For details see page 197 Set the Live View shooting Movie shooting switch to lt g gt 2 Display the Live View image on the LCD monitor Press the lt gt button gt The Live View image will appear on the LCD monitor 3 Focus the subject e Aim the center AF point lt gt on the subject Press the shutter button halfway to focus gt When focus is achieved the AF point will turn green and the beeper will sound 7 4 Take the picture gt Press the shutter button completely gt The picture will be taken and the captured image is displayed on the LCD monitor gt After the image review ends the camera will return to Live View shooting automatically Press the lt gt button to end the Live View shooting 68 Setting the AF and Drive Modes The 61 AF points in the viewfinder make AF shooting suitable for a oe wide variety of subjects and SEE Cees scenes You can also select the AF mode and drive mode that best match the shooting conditions and subject e A x icon at the upper right of a page title indicates that the function ca
320. ter synchronization 1st 2nd curtain Wireless Flash exposure bracketing 195 Flash exposure compensation Flash mode Flash sync contacts ceeeee 18 Focus confirmation light Focus lock R 67 Focus mode switch 39 111 214 Focusing gt AF Folder Create Select 150 Format card initialization 53 Frame Tate sarsii prinesie Full Auto Scene Intelligent Auto 64 FPU HDsar taan 231 233 Full High Definition Full HD iiien 231 259 268 Headphones cccceeceeseeeneees 235 High ISO speed noise reduction 143 High Definition HD 231 259 268 Highlight alert 20 0 0 ee eeeeeeeeee 247 Highlight detail loss 0 0 0 247 Highlight tone priority 146 Histogram Brightness RGB 248 HOt SOG ais nae nmnniet ance 188 Household power ccceeeee 342 ESS Ss ICG profile iii eee ERE 158 Illumination LCD panel 48 Image AF point display cee Auto playback Auto rotate Copying Erase Highlight alert Histogram Jump display Image browsing Magnified view Manual rotate NO ranieri Playback Protect Rating Shooting information ait Slide ShOW 0 0 eee 265 Transfer Two image display 253 View on TV 259 268 Image dust prevention 289 Image review Image Stabilizer lens Image
321. the card in a case e Do not store the card in hot dusty or humid locations Lens After detaching the lens from the camera attach the lens caps and put down the lens with the rear end up to avoid scratching the lens surface and electrical contacts Contacts Cautions During Prolonged Use a If you use continuous shooting Live View shooting or movie shooting for a prolonged period the camera may become hot Although this is not a malfunction holding the hot camera for a long period can cause slight skin burns 15 Quick Start Guide Tes Insert the battery p 30 e To charge the battery see page 28 fy 4 is A Insert a card p 31 The camera front side slot is for a CF card and the camera back side slot is for an SD card Set the lens focus mode switch to lt AF gt p 39 Set the power switch to lt ON gt p 34 Quick Start Guide While holding down the center of the Mode Dial set it to lt GJ gt Scene Intelligent Auto p 64 e All the necessary camera settings E will be set automatically Focus the subject p 44 Look through the viewfinder and aim the viewfinder center over the subject Press the shutter button halfway and the camera will focus the subject Take the picture p 44 Press the shutter button completely to take the picture Oy Review the picture p 55 The captured imag
322. there are too many pixels on the right the color will be too saturated with no gradation By checking the image s RGB histogram you can see the color s saturation and gradation condition and white balance inclination 248 Normal brightness gt Searching for Images Quickly ma 3 Display Multiple Images on One Screen Index Display You can search for images quickly with the index display showing four or nine images on one screen Press the lt Q gt button e During image playback press the lt Q gt button gt 2 Q will be displayed on the lower right of the screen Switch to the index display Turn the lt gt dial counterclockwise gt The 4 image index display will appear The currently selected image will be highlighted in a blue frame If you turn the lt s7 gt dial further counterclockwise the 9 image index display will appear Turning the lt 73 gt dial clockwise will switch the display from 9 images 4 images and to one image vy AL y JS Select an image Turn the lt gt dial to move the blue frame and select the image Press the lt Q gt button to turn off the x Q icon then turn the lt 7 gt dial to go to the next or preceding screen Press lt 6E gt in the index display and the selected image will be displayed as a single image 249 L Searching for Images Quickly SSS Jump through Images Jump Display With the sing
323. ting of the selected function is displayed at the bottom Turn the lt gt or lt gt dial to set it e To set the card selection or recording function press lt gt then turn the lt gt or lt gt dial to set it F During movie shooting you can set the following Shutter speed aperture ISO speed exposure compensation and sound recording level Settable functions may differ depending on the shooting mode and Sound recording setting 230 uam Setting the Movie Recording Size mum Movie rec size With i 4 Movie rec size you can set 1920x1080 25fps 17 18 the movie s image size frame rate per Oe al second and compression method The ae frame rate switches automatically Tam Ga El ao Gs F depending on the 3 Video system Fain Ga a setting In the lt E gt mode these menu options are displayed under 82 Moo T25 1P8 Fao 450 PB e Image size fig20 1920x1080 Full High Definition Full HD recording quality The aspect ratio will be 16 9 fi2g0 1280x720 High Definition HD recording quality The aspect ratio will be 16 9 I640 640x480 Standard definition recording quality The aspect ratio will be 4 3 e Frame rate fps frames per second 30 9 For areas where the TV format is NTSC North America Japan Korea Mexico etc m i For areas where the TV format is PAL Europe Russia China Australia etc I Mainly for motion pictures e Compression method PB
324. tion Auto Lighting Optimizer Highlight tone priority Provided Lens aberration correction Peripheral illumination correction Chromatic aberration correction e Viewfinder Type Eye level pentaprism Coverage Vertical Horizontal approx 100 with Eye point approx 21 mm Magnification Approx 0 71x 1 m with 50 mm lens at infinity Eye point Approx 21 mm from eyepiece lens center at 1 m Built in dioptric adjustment Approx 3 0 1 0 m dpt Focusing screen Fixed AF status indicator Provided Grid display Provided Electronic level Horizontal 1 increments 6 Vertical 1 increments 4 During horizontal shooting Mirror Quick return type Depth of field preview Provided e Autofocus Type TTL secondary image registration phase detection AF points 61 points Up to 41 cross type points Number of available AF points and cross type points vary depending on the lens Focusing brightness range EV 2 18 with center f 2 8 AF point 23 C 73 F ISO 100 Focus modes One Shot AF Al Servo AF Al Focus AF Manual focusing MF AF area selection modes Single point Spot AF manual selection Single point AF manual selection AF point expansion manual selection up down left and right AF point expansion manual selection surround Zone AF manual selection Auto selection of 61 AF points AF Configuration tool Case 1 6 Al Servo characteristics Tracking sensitivity Acceleration deceleratio
325. tions they will be set for the respective orientation Whenever you change the camera orientation the camera will switch to the AF area selection mode and manually selected AF point or Zone set for that orientation Q If you clear the camera settings to their defaults p 56 the setting will be Same for both vert horiz Also your settings for the three camera orientations will be cleared and all three will revert to Single point AF Manual selection with the center AF point selected 101 MM Customizing AF Functions jem Ss SS UUl AF5 Manual AF point selection pattern During manual AF point selection the selection can either stop at the outer edge or it can move to the opposite AF point This function works in AF area selection modes other than 61 point automatic selection AF and Zone AF It works in 61 point automatic selection AF only with Al Servo AF Manual AF pt selec pattern Sad l Stops at AF area edges Stops at AF area edges faa Convenient if you often use an AF point Continuous along the edge fa Continuous Instead of stopping at the outer edge the selected AF point continues to the opposite side AF point display during focus You can set whether or not to display the AF point s in the following cases 1 When selecting the AF point s 2 When the camera is ready to shoot before AF operation 3 During AF operation and 4 When focus is achieved AF point display during focus ota Selected
326. tness levels LCD brightness Manual Adjustable to one of seven brightness levels ae Date Time Zone Date year month day Time hour min 36 sec Daylight saving time Time zone Language Select the interface language 38 VF grid display Disable Enable 59 GPS device settings Settings available when the GPS Receiver GP E2 sold separately is attached If GPS device setting is not displayed update the camera firmware Q When using a GPS device or a Wireless File Transmitter be sure to check the countries and areas of use and use the device in accordance with the laws and regulations of the country or region 353 Menu Settings Y Set up 3 Yellow Page Video system NTSC PAL fa Power Remaining capacity Shutter count 338 Battery info Recharge performance Battery registration to Battery history 341 Auto cleaning Enable Disable 290 Sensor cleaning Clean now Clean manually 293 OG button display Displays camera settings Electronic level 336 options Displays shooting functions A 255 button function Rating Protect 273 Communication Displayed when WFT E7 sold separately is E settings attached Y Set up 4 Yellow Custom shooting mode Register current camera settings to the Mode 332 C1 C3 Dial s and positions Clear all camera settings Resets the camera to the default settings 56 z F A Display copyrig
327. to lt ON gt the lens Image Stabilizer operates when you press the button assigned to this function Qq VF electronic level When you press the button assigned to this function the viewfinder will display a grid and an electronic level using the AF points 329 9 2 Custom Controls iE MENU Menu display Pressing lt gt will display the menu on the LCD monitor B Image playback Pressing lt gt will play back images Q Magnify Reduce press SET turn Press lt gt to magnify the images recorded on the card See p 251 for the operation procedure You can also magnify the Live View image during Live View shooting and movie shooting when focusing with Live Mode Quick Mode and manual focus p 210 214 OFF No function disabled Use this setting when you do not want to assign any function to the button 330 11M Registering My Menu memm Under the My Menu tab you can register up to six menu options and Custom Functions whose settings you change frequently a E 1 Select My Menu settings My Menu settings e Under the x tab select My Menu settings then press lt gt My Menu settings 2 Select Register to My Menu Register to My Menu Select Register to My Menu then Sort Delete item items press lt g
328. to aspect ratios is shown in the table below The asterisked image recording quality figures do not exactly match the aspect ratio The image will be cropped slightly Aspect Ratio and Pixel Count 350 000 pixels 310 000 pixels 290 000 pixels Image Quality 3 2 4 3 16 9 1 1 M 3840x2560 3408x2560 3840x2160 2560x2560 9 8 megapixels 8 7 megapixels 8 3 megapixels 6 6 megapixels s1 2880x1920 2560x1920 2880x1624 1920x1920 5 5 megapixels 4 9 megapixels 4 7 megapixels 3 7 megapixels s2 1920x1280 1696x1280 1920x1080 1280x1280 2 5 megapixels 2 2 megapixels 2 1 megapixels 1 6 megapixels 53 720x480 640x480 720x400 480x480 230 000 pixels 288 Sensor Cleaning The camera has a Self Cleaning Sensor Unit attached to the image sensor s front layer low pass filter to shake off dust automatically The Dust Delete Data can also be appended to the image so that the dust spots remaining can be erased automatically by Digital Photo Professional provided software p 390 About smudges adhering to the front of the sensor Besides dust entering the camera from outside in rare cases lubricant from the camera s internal parts may adhere to the front of the sensor If visible spots still remain after the automatic sensor cleaning having the sensor cleaned by a Canon Service Center is recommended F Even while the Self Cleaning Sensor
329. to the shutter button s halfway position the camera operation will resume The shooting noise is thereby minimized Even if continuous shooting is set only a single shot will be taken Disable Be sure to set it to Disable if you use a TS E lens other than those listed in Fl below for shifting the lens vertically or if you use an Extension tube Setting it to Mode 1 or Mode 2 will result in incorrect or irregular exposures Q f you use flash silent shooting will not be possible regardless of the Silent LV shoot setting When using a non Canon flash unit set it to Disable The flash will not fire if it is set to Mode 1 or Mode 2 e f Mode 2 is set and you use remote control shooting p 186 the operation will be the same as with Mode 1 F With the TS E17mm f 4L or TS E24mm f 3 5L II lens you can use Mode 1 or Mode 2 e Metering timer You can change how long the exposure setting is displayed AE lock time Fl If you select t493 Dust Delete Data 3 Sensor cleaning Y 4 Clear all camera settings or 4 Firmware Ver the Live View shooting will be terminated 206 Using AF to FOCUS mx Selecting the AF Mode The AF modes available are Live mode X Live mode face detection p 208 and Quick mode p 212 If you want to achieve precise focus set the lens focus mode switch to lt MF gt magnify the image and focus manually p 214 o Q k Select the AF mode 3 Under
330. to view the Instruction Manual files PDF format Install Adobe Reader if it is not already installed on your computer To save the PDF manual to your computer use the Save function of your Adobe Reader MACINTOSH S EOS Software Instruction Manuals Disk Copy the PDF Instruction Manuals contained on the disk to your Macintosh 1 Insert the EOS Software Instruction Manuals Disk CD into the CD ROM drive of your Macintosh 2 Open the disk Double click on the disk icon 3 Double click the START html file Select your language and operating system The index of the Instruction Manuals is displayed Q Adobe Reader latest version recommended must be installed to view the Instruction Manual files PDF format Install Adobe Reader if it is not already installed on your 5 Macintosh To save the PDF manual to your computer use the Save function of your Adobe Reader 393 Index me 10 sec or 2 sec delay 113 1280x720 1920x1080 4 or 9 image index display 249 61 point automatic selection AF enanitos 73 77 BA0X4 80s rerai 231 es AC Adapter Kit Access lamp Adobe RGB AF AF area selection mode 72 75 AF Microadjustment AF point AF point selection AF status indicator AF assist beam Difficult to focus subjects 110 211 Manual focusing 111 214 Out of focus 42 43 110 211 RECOMPOSE eeeceeeteeeteeetee
331. trols Picture Style Jaaa Mawe iE ri MAL AF mode SE OA Leg S Image recording quality Quick Control icon ol Zev AEREE Possible shots Battery check White balance Remaining number of exposures multiple Eye Fi card transmission status exposures Metering mode Flash ready FE lock High speed sync Drive mode Auto Lighting Optimizer Card indicator Card selection icon Multiple exposures HDR e Pressing the lt Q gt button enables Quick Control of the shooting settings p 49 e If you press the lt ISO amp 4 gt lt AF DRIVE gt lt WB gt or lt E gt button the respective setting screen will appear on the LCD monitor and you can turn the lt gt or lt gt dial to set the function You can also select the AF point with lt 4 gt AF mode Metering mode AF point selection One Shot AF Evaluative metering Auto selection 61 pt AF ONESHOT AIFOCUS AISERVO a 305 Drive mode White balance Single shooting Auto S Ele a o a o amp ma a ke 4 a Flash exposure comp F If you turn off the power while the Shooting settings display screen is displayed the same screen will be displayed when you turn on the power again To cancel this press the lt INFO gt button to turn off the screen then turn off the power switch 337 uam Checking the Battery Information mmm You can check the battery s condition on the LCD monitor Each Battery Pack LP E6 has a unique seri
332. ts functions before using it If you have not used the camera for some time or if there is an important shoot coming up have the camera checked by your Canon dealer or check the camera yourself and make sure it is working properly 14 Handling Precautions a rag LCD Panel and LCD Monitor e Although the LCD monitor is manufactured with very high precision technology with over 99 99 effective pixels there may be a few dead pixels among the remaining 0 01 or less pixels Dead pixels displaying only black or red etc are not a malfunction They do not affect the images recorded If the LCD monitor is left on for a prolonged period screen burn in may occur where you see remnants of what was displayed However this is only temporary and will disappear when the camera is left unused for a few days e In low or high temperatures the LCD monitor display may seem slow or it may look black It will return to normal at room temperature Cards To protect the card and its recorded data note the following Do not drop bend or wet the card Do not subject it to excessive force physical shock or vibration Do not touch the card s electronic contacts with your fingers or anything metallic e Do not store or use the card near anything having a strong magnetic field such as a TV set speakers or magnet Also avoid places prone to having static electricity Do not leave the card in direct sunlight or near a heat source Store
333. tter button when ready Sensor cleaning 291 MEM Appending Dust Delete Data iS ee SS _ 3 Photograph a solid white object e Ata distance of 20 cm 30 cm 0 7 ft 1 0 ft fill the viewfinder with a patternless solid white object and take a picture gt The picture will be taken in aperture priority AE mode at an aperture of f 22 Since the image will not be saved the data can still be obtained even if there is no card in the camera Dust Delete Data gt When the picture is taken the camera will start collecting the Dust Delete Data Data obtained When the Dust Delete Data is obtained a message will appear Select OK and the menu will reappear Ifthe data was not obtained successfully a message to that effect will appear Follow the Preparation procedure on the preceding page then select OK Take the picture again About the Dust Delete Data After the Dust Delete Data is obtained it is appended to all the JPEG and RAW images captured thereafter Before an important shoot you should update the Dust Delete Data by obtaining it again For details about using Digital Photo Professional provided software p 390 to erase dust spots refer to the PDF Software Instruction Manual p 393 on the CD ROM The Dust Delete Data appended to the image is so small that it hardly affects the image file size Q Be sure to use a solid white object such as a new sheet of white paper If the p
334. u can edit images with originals remaining unchanged e Can be used by a wide range of users from amateurs to professionals It is especially recommended for users who mainly shoot RAW images ImageBrowser EX Image Viewing and Editing Software e You can view browse and print JPEG images on your computer e You can play movies MOV files video snapshot albums and extract still photos from movies You can download additional functions with an internet connection e Recommended for novices who are using a digital camera for the first time and amateur users Q Note that the software ZoomBrowser EX ImageBrowser provided with previous cameras does not support still photos and movie files shot with this camera not compatible Use ImageBrowser EX provided with this camera Picture Style Editor Picture Style File Creating Software e This software is aimed at advanced users who are experienced in processing images e You can edit Picture Style to your unique image characteristics and create save an original Picture Style file 390 Software Start Guide ja eS ae eee Installing the Software on Windows Compatible OS Windows7 Windows Vista Windows XP 1 Check that the camera is not connected to your computer Q Never connect the camera to your computer before you install the software The software will not be installed correctly 2 Insert the EOS Solution Disk CD 3 Select your geographic area country and language 4
335. unc Record func _ Standard Turn the lt gt dial to select Record Record play raider THESSU func then press lt gt B MENU s Select the recording method Record func Standard Turn the lt gt dial to select the Auto switch card Rec Separaiel recording method then press lt 61 gt Rec to multiple gt B a MENU a 116 MM Selecting the Card for Recording and Playback a Se 8 2 e Standard Images will be recorded to the card selected with Record play e Auto switch card Same as with the Standard setting but if the card becomes full the camera will automatically switch to the other card to record images When the camera switches to the other card a new folder will be created automatically e Rec separately You can set the image recording quality for each card p 119 Each image is recorded to both the CF and SD cards at the image recording quality you have set You can freely set the image recording quality to ML and GM 3 and M M etc e Rec to multiple Each image is recorded to both the CF and SD cards simultaneously at the same image size You can also select RAW JPEG Q When Rec separately is set the maximum burst will decrease greatly p 121 F When Rec separately or Rec to multiple is set the image will be recorded under the same file number to both the CF and SD cards Also the LCD panel will display the number of possible shots of th
336. und in stereo You can also use headphones during movie playback Q The audio output to the headphones will not have noise reduction applied It E will therefore be different from the sound recorded with the movie F e Inthe lt Gf gt shooting mode Sound recording settings will be On Off If On is set the sound recording level will be adjusted automatically same as with Auto and the wind filter function will take effect To adjust the headphones volume press the lt Q gt button then tilt the multi controller up or down while pressing the lt RATE gt button Note that the headphone s volume will not be displayed on the screen Adjust it while listening to the sound The sound volume balance between L left and R right cannot be adjusted The 48 kHz sampling frequency will be 16 bit recordings for both L and R e If 5 Silent Control is set to Enable p 236 you can adjust the sound recording level with the lt gt touch pad to reduce the operation noise during movie shooting 235 TN Silent Control me This function is convenient when you want to change the ISO speed sound recording level etc silently while shooting a movie Silent Control When B5 Silent Control is set to Enable Ideal for Enable you can use the touch pad gt quiet operation when lt gt on the inner ring of the Quick shooting movies Tap T 4 gt 0 Control Dial In the lt E gt mode thi
337. uous shooting 112 Silent LV shooting Single shooting Single image display Single shooting Single point AF Single point Spot AF Slide SHOW croc nercccccomceenvananies Small Image recording quality atiii 121 287 Software Speaker Stopped down aperture 00 eee 165 198 201 Sapien See eae ewes 27 System MAD ceceeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeee 356 Temperature warning Time code Tone priority eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee Toning effect Monochrome Touchpad a siisii iiidid Trimming printing eeeee Tripod socket eeeceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeees Tv Shutter priority AE Two image display ceee Ultra DMA UDMA sssssesssssssssseeeees 32 USB Digital terminal 296 309 400 Video systeM 231 271 354 View on TV 259 268 Viewfinder we 23 Dioptric adjustment 43 Electronic level 59 329 Grid display Volume Movie playback 262 aa a a Warning icon eceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeee 318 WB White balance 0 137 White balance Bracketing Color temperature setting Correction Personal Wind filter Rn Rn Canon CANON INC 30 2 Shimomaruko 3 chome Ohta ku Tokyo 146 8501 Japan Europe Africa amp Middle East CANON EUROPA N V PO Box 2262 1180 EG Amstelveen The Netherlands For your local C
338. ure Not possible when On ContShtng is set If you press the lt p gt button the operations possible during multiple exposure shooting will be displayed Operation Description Return to The operations will disappear and the screen before you previous screen pressed the lt j gt button will reappear Deletes the last image you shot shoot another image m i Undo last image The number of remaining exposures will increase by 1 If Save source imgs All images is set all of the single exposures and the merged multiple exposure image will be saved before exiting If Save source imgs Result only is set only the merged multiple exposure image will be saved before exiting 2 Save and exit K Exit without g None of the images will be saved before exiting saving Q During multiple exposure shooting you can only play back multiple exposure images 182 Multiple Exposures gt FAQ e Are there any restrictions on the image recording quality All JPEG image recording quality settings can be selected If M or S is set the merged multiple exposure will be a image e Single Exposures Merged MUP JPEG JPEG JPEG M E S M W S m JPEG GW JPEG GM JPEG M E S A JPEG M E S G0 JPEG GM JPEG e Can merge images recorded in the card With Select image for multi expo you can select the first single exposure from the images record
339. uring metering you can select an AF point directly with the lt 63 gt dial or lt lt gt without pressing the lt E amp gt button With the lt gt dial you can select a left or right AF point With Zone AF the selected zone will change in a loop 4 If you use lt gt and press the lt INFO gt button in step 3 on page 321 you can press lt gt straight down to select Switch to center AF point or Switch to registered AF point 6 Metering start When you press the shutter button halfway only exposure metering is performed AE lock When you press the button assigned to this function you can lock the exposure AE lock during the metering Convenient when you want to focus and meter the shot at different areas or when you want to take multiple shots at the same exposure setting AE lock while button pressed The exposure will be locked AE lock while you press the shutter button y AE lock hold When you press the button assigned to this function you can lock the exposure AE lock The AE lock will be maintained until you press the button again Convenient when you want to focus and meter the shot at different areas or when you want to take multiple shots at the same exposure setting Q If you assign AE lock while button pressed to the shutter button any buttons assigned to AE lock or AE lock hold will also work as AE lock while button pressed 326 2 2 Custom Controls
340. urrounding points and Zone AF manual selection of Zone are still possible E When you press the lt E gt button the AF points that are not manually selectable will not be displayed Select AF area selection mode You can limit the selectable AF area selection modes to suit your shooting preferences Turn the lt gt dial to select a selection mode then press lt 1 gt to append a lt v gt checkmark Then select OK to register the setting Select AF area selec mode a Manual select Spot AF For pinpoint focusing with a narrower AF point than single point AF o Manual selection 1 pt AF One of the AF points set by Selectable AF point setting can be selected Manual select Spot AF eae Expand AF area 2 The camera will focus with the manually selected AF point and the adjacent AF points above below left and right sas Expand AF area Surround The camera will focus with the manually selected AF point and the surrounding AF points 99 MM Customizing AF Functions ee ee eS SS SS SSS S Manual select Zone AF The 61 AF points are divided into nine zones for focusing 2 Auto selection 61 pt AF All of the AF points are used for focusing Q The lt v gt mark cannot be deleted from Manual selection 1 pt AF e Ifthe attached lens belongs to group H p 84 you can only select Manual select Spot AF and Manual selection 1 pt AF AF area selection method You can set the method
341. ut card ON Speedlite control then press lt gt ioci an aes SL gt The external Speedlite control screen External Speedlite control Mirror lockup will appear External Speedlite control Select the desired item Flash firing Enable Select the menu option to be set then E TTL Il meter Evaluative Flash sync speed in Av mode AUTO press gt Flash function settings Clear flash settings Flash C Fn settings Clear all Speedlite C Fn s Flash firing External Speedlite control To enable flash photography set Flash firing Enable Enable To enable only the AF assist tesla beam to be emitted set Disable E TTL II meter External Speedlite control For normal flash exposures set it to Evaluative If Average is set the flash amio Evaluative exposure will be averaged for the entire Average metered scene Flash exposure compensation may be necessary This setting is for advanced users 191 MEW Setting the Flash SS SS _ Flash sync speed in Av mode Flash sync speed in Av mode You can set the flash sync speed for Auto AUTO flash photography in the aperture priority 1 200 1 60sec auto 10A AE Av mode 1 200 sec fixed 1 200 e AUTO Auto The flash sync speed is set automatically within a range of 1 200 sec to 30 sec to suit the scene s brightness High speed sync is also possible 1204 1 200 1 60 sec auto Prevents a slow shutter speed from being set in lo
342. utton display options Under the Y 3 tab MEA button display options enables you to select the options _ Electronic level displayed when the lt INFO gt button is v Displays shooting functions pressed x Select the desired display option and press Cancel lt gt to append a checkmark lt V gt e After making the selection select OK then press lt gt F e Note that you cannot remove the lt v gt for all three display options e The Displays camera settings sample screen is displayed in English for all languages Even if you uncheck the Electronic level so it does not appear it will still appear for Live View shooting and movie shooting when you press the lt INFO gt button Camera Settings Shooting mode registered under the Mode Dial s and p 140 141 C1 P CZP eH WB Shift Bkt 0 0 0 p 158 Color temperature SZO K sRGB p 139 Transfer of some Long exp noise reduction images failed High ISO speed NR 0 File name BE3B p 144 Possible shots Freespace p 143 i 999 7 81 GB 999 7 72 GB p 152 p 32 121 This icon is displayed when the transfer of some images failed 336 INFO Button Functions Shooting Settings Aperture AE lock Flash exposure compensation ISO speed White balance correction Shutter speed Shooting mode Exposure level indicator BAYARAN Ee p 12800 Highlight tone priority 3 42 41 6211h Custom Con
343. utton to take another shot Metering Mode AF Point Selection Method p 74 p 167 Automatic Selection Manual Selection E AE lock is applied at the AF AE lock is applied at the lt point that achieved focus selected AF point GA AE lock is applied at the center AF point When the lens focus mode switch is set to lt MF gt AE lock is applied at the center AF point F AE lock is not possible with bulb exposures 171 B Bulb Exposures sx When bulb is set the shutter stays open as long as you hold down the shutter button completely and closes when you let go of the shutter button This is called bulb exposure Use bulb exposures for night scenes fireworks the heavens and other subjects requiring long exposures 1 Set the Mode Dial to lt B gt 2 Set the desired aperture While looking at the LCD panel turn the lt gt or lt gt dial 3 Take the picture While you hold down the shutter button the exposure will continue gt The elapsed exposure time will be displayed on the LCD panel Q Long exposures produce more noise than usual F When 3 Long exp noise reduction is set to Auto or Enable noise generated by the long exposure can be reduced p 144 e For bulb exposures using a tripod and Remote Switch RS 80N3 sold separately or Timer Remote Controller TC 80N3 sold separately is recommended p 185 e You can also use a
344. vertically oriented print from a horizontal image Image tilt correction By turning the lt gt dial you can adjust the image tilt angle up to 10 degrees in 0 5 degree increments When you adjust the image tilt the lt amp gt icon on the screen will turn blue 3 Press lt gt to exit the trimming gt The print settings screen will reappear You can check the trimmed image area on the upper left of the print settings screen 303 A Printing Q Depending on the printer the trimmed image area may not be printed as you specified The smaller you make the trimming frame the grainier the picture will look in the print While trimming the image look at the camera s LCD monitor If you look at the image on a TV screen the trimming frame may not be displayed accurately F Handling Printer Errors If you resolve a printer error no ink no paper etc and select Continue to resume printing but it does not resume operate the buttons on the printer to resume printing For details on resuming the printing refer to the printer s instruction manual Error Messages If a problem occurs during printing an error message will appear on the camera s LCD monitor Press lt Ge gt to stop printing After fixing the problem resume printing For details on how to fix a printing problem refer to the printer s instruction manual Paper Error Check whether the paper is properly loaded in the printer Ink Error Check th
345. w light conditions It is effective for preventing subject blur and camera shake However while the subject will be properly exposed with the flash the background may come out dark 1 200 1 200 sec fixed The flash sync speed is fixed at 1 200 sec This more effectively prevents subject blur and camera shake than with 1 200 1 60 sec auto However in low light the subject s background will come out darker than with 1 200 1 60 sec auto Q If 1 200 1 60 sec auto or 1 200 sec fixed has been set high speed sync is not possible in the lt Av gt mode 192 MMW Setting the Flash a ee 8 i Flash function settings On the screen the settable functions and the display will differ depending on the Speedlite current flash mode flash Custom Function settings etc For details on your Speedlite s flash functions refer to the Speedlite s instruction manual Sample display Wireless functions Flash function settings Flash zoom Flash mode SE 0 UM lle Flash coverage Shutter Flash exposure synchronization bracketing Flash exposure E compensation E TTL Il flash metering e Flash mode You can select the flash mode to suit your desired flash shooting HENO E TTL II flash metering is the standard mode of EX series Speedlites for E TTL II flash metering automatic flash shooting ETTL M MUTI ExtA ExtM The Manual flash mode is for setting the Speedlite s Flash output level yourself
346. ween the camera and lens is faulty Clean the lens contacts 01 gt Clean the electrical contacts on the camera and lens or use a Canon lens p 15 18 Card cannot be accessed Reinsert change card or format card with camera 02 gt Remove and insert the card again replace the card or format the card p 31 53 Cannot save images because card is full Replace card 04 gt Replace the card erase unnecessary images or format the card p 31 53 277 Sensor cleaning is not possible Turn the camera off and on 06 again gt Operate the power switch p 34 10 20 Shooting is not possible due to an error Turn the camera off and 30 40 on again or re install the battery 50 60 70 80 gt Operate the power switch remove and install the battery pack 99 again or use a Canon lens p 30 34 If the error still persists write down the error number and contact your nearest Canon Service Center 371 Specifications m e Type Type Recording media Image sensor size Compatible lenses Lens mount e Image Sensor Type Effective pixels Aspect ratio Dust delete feature e Recording System Recording format Image type Recorded pixels Recording function Create select a folder File name File numbering Digital single lens reflex AF AE camera CF card Type I UDMA mode 7 compatible SD memory card SDHC memory card SDXC memory
347. wn the shutter button completely the three bracketed shots will be taken continuously and the camera will automatically stop shooting When lt gt or lt j W2 gt is set the three bracketed shots will be taken continuously after a 10 sec or 2 sec delay You can set AEB in combination with exposure compensation If the AEB range exceeds 3 stops the end of the exposure level indicator will display lt 4 gt or lt gt AEB cannot be set for bulb exposures or used with flash AEB will be canceled automatically when you set the power switch to lt OFF gt or when the flash is ready to fire 170 AE Lock me Use AE lock when the area of focus is to be different from the exposure metering area or when you want to take multiple shots at the same exposure setting Press the lt gt button to lock the exposure then recompose and take the shot This is called AE lock It is effective for backlit subjects AE Lock Effects Focus the subject e Press the shutter button halfway gt The exposure setting will be displayed 2 Press the lt gt button 4 gt The lt gt icon lights up in the viewfinder to indicate that the exposure setting is locked AE lock e Each time you press the lt gt button it locks the current autoexposure setting Recompose and take the picture f you want to maintain the AE lock while taking more shots hold down the lt gt button and press the shutter b
348. you can use the SD card as usual Q Cards with 128 GB or lower capacity will be formatted in FAT format Cards with a capacity higher than 128 GB will be formatted in exFAT format If you format a card with a capacity over 128 GB with this camera and then insert it into another camera an error may be displayed and the card may become impossible to use Depending on the personal computer s OS or card reader it may not recognize a card formatted in exFAT format When the card is formatted or data is erased only the file management information is changed The actual data is not completely erased Be aware of this when selling or discarding the card When discarding the card execute low level formatting or destroy the card physically to prevent the data from being leaked e Before using a new Eye Fi card the software in the card must be installed in your computer Then format the card with the camera Fl e The card capacity displayed on the card format screen may be smaller than the capacity indicated on the card This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft 54 Before You Start ie SS a SE Setting the Power off Time Auto Power Off To save battery power the camera turns off automatically after a set time of idle operation elapses If you do not want the camera to turn off automatically set this to Disable After the power turns off you can turn on the camera again by pressing the shutte
349. ze both camera shake and subject blur ISO speed settings Select Min shutter spd ISO speed Auto Select Min shutter spd then ISO speed range 100 25600 Auto ISO range 100 12800 press lt gt Min shutter spd Auto Min shutter spd Set the desired minimum shutter Shutter speed speed Auto x o E Turn the lt gt dial to select the shutter speed then press lt gt 130 1 15 1 8 05 al gt The menu reappears INFO Palle Q e f a correct exposure cannot be obtained with the maximum ISO speed limit set with Auto ISO range a shutter speed slower than the Min shutter spd will be set to obtain a standard exposure With flash photography Min shutter spd will not be applied 128 343 Selecting a Picture Style ma By selecting a Picture Style you can obtain image characteristics matching your photographic expression or the subject The Picture Style is set automatically to lt A gt Auto in the lt G gt mode 1 Press the lt C gt button 2 Select 313 e Turn the lt gt dial to select 313 E then press lt gt gt The Picture Style selection screen will appear Picture Style Choose image effects to suit the subject or scene Select a Picture Style Standard Turn the lt gt dial to select the 03 00 4060 desired Picture Style then press 525 E lt gt gt The Picture Style will be set and the camera will be ready to shoot

2 Select an image.

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents